Quarterlytics / Specialty Retail / SCS Group Plc

SCS Group Plc

scs. · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker scs.
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry Specialty Retail
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2022 Annual Report · SCS Group Plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Create the home you love

Annual Report 2022

About ScS

ScS is one of the UK’s  
leading furniture and  
flooring retailers

Our mission is to be the UK’s best value home retailer. 
Delivering outstanding value, quality and choice with a seamless customer experience.

Strategy in action 

Continuing to drive the business forward. 

Responsibility and 
sustainability report
Creating a business that we can  
be proud of.

Financial review 

Delivering strong results and returns to 
shareholders.

Read more on page 14

Read more on page 22

Read more on page 42

Strategic report

Financial highlights
At a glance
Chair’s letter
Chief Executive Officer’s review

1 
2 
4 
6 
8  Our market
10  Our business model
12  Our strategy
14  Strategy in action
20  Key performance indicators
22  Responsibility and sustainability report
32  Task force on climate-related  
financial disclosures report

40  Section 172 statement
42  Financial review
46  Alternative performance measures (APMs)
48  Risk and risk management
50  Principal risks and uncertainties
60  Viability statement

Corporate governance
62  Board of Directors
64  Corporate governance statement 
64  Introduction from the Chair
65   Compliance with the UK Corporate 

Governance Code

68   Board leadership and company purpose
71  Division of responsibilities 
73   Composition, succession and evaluation

75  Nomination Committee report
77  Audit Committee report
84  Directors’ remuneration report
98  Directors’ report
102  Statement of Directors’ responsibilities

Financial statements
103  Independent auditors’ report to the 

members of ScS Group plc
109  Consolidated statement of  
comprehensive income

110  Consolidated statement of financial position
111  Consolidated statement of changes in equity
112  Consolidated statement of cash flows
113  Notes to the consolidated  
financial statements

131  Company statement of financial position
132  Company statement of changes in equity
133  Company statement of cash flows
134  Notes to the Company financial statements
137  Company information

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
‘Wehavemadesignificant
progressduringtheyear
onournewstrategy.’

Financial highlights

Gross sales**

£344.7m

2021: £319.2m*

Gross margin**

45.3%

2021: 46.1%*

Underlying profit before tax**

£16.4m

2021: £18.4m

Statutory earnings per share

36.2p

2021: 50.4p

Cash

£70.8m

2021: £87.7m

Dividend***

13.5p

2021: 10.0p

*  Restated.
**  See alternative performance measures on pages 46 to 47.
*** Dividend includes 4.5p interim paid and 9.0p proposed 

final dividend.

ScS Group plc
45-49 Villiers Street, Sunderland
SR1 1HA, Tyne and Wear
Tel: 0191 731 3000
www.scs.co.uk

1

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsAt a glance

Helping create the 
home you love 

We are ScS – the Sofa Carpet Specialists. We have over 
125 years of furniture and retailing experience and have 
established ourselves as one of the leading furniture and 
flooring retailers in the UK.

Where we are

98

showrooms across the UK

Each providing an engaging experience, showcasing our latest great value products 
and giving our customers the chance to find the perfect addition to their home.

9

distribution centres across the UK

Each delivering to thousands of customers every week.

1

head office

2

Supporting the business and customers from our base in Sunderland.

  Head office

  Stores

  Distribution centres

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Our purpose
Helping create the home  
you love

Our clear purpose drives strategic progress 
and supports our ambitions and 
commitments. It guides us in delivering the 
best combination of customer service, 
value for money, quality and product choice 
for our customers. Our customers and 
colleagues are at the heart of everything we 
do and at the centre of our purpose.

 See pages 12 to 19 for more information 
on our strategy

Operational highlights
Invested in our people, including 
• 
strengthening our digital and 
commercial teams, and invested in a 
new digital hub enabling us to progress 
the ‘digitally optimised’ strategy

•  Commenced the project to replace our 
contact centre technology with an 
end-to-end solution, improving our 
customer journey and overall efficiency

•  Launched our partnership with  

Ideal Home

•  Trialled in-store digital experiences 
including ‘endless aisles’ to allow our 
customers to browse our full catalogue 
from a digital station 
Implemented our new concept design 
into three stores

• 

•  Commenced our £7m share buyback 

programme

•  Developed our Environmental, Social 

and Governance (ESG) strategy and set 
clear targets

Our values
Our colleagues are key to our success, and 
we are committed to creating a great place 
for them to work.

Our culture is underpinned by our  
RIGHT values:

RESPONSIVE
To our customers, colleagues, 
markets and new ways of working

INCLUSIVE
Working and communicating with each 
other to achieve common goals

GET IT RIGHT
Doing things right first time

HARD WORKING
Passionate, committed and driven 
with a winning attitude

TRUSTED
Operating with fairness, respect, 
honesty and integrity

Our responsibility 
We have embedded our ESG strategy 
during the year, building on our RIGHT 
values and aligning our ESG ambitions with 
our business strategy. 

 See pages 22 to 31 for more information 
on ESG

Trustpilot rating

‘Excellent’

1,802

Average number  
of employees

(FY21: 1,855)

  Store: 51% (2021: 56%)

  Head office and support: 23% (2021: 22%)

  Delivery and warehousing: 26% (2021: 22%)

£344.7m

Gross sales*

  In-store furniture sales: £279.9m (2021: £244.0m) 

  In-store flooring sales: £32.6m (2021: 28.7m) 

  Online sales: £32.2m (2021: £46.5m)

* See alternative performance measures on pages 46 to 47.

3

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsChair’s letter

‘  The past couple of years have 
demonstrated the resilience  
of our business.’

Dear Shareholder,
FY22 was another successful year for ScS as 
we made good progress in the first year of 
our refreshed strategy, and delivered strong 
results whilst managing both inflationary 
cost pressures and supply chain disruptions. 
I want to thank Steve and his team for their 
stewardship, and each and every colleague 
across the business for their commitment, 
dedication and for never losing sight of our 
purpose and values.

Embedding our new purpose  
and strategy
At the end of last year we launched our new 
purpose, ‘Helping create the home you love’, 
which continues to guide the decisions we 
make and drives us to achieve our strategic 
ambitions while creating value for our 
stakeholders. I am pleased to see the 
progress we have made, particularly as we 
look to the future and how ScS will continue 
to develop its brand, customer offering and 
a culture in which our colleagues can thrive. 
My visit to the first of our new concept stores 
during the year really brought this to life, 
seeing our fresh new store design, improved 

omnichannel technology and inspiring 
product offering. The store showcases the 
best of ScS, with stylish ranges at affordable 
prices including new flooring offerings, a 
refreshed dining range, and new products 
through our partnership with Ideal Home, 
the most popular home publication in the 
UK. Ideal Home’s goal is to make great home 
design accessible to everyone, aligning well 
with our own mission of becoming the UK’s 
best value home retailer, delivering 
outstanding value, quality and choice with a 
seamless customer experience. It has been 
a particular highlight to see the progress we 
have made in improving our customer 
journey, resulting in the Group achieving the 
maximum 5-star ‘Excellent’ Trustpilot rating. 

As a Board we recognise the importance of 
embedding our purpose and strategy both 
ethically and sustainably. I was pleased this 
year to see the progress made in our ESG 
strategy and to oversee the introduction of 
new remuneration performance targets 
specifically related to ESG, which will see 
10% of the executive and senior 
management bonus schemes now 

dependent on progress in our colleague 
survey score and reduction in waste within 
our business.

maintaining our gross margin* and 
controlling costs despite inflationary 
pressures.  

 See pages 85 and 90 of our Directors’ 
remuneration report for further detail.

Resilient business model
The past couple of years have demonstrated 
the resilience of our business. Through the 
responsiveness of our teams, control of our 
flexible cost base and prudent capital 
management, we have successfully 
navigated the challenges of COVID-19 and 
protected our stakeholders’ interests. This 
year has seen the positive financial 
outcomes of that, with an increase in 
like-for-like order intake*, record delivered 
sales, an increase in the total dividend by 
35% to 13.5p and the commencement of a 
£7m share buyback. Our balance sheet 
remains strong with £70.8m of cash and no 
debt.

We further outline our strategic progress to 
date on pages 12-19, but I am particularly 
pleased that we have been successful in 

Board changes
It was with great sadness that we announced 
the sudden death of Non-Executive Director 
George Adams in November 2021. George 
joined the Board in July 2015 and was Chair 
of the Remuneration Committee and I am 
hugely thankful for the commitment he gave 
the business over that time. I know I speak 
for the whole Board when I say we miss him 
greatly, both as our colleague and friend.

I am very grateful to Angela Luger who 
agreed to take on the additional 
responsibility as Chair of the Group’s 
Remuneration Committee from January 
2022.

*  This report includes alternative performance measures 

(APMs) which are defined and reconciled to IFRS 
information, where applicable, on pages 46 to 47.

4

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022As we reflect on the strong result for the 
year, the Board is pleased to propose an 
increased final dividend of 9.0p (2021: 7.0p) 
subject to approval at the Annual General 
Meeting (AGM). This would result in a full year 
dividend of 13.5p (2021: 10.0p).

Summary
We enter the new financial year with caution 
given the current challenging economic 
environment. However, our targeted 
investment over many years in our business 
model and colleagues has generated strong 
and resilient results in the past and we are 
confident that we can take market share and 
continue to deliver for our stakeholders.

On behalf of the Board, I would like to thank 
our shareholders, suppliers and customers 
for their continued support as well as our 
colleagues for their loyalty and hard work. 

Alan Smith
Chair
10 October 2022

As a result of George’s passing, together 
with Ron McMillan and I nearing the end of 
our nine year service periods, we began the 
process to appoint three new Non-
Executive Directors. I am delighted that we 
have successfully filled all three positions 
with the recent appointments of Carol 
Kavanagh, who joined the Board on 
26 September 2022, Andy Kemp who will join 
the Board on 1 February 2023 and John 
Walden, who will join the Board as Chair 
Designate on 1 March 2023. The intention is 
that John will become the new Non-
Executive Chair on 30 November 2023 when 
I retire. Carol, Andy and John have held a 
number of relevant senior positions and 
have extensive listed company experience. I 
look forward to working with them and their 
appointments will strengthen the Board’s 
capabilities while playing a crucial role in our 
succession planning. 

Shareholder return
As I previously mentioned, the Group 
continues to maintain a strong balance 
sheet and the Board actively reviews the 
allocation of capital, considering potential 
external and internal investment 
opportunities and returns to shareholders. 
We continue to maintain a strong cash 
position, providing resilience in the current 
environment and our strategic progress 
provides us with further confidence in the 
Group’s future performance. As a 
consequence of this strength, during the 
year the Group announced a £7m share 
buyback programme which has now 
returned over £3.3m to shareholders. We 
continue to remain committed to this 
programme.

5

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsChief Executive Officer’s review

‘ We believe we are well placed  
to continue to deliver excellent 
returns to shareholders.’

Overview
The year ended 30 July 2022 marks my 
first full financial year as CEO after joining 
the business in January 2021. It is also the 
first year of our refreshed purpose, 
mission and strategy which have 
continued to drive the business forward. 

I would like to take this opportunity to thank 
all of the fantastic teams at ScS for their 
loyalty, diligence and enthusiasm over the 
past year, enabling the business to adapt, 
strengthen and overcome challenges. 
Having the right people in the right roles is 
fundamental to the success of any 
business. Our colleagues have continued to 
demonstrate the Group’s values and put 
the customers at the centre of everything 
they do. Their hard work is reflected in the 
improvement of our Trustpilot rating from 
4.5 to the maximum 5 stars, delivering an 
‘Excellent’ rating. At the start of FY23 I was 
delighted to recognise this hard work and 
loyalty, as we announced over £2m of 
investment in our colleagues take home 
pay, both through an increase in their basic 
salaries and a £400 one-off cost of living 
support payment.

6

Results
The Group started the year with a strong 
order book which, together with positive 
like-for-like order growth*, resulted in an 
increase in gross sales* of 8.0% compared 
to the prior year.

During the year we have worked hard, 
particularly alongside our suppliers, to 
manage cost inflation. Our tight oversight 
and control of margin has been a key focus 
of our strategy and has enabled us to 
deliver a strong gross margin* of 45.3% 
(2021: 46.1%) in line with pre-pandemic 
levels. Gross profit increased 6.3% to 
£156.3m (2021: £147.0m). 

Pleasingly, profits exceeded initial 
expectations despite, as predicted, being 
impacted by the planned reduction in 
business rates relief, which reduced £7.6m 
in the year to £2.6m (2021: £10.2m). 
Underlying profit before tax* excluding 
business rates relief increased to £13.8m 
(2021: £8.2m). 

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Strategic progress
I am pleased with the progress made in year 
one of our refreshed strategy, which 
colleagues have embraced together with 
new ways of thinking and working. We have 
retained a solid foundation on which we can 
build over the coming years and believe we 
are well placed to continue to deliver 
excellent returns to shareholders despite the 
economic pressures the UK is facing. I look 
forward to seeing the results of our 
investment as we build momentum and 
enter the next phase. 

During the year I was delighted to welcome 
two new directors to the Executive Board, a 
Commercial Director and a Sales and 
Operations Director. We have also recently 
appointed a Chief Marketing & Digital Officer 
as we continue to strengthen the leadership 
and capabilities across the business. We 
have also increased the capability and 
capacity of the digital team, added further 
strength to our senior commercial team, 
and grown our people team. 

In July we implemented our concept design 
in our Coventry store, where many of the 
new strategic ideas will be trialled. Initiatives 
include a refreshed showroom interior with 
improved furniture bays, a revised flooring 
department and a variety of digital features 
such as digital stations, referred to as 
‘endless aisles’, where our customers can 
browse our full range of products and build a 
wishlist. 

We have since implemented the concept 
design into a further two stores and I see this 
as  an exciting step forward in our strategy, 
and look forward to refining the new ideas 
using a data driven approach to ensure we 
see the appropriate return before further 
rollout across the store network to create 
engaging showrooms for our customers. 

A priority for our digital team in the year has 
been to review our partner base and retender 
contracts. This review has seen specialist 
agencies engaged across paid media, SEO 
and analytics. The team has also built an 
econometric model to optimise the 
effectiveness of our digital marketing, 
allowing us to continually monitor and review 
the changes we make. Ensuring that we have 
the right people, the right tools and the right 
partners is key to setting the Group up for 
digital success.

Following our partnership with a number of 
new suppliers during the year we have 
enabled direct home delivery, launched a 
new range of ‘quick delivery sofas’, refreshed 
our dining range and announced our 
partnership with Ideal Home. As we continue 
to look for ways to enhance the customer 
experience we have engaged the help of a 
third-party specialist to assist us in 
conducting detailed customer research into 
our brand awareness and consideration and 
customer segments. I look forward to 
utilising the insight that this data will provide 
in future decision making.

 Further details of our strategy can be 
found on pages 12 to 19.

We are pleased with the strategic progress 
we have made to date which, coupled with 
the strength of the Group’s balance sheet, 
places the business in a strong position to 
deal with the current headwinds. As a 
consequence, while we expect the coming 
months to be challenging, we are confident 
in the longer term growth prospects of the 
business.

Steve Carson
Chief Executive Officer
10 October 2022

Environmental, social and  
governance (ESG)
We have made significant progress during 
the year in developing our ESG strategy. A 
steering group has been established, clear 
targets have been defined and we continue 
to build our sustainability roadmap. 
ESG is an area that is rapidly advancing and is 
a standing Board agenda item, with regular 
updates provided by the ESG steering group. 
Although we are relatively early on our ESG 
journey, we have made great strides and are 
committed to driving further change.

 Further details of our ESG progress can 
be found on pages 22 to 31.

Current trading and outlook
Trading since the start of the new financial 
year has been subdued, with the challenges 
of high inflation impacting consumers’ 
disposable income. As previously reported, 
the sector is seeing softening demand as 
consumers defer spend on big ticket 
discretionary purchases. 

*  This report includes alternative performance measures 

(APMs) which are defined and reconciled to IFRS 
information, where applicable, on pages 46 to 47.

‘  During the year we have worked 
hard, particularly alongside our 
suppliers, to manage cost 
inflation. Our tight oversight 
and control of margin has been 
a key focus of our strategy.’ 

7

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsOur market

Strategic progress  
positions the Group  
to grow market share

Current UK market
We operate in both the furniture and flooring markets.

Market commentary
The furniture and flooring markets have 
both felt the impact of the challenges 
present across the wider economy. Over 
the past year we have had to work closely 
with our suppliers to contend with cost 
inflation, indicative of the well documented 
‘cost of living crisis’ in the UK, as well as 
supply chain disruption and attempts to 
reduce lead times, which had peaked as 
manufactures struggled to keep up with 
demand following the surge in order growth 
as stores reopened from the COVID-19 
lockdowns.

As the upholstery market recovered post 
COVID-19, GlobalData’s analysis suggests 
the market grew 17.3% in 2021. 2022 also 
started positively as supply chain disruption 
led to orders from 2021 being delivered in 
the new year, however GlobalData’s latest 
analysis suggests the total market value will 
reduce by 2.3% in 2022. Despite the strong 
start to the year, they believe rapid inflation 
to key essentials such as food and utilities, 

together with a fall in consumer confidence, 
will discourage shoppers from making larger 
purchases. 

Similarly, following a 13.4% increase in the 
size of the flooring market through 2021, 
GlobalData forecast a 0.6% reduction in 
2022. Again, despite the benefit to 2022 
caused by the improvement in supply 
chains, the loss of consumer confidence 
and expected reduction in housing 
transactions will discouraged shoppers 
from making discretionary purchases.

Highlighting the challenges of the current 
economic environment noted above, 
GlobalData’s monthly survey of consumers 
shows that the proportion of shoppers 
saying that they intend to stop buying 
furniture and floorcoverings in response to 
increasing inflation has increased each 
month since April. GlobalData’s consumer 
sentiment tracker shows that confidence 
has fallen to record lows.

In considering how customer journeys are 
likely to develop, GlobalData’s latest market 
commentary highlights that although 
lockdowns have made customers more 
confident purchasing online, and therefore 
online penetration is above pre-pandemic 
levels, the customer journey will remain 
multichannel, with the majority of 
customers conducting pre-purchase 
research online before then visiting stores 
to test products and buy. 

Key drivers
Both of our core markets are heavily 
influenced by similar key factors:

Consumer confidence
Consumer confidence has a direct impact 
on the appetite for big-ticket purchases. 
GfK monitor this through their Consumer 
Confidence Index, which shows that 
confidence recovered post-pandemic, 
peaking at -7 in July 2021, having been as 
low as -36 in June 2020, and having not been 
higher than -7 since May 2017. Through the 

8

Consumer confidence

-35.3

2022

-35.3

2021

2020

2019

2018

2017

-14.5

-25.9

-12.7

-9.5

-8.8

-35.000-30.625-26.250-21.875-17.500-13.125-8.750 -4.375 0.000

GfK Consumer Confidence Index – average of individual 
scores for each year. Research carried out by GfK on 
behalf of the European Commission.

Housing market

-18.9%

-18.9%

£1.48m

+42.5%

£1.04m

-11.7%

£1.18m

-1.1%

£1.19m

-2.8%

2022

2021

2020

2019

2018

2017

£1.22m

-0.8%
1.44

0.00

0.36

0.72
HMRC UK Property Transaction statistics – total of 
number of residential property transactions 
completions with a value over £40,000 within the UK, 
seasonally adjusted.

1.08

1.80

Net consumer credit lending

+4.9%

+4.9%

YTD 2022

-3.5%

-1.9%

2021

2020

2019

2018

2017

+6.5%

+9.2%

+10.3%

2

4

0

-2

-4

12
Bank of England – average 12 month growth rate for the 
calendar year of total (excluding the Student Loans 
Company) sterling net consumer credit lending to 
individuals (in percent), seasonally adjusted.

10

6

8

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022remainder of 2021 it normalised at pre-
pandemic levels until Russia’s invasion of 
Ukraine early in 2022 and the subsequent 
inflationary pressures on food and utilities. 
Confidence has fallen each month through 
2022, until it reached a record low of -49 in 
September, 36 points lower than at the 
same point in the prior year.

Housing market
The purchase of new flooring and furniture is 
often triggered by a house move. 2021 saw 
the highest number of property transactions 
since 2007 as the pent up demand following 
the lockdowns of 2020 unwound and 
purchasers benefitted from a temporarily 
reduced stamp duty. Although 2022 levels to 
August are currently down 18.9% as at the 
same point in 2021, the total number of 
housing transactions is currently on track to 
be the second highest since 2007. 

Consumer credit
The availability of consumer credit helps 
facilitate sales, and provide opportunities 
for upselling, with nearly half of our 
customers choosing to utilise this option as 
a way to pay for their products. We noticed a 
decline in the use of finance during the 
pandemic, and although this trend appears 
to be reversing, it has still not returned to 
the levels seen in 2019. This change appears 
to be consumer led, potentially as a result of 
increased savings over the period of the 
COVID-19 pandemic, and is supported by a 
further fall in net consumer credit lending of 
3.5% in 2021, following the 1.9% fall in 2020. 
2022 has begun to reverse this trend, with a 
4.9% rise in lending to date. The approval 
percentage of those requesting finance to 
purchase with us continues to remain in line 
with prior years.

Our place in the market
Increasing market share
Following a challenging year which has seen 
significant pressures on both the upholstery 
and flooring markets, and where the size of 
both markets reduced, we have been able to 
grow our market share. Our share of the 
upholstery market grew by 0.7% to 9.7%, 
with the size of the market reducing by 
2.3%. Our flooring share increased 0.2% to 
1.8%, with the size of the flooring market 
reducing 0.6%.

Value retailer
We have a differentiated value-focused 
positioning in our markets and a continued 
reputation for providing our customers with 
products at a leading range of entry to 
middle price points. We have a clear view of 
our core customer demographic, which 
consists of a broad population of aspiring 
homemakers, families and retired couples.

Opportunities for further growth
Our in-store offering has remained the 
backbone of our business and provided 
continued success. Our strategy includes 
further expansion in our network where 
appropriate. We continue to invest in our 
online presence, with sales in FY22 almost 
double those in FY19 and an ongoing 
expectation that the significant majority of 
our customers will begin their journey on 
our website. The execution of our strategic 
plan will provide further improvements to 
our people, our product, our showrooms 
and our customer journey and, together 
with a tightening economy, will provide 
opportunities to take market share.

2022 upholstery 
market share*

2022 floor coverings 
market share*

9.7%

1.8%

  ScS 

  Other

  ScS 

  Other

* Market share data provided by GlobalData. 

2021 market share: 9.0%

2021 market share: 1.6%

Retailer

Competitor A
ScS
Competitor B
Competitor C
Competitor D
Competitor E
Competitor F
Competitor G
Competitor H
Competitor I

2021 (%)

2022e (%)

Retailer

2021 (%)

2022e (%)

27.3%
9.0%
8.2%
6.6%
4.8%
5.7%
2.8%
2.5%
1.8%
1.6%

28.0%
9.7%
8.8%
6.6%
5.2%
5.0%
2.5%
1.9%
1.8%
1.6%

Competitor A
Competitor B
Competitor C
Competitor D
Competitor E
Competitor F
Competitor G
Competitor H
Competitor I
ScS (14th)

15.5%
7.0%
6.6%
4.0%
3.9%
3.0%
3.7%
2.6%
2.3%
1.6%

16.1%
7.0%
6.9%
4.2%
3.8%
3.4%
3.4%
2.9%
2.5%
1.8%

Forecast 2022 market 
size: Furniture**

£3,094m

-2.3%

Forecast 2022 market 
size: Flooring**

£1,908m

-0.6%

**  Source: GlobalData (as of 23 Sept 2022).

S
t
r
a
t
e
g

i
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

|

C
o
r
p
o
r
a
t
e
g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

|

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

99

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Our business model

Delivering outstanding value,  
quality and choice with a  
seamless customer experience

Employee satisfaction score

71

Colleague survey score

Trustpilot rating

‘Excellent’

10

Digital
Supporting 
omnichannel 
shopping 
journeys

Range of  
price points
Our sofa ranges start from 
£329 and go up to over £6,000, 
offering value and choice for  
our customers

Easy ways  
to pay
Long-term 
interest-free  

credit making  
buying affordable

Prime 
locations

High quality 
stores in prime 

locations 

Our key 
ingredients

Customer 
experience 
5-star service delivered 
by our passionate and 
trusted colleagues.

Brands
Long-term 
relationships 
with leading 
furniture and 

flooring 
brands

Donated to local and national charities

£64,000

Dividend per share

13.5p

Dividend includes 4.5p interim paid 
and 9.0p proposed final dividend

Over

65%

of product is manufactured in the UK  
and Europe

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022What we do
Showrooms
•  Our passionate and skilled retail 

professionals are on hand to help the 
customer choose the right product for 
them within our large, modern 
showrooms.

•  Our showrooms allow us to create an 

inspiring experience for our customers, 
showcasing our product ranges and 
giving our customers the opportunity to 
purchase their furniture and flooring 
under a single roof.

•  Our showrooms work alongside our 

online channel, providing our customers 
with the chance to view and test the 
comfort of our products.

•  We provide a free surveying service so 
that flooring customers can be assured 
they have ordered the correct quantity 
of floor covering for their home.

Product
•  The majority of our furniture products 

are made-to-order and tailored to meet 
our customers’ needs.

•  Our flooring offering ranges from 

carpets and rugs to wood, laminate and 
luxury vinyl tiling.

•  Our variety of dining and occasional 

ranges offer something for every home. 

•  We continuously refresh our product 

offering, exploring new design 
aesthetics and brands.

•  We work closely with our suppliers to 

ensure that we are able to offer 
inspiring, comfortable products at a 
range of affordable price points.
•  We partner with some of the most 
recognisable brands in the market, 
whose products are an excellent match 
for our customers’ homes.

Digital
•  Our online presence supports our 
showroom network providing our 
customers with an omnichannel 
experience.

•  We offer an extensive range of furniture 

and flooring online, including web 
exclusive products which extend our 
range beyond that available in our 
showrooms.

•  We continue to expand online, 

enhancing digital growth through 
investment in people, technology and 
collaborating with carefully selected 
partners.

•  Utilising statistical analysis and ‘A/B’ 

testing to allow us to monitor and adjust 
every change we make to drive our 
online success.

Delivery
•  Our delivery teams provide an in-house 

two-person home delivery and 
installation service for our furniture 
products from each of our nine 
distribution centres across the UK.
•  Our delivery teams provide customers 
with an efficient and friendly service as 
reflected in our ‘Excellent’ Trustpilot 
rating. 

•  Working with trusted partners we are 
able to offer our customers reduced 
lead times through contracting delivery 
partners and enabling home delivery 
direct from the supplier. 

•  Our flooring product is supported by a 
full fitting service through our third-
party network of fitting experts. Our 
flooring is cut, delivered and fitted to 
our customers’ specifications.

The value we create for our stakeholders
Our colleagues
We offer inspiring careers in a purpose-
driven business with a culture of 
inclusiveness, where our colleagues are 
motivated and encouraged to develop their 
skills in an environment in which they can 
thrive. 

Our shareholders 
We are committed to delivering long-term 
growth and returns for our shareholders. 
This commitment is supported by the 
Group’s robust balance sheet, lean 
operating model and excellent cost control.

Our customers
We provide our customers with a great 
experience either in one of our showrooms 
or online. We pride ourselves on ensuring 
our customers get the right product 
together with a high standard of aftercare 
service, helping them create the home they 
love.

Our suppliers 
We have built strong and enduring 
relationships with our long-standing 
suppliers. We have also brought on a 
number of new partners to drive further 
improvements. The vast majority of 
products that we sell are exclusive to us. We 
are delighted to be able to offer our 
customers a great range of well-recognised 
third-party brands, alongside our own 
in-house brands. 

Our communities 
As a responsible business, it’s important to 
us that we give back to our local 
communities where we live and work. We do 
this through employment opportunities, 
donating funds to various charities and 
supporting our colleagues with the 
opportunity to volunteer their time to 
charity. 

Sustainability
In order to operate effectively and 
responsibly, we ensure that sustainability 
underpins our business model by:
•  Reducing our impact on the 

environment

•  Taking care of our colleagues
•  Contributing to the communities in 

which we operate.

•  Delivering value through strong 

governance.

Our online 
presence 
supports our 
showroom 
network 
providing our 
customers with 
an omnichannel 
experience.

11

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsOur strategy

2
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

1212

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022 
 
 
 
 
Our mission is to be the UK’s 
best value home retailer

In the prior year the Group carried 
out a comprehensive review of the 
business, which led to the launch 
of our new purpose, ‘Helping 
create the home you love’ and a 
refreshed strategy. 

Twelve months on and the Board  
is pleased with the progress  
made and look forward to the  
year ahead.

D igit ally 
o p ti m is e d

C

u

d

s

r

t

i

v

o

e

m

n

e

r

In
s
ra

n

pirin
g 

e

g

s

S tr e n g t h e n t

h
e C

ore

g 
s
m
gin
o
o
a
r
g
w
n
o
E
h
s

Outstanding 
team

13

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statements 
Strategy in action

1. Outstanding team

Our colleagues remain at the heart of our 
business and our aim is to ‘be a place people 
love to work’, where colleagues feel they 
belong, are listened to and are given the 
opportunity to develop. 

Attracting new talent has been important to 
strengthen and support several teams 
crucial to our strategy, and we are delighted 
with our progress. We have:
•  Added further strength to our senior 
commercial team, appointing a new 
Commercial Director, a Sales and 
Operations Director and a Chief 
Marketing & Digital Officer to our 
Executive Board;

•  Strengthened the leadership and 

increased the capability and capacity of 
the digital team; 

•  Recognised the talent within our own 

teams by making a number of 
promotions and internal transfers; and
•  Grown our people team to support the 
recruitment and development of our 
colleagues, with additional experience 
added to support the development of 
our reward strategy.

During the year we significantly overhauled 
our hiring and on-boarding process. We 
introduced a new digital welcome pack to 
inspire new colleagues as they begin their 
journey with us and we are in the process of 
investing in a new careers website and 
application tracking system to improve 
efficiencies in the hiring process.

Increasing engagement and enhancing our 
culture continues to be a top priority for the 
Board. Colleague focus groups have been 

14

held throughout the year to help us shape 
our behaviours, define how we lead and 
review our current RIGHT values. The 
results of the latest annual employee survey 
were encouraging and contained more 
constructive ideas and comments than ever 
before, demonstrating that our colleagues 
are happy to share their thoughts. By 
reviewing the feedback we hope to 
implement meaningful changes to drive 
improvements across the business. 

As we seek ways to improve retention, a key 
focus of our people strategy is to review and 
benchmark our reward offering. During the 
year we enhanced reward for our distribution 
teams who operate in a highly competitive job 
market and we are currently benchmarking 
remuneration across the business. We also 
relaunched our share incentive plan with a 
new provider with the aim to encourage 
colleagues to share in the success of the 
business. Additionally we introduced the 
ability for our employees to salary sacrifice 
their pension contributions, which will result in 
an increase to many of our colleagues’ net 
pay. We are delighted to see that our 
retention rates are improving with a decrease 
in staff turnover of 2.4% compared to FY21.

Looking forward
•  Review and develop our diversity and 

flexible workforce policies to help shape 
and reflect the brand we want to be, 
with the aim to help create a more 
diverse work force that is more 
reflective of the communities we serve.

•  Continue the positive work on 

employer branding, strengthen the 

‘ Increasing engagement 
and enhancing our culture 
continues to be a top 
priority for the Group.’

talent pipeline and launch a new 
recruitment website to attract and 
retain great talent.
Improve the process of reviewing 
our colleagues performance  
and development.
Implement a new learning 
management system to support 

• 

• 

colleague learning, compliance 
and training. 

•  Review reward structure to improve 
colleague retention and ensure that 
we remain competitive.

KPI
Colleague survey score: 71 (2021: 73)

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022‘ We have 
integrated 
customer data into our 
business intelligence 
software to give commercial 
teams greater visibility with 
access to more customer 
metrics and 
demographic data.’ 

Trustpilot review
‘They were highly efficient,  
pleasant, and relayed instructions  
in a clear and articulate manner.  
I am extremely pleased with  
the delivery service and will 
recommend ScS to my  
friends and family.’

2. Customer driven

Our mission is to be the UK’s best value 
home retailer, delivering outstanding value, 
quality and choice with a seamless 
customer experience. As we strive to 
achieve this mission, improving product 
quality and streamlining the customer 
journey are key focus areas within the 
‘customer driven’ element of our strategy. 

A key part of enhancing the customer 
experience is the monitoring of our 
customers’ reviews on Trustpilot in order to 
understand what we are doing well and also 
identify areas for improvement. We are 
delighted to have increased our Trustpilot 
rating from 4.5 to the maximum 5 stars, 
delivering an ‘Excellent’ rating, improved the 
underlying TrustScore to 4.8 and exceeded 
370,000 reviews. During the year we have 
also enabled reviews at a local store level, 
with over half achieving the full 5-star rating, 
and every store attaining a minimum of  
4.5 stars.

Our efforts to improve product  
quality included:
• 

Introducing a pre-delivery inspection 
procedure, making use of in-house 

Looking forward
•  Utilise enhanced data and 

independent research to help 
diversify our brand and engage with a 
broader customer base.
•  Further drive product quality 

improvement through working 
closely with our suppliers, sharing 
best practice across the supply base 
and utilising customer feedback.
•  Continue to look for ways to improve 
the customer experience, utilising 
customer feedback, supporting our 

service technicians to fix any minor 
issues within our distribution centres;

•  Trialling new ways of handling and 
transporting products to minimise 
damage from the outset; and
Issuing revised terms to suppliers to 
improve quality and give ScS greater 
involvement in design specification.

• 

We have also launched a new ‘track your 
order’ tool on our website, supported 
members of our customer experience team 
to undertake City & Guilds accredited 
training, and invested in new technology for 
our contact centre which we look forward to 
implementing next year. 

Earlier in the year we engaged the help of a 
third-party specialist to assist us in 
conducting detailed customer research into 
our brand awareness and consideration, 
and to provide information on customer 
segments to guide future decision making. 
We have integrated customer data into our 
business intelligence software to give our 
commercial team greater visibility with 
access to more customer metrics and 
demographic data.

teams and implementing our new 
end-to-end technology solution into 
our customer experience team.

•  Engage our colleagues and 

customers through focus groups to 
gain their valuable insight and 
thoughts on areas for improvement.
•  Review delivery procedures to ensure 
they are exceeding our customers 
expectations.

KPI: Trustpilot score: 4.8 (2021: 4.7)

15

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsStrategy in action continued

3. Inspiring ranges

As we build upon and enhance our product 
offering, we have introduced new design 
aesthetics mixing contemporary and 
stylish, chic and colour, whilst maintaining 
our value focus. This has resulted in the 
launch of 70 new furniture models and 88 
new flooring options. 

Our new product ranges include our 
collaboration with Laurence Llewelyn-
Bowen, the ‘LLB at Home’ collection, as well 
as our new ‘Botanicals’ sofa range. More 
recently we have announced our 
partnership with Ideal Home, the most 
popular home publication in the UK with a 
significant digital presence. We look forward 
to working together to inspire our 
customers as they design their homes.

As part of finding the right partners to drive 
our growth, we have reviewed our furniture 
supplier base and on-boarded a number of 
new suppliers across the UK and Europe, 

2
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

1616

Looking forward
•  Refresh our sofa range and develop 

our brands by building on our 
partnership with Ideal Home, 
relaunching a number of brands with 
a modern look and feel, and trialling 
new concepts such as self-assembly 
sofa ranges.

•  Further drive our dining range by 

strengthening the leadership in this 
area and continuing to broaden the 
product proposition and growing our 
direct home delivery offering.

•  Transform our flooring offering by 

improving and simplifying processes, 
focusing our ranges and improving 
our colleagues’ ability to sell with 
confidence.

•  Launch a refreshed hard flooring 

offering in concepts stores before 
rolling out nationally.

KPI
Gross sales: £344.7m 
(2021: £319.2m (restated))

reducing our reliance on the Far East as we 
aim to improve product quality, reduce the 
environmental impact, and reduce lead 
times. Our ongoing commitment to help 
our customers create the home they l 
ove continues to drive our product 
procurement decisions. 

We also launched our new ‘quick delivery 
sofas’, with lead times of just two weeks,  
and worked with a number of suppliers to 
enable direct home delivery of product 
direct from supplier to customer. We are 
continuing to build and evolve this service  
to transform the speed that we can deliver 
to our customers.

During the year we introduced an area 
within a select number of stores which we 
call ‘The Dining Room @ ScS’. It brings our 
dining range together in a dedicated area  
of the store and has proven successful.  
We have reviewed our product offering, 
ensuring a good mix of shape and range of 
materials, which is proving popular with our 
customers as dining sales increased by 
28.5% on the prior year.

We believe there remains further potential 
in our flooring business, and are 
consequently looking for ways to improve 
the customer journey. We have 
strengthened the flooring operations team 
to help drive the areas we want to improve. 
We have also simplified our product range, 
increased colleague training, reviewed third-
party fitter pay rates to improve retention 
and streamlined our supplier base to 
improve service and quality.

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022 
 
 
 
 
4. Digitally optimised

To support our digital growth ambitions we 
have significantly expanded our team to 
improve research and development, 
merchandising and marketing. In January 
2022 we opened a hub within our expanded 
Coventry store as a base for our digital 
team. Locating the team within a concept 
store will improve their integration with both 
our retail colleagues and our customers, 
advancing our full omnichannel offering. 
Our newly appointed Chief Marketing & 
Digital Officer will oversee the digital  
and technology teams and lead the  
digital strategy.

Ensuring that we have the right people, the 
right tools and the right partners has been a 
top priority for our digital leadership team in 
the last 12 months. We have reviewed our 
partner base and retendered contracts, 
engaging specialist agencies across:
•  Digital media - partnering with one of 
the top 5 media agencies in the world, 
reviewing advertising through digital 
channels, driving efficiency in digital 
marketing and providing insights into 
market demand and customer online 
shopping behaviours.

•  SEO - optimising our website and 

creating an ‘inspiration hub’ to drive 
organic visibility and capture customers 
at the research phase of their  
shopping journey.

•  Analytics - improving both qualitative 
and quantitative data including new 
tools such as user feedback and Google 
Analytics 360 to better understand 
shopper behaviour and friction points to 
help drive improvements.

•  Personalisation - implementing a 

market-leading personalisation suite to 
power experiences such as product 
recommendations and triggered 
messaging.

To optimise the effectiveness of our 
marketing, we have built an econometric 
model to continually monitor and review the 
changes we make, to understand and 
improve omnichannel marketing efficiency 
and further our digital success.

We have also made good progress in 
building our social media presence, 
including the launch of a new influencer 
programme to help build engagement with 
relevant audiences to increase awareness 
and consideration. 

During the year we have added new 
functionality to our website through a new 
agile development and optimisation 
programme, including enabling customers 
to leave product reviews. The reviews allow 
us to better understand our customers and 
ensure that our products are meeting their 
expectations. Building on our omnichannel 
experience, customers can now create an 
online wishlist which they can save and 
share to create a more seamless  
customer journey. 

Over the last twelve months the team has 
worked hard to ensure that the digitally 
optimised element of the strategy is set up 
for success and the Board looks forward to 
seeing the impact of the investments made 
in the coming years.

Looking forward
•  Drive online conversion through 

improved landing pages dedicated to 
individual brands, review of online 
shopping journey and expansion of 
online only ranges.

•  Drive digital reach through 

personalised communications, 
increased collaboration with social 
media influencers and targeted  
local advertising.

•  Further understand the needs of our 
customers by reviewing customer 

• 

feedback and improving  
data collection. 
Improve the omnichannel experience 
by adding shopper wishlist capability, 
increasing digital experience in 
showrooms, increasing utilisation of 
data and improving digital customer 
contact functionality.

KPI
Online sales: £32.2m 
(2021: £46.5m (restated))

S
t
r
a
t
e
g

i
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

|

C
o
r
p
o
r
a
t
e
g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

|

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

1717

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategy in action continued

5. Engaging showrooms

A key focus for this year has been 
developing our new concept store where we 
can trial new ideas. The aim is to provide a 
more modern look and feel, ensuring that 
our products are showcased in the best 
format and to utilise digital developments to 
enhance the customer experience to help 
create the home they love. We are trialling a 
number of initiatives such as:
•  A completely refreshed showroom 
interior and layout with enhanced 
lighting, improved furniture bays, a 
restructured flooring display and a 
dedicated area for our dining ranges;

•  New ranges and product offerings  
to broaden the choice available to  
our customers;

•  Digital stations, referred to as ‘endless 

aisles’, where our customers can browse 
our full range of products and build a 
wish list; and

•  A web application that allows customers 

to scan a product QR code for full 
product details, recommendations and 
payment options.

Having implemented our new concept 
design in one store during the year, we have 
now refitted two further stores at the start 
of the new financial year. We will continue to 
trial, test and measure the performance of 
the three concept stores and use the 
learnings to shape and refine the future 
roll-out across more locations.

As we continue to invest in our showrooms 
to create a more inspiring experience, we 
successfully trialled a new ‘declutter’ 
programme in several stores which had a 
positive impact on performance. This 

18

‘During the year we have 
continued to review our 
store network to ensure 
our showrooms are in the 
best possible locations.’

included reducing the amount and size of 
the point of sale, and being more selective 
around some of the occasional ranges we 
offer. The trial showrooms are cleaner, 
brighter and more inviting and we will extend 
this programme across the entire store 
network in FY23.

During the year we reviewed our store 
network to ensure our showrooms are in the 
best possible locations. In doing so we have 
closed one of our Southampton stores and 
our Greenock store as their leases ended 
and their performances did not meet our 
required levels. We have also relocated our 
Rotherham and Doncaster stores to more 
modern units in improved locations whilst 
reducing costs. As we consider further 
expansion, we are utilising customer 
demographic data and existing store 
performance to identify potential 
new locations.

Looking forward
•  Open two further concept stores in 
quarter one to trial different designs 
and layouts. 

•  Review the progress of the concept 
stores, monitoring and refining  
ideas before rolling out across  
more locations.

•  Roll out trialled ‘declutter’ 

programme across showroom 
network.

•  Develop our network by utilising 

knowledge of the demographic 
profile of our customer base to  
help identify the optimum  
network footprint.

•  Continue to focus on actively 

managing rent costs as part of  
lease negotiations.

KPI
Like-for-like order growth: +3.9% 
(2021: -1.5%)

ScS Group plc Annual Report 20226. Strengthen the core

We continue to review the success of our 
product ranges and have further developed 
our line level margin analysis tools to allow 
us to better manage the profitability of  
our product offering alongside maximising 
our customer experience. The tools are 
increasingly useful as we experience 
inflationary challenges and are also 
invaluable when comparing performance  
as we experiment in other areas of  
our strategy.

As we expand our data driven approach we 
have developed tools such as our 
distribution centre balanced scorecards, 
allowing for further comparison of KPIs and 
sharing of best practice across our 
distribution network.

During the year we have reviewed 
processes in a number of key cost lines to 
identify areas for improvement. We have 
enhanced the reporting visibility of our 
compensation and allowances cost line and 
improved the robustness of the stock write 
off process, utilising new technology and 
working with the ESG steering group to 

identify ways to avoid waste wherever 
possible.

Our finance house partners continue to 
facilitate a significant amount of the orders 
we take, as our customers look to take 
advantage of a more affordable payment 
option. This could increase further as the 
cost of living increases, and we are keen to 
ensure we are working with the best 
providers in terms of service to our 
customers, acceptance rates, and cost.  
As part of that process, during the year  
we have been retendering our finance 
house partners, including trialling a new 
in-store provider.

We remain focused on improving the 
success of the core business model we  
have operated for many years, with strong 
cost management as reflected in the 
achievement of a 45.3% gross margin* 
despite cost pressures; a resilient balance 
sheet with cash of £70.8m; and informed 
decision making driving revenue to  
record levels.

Looking forward
•  Utilise customer data to improve 

in-store conversion.

•  Refine pricing strategy and supplier 

mix to maintain product margin whilst 
remaining best value in the market.

•  Maintain the quality of sales by 

supporting retail colleagues with 
enhanced training plans and access 
to insightful information. 

•  Explore sourcing opportunities to 

reduce average lead times.

•  Continue to review key cost areas and 
operating efficiencies across the 
business including distribution.

•  Optimise our customer finance offering.

KPI
Profit before tax: £16.4m (2021: £22.7m)

19

‘We are keen to 
ensure we are working 
with the best providers in 
terms of service to our 
customers, acceptance 
rates and cost.’

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsKey performance indicators

Key performance indicators (KPIs) are 
fundamental to understanding the progress we 
are making with our strategy, and to monitor the 
ongoing performance of the business over time. 

The KPIs set out in this summary are the 
most relevant measures monitored on an 
ongoing basis by the Board. The definition 
of these KPIs and our performance over the 
last three years is detailed below, as well as 
how each KPI links to our strategic priorities. 
Commentary on these KPIs is contained 
within the Financial review.

Non-financial KPIs
Trustpilot customer satisfaction
4.8

2022

2021

2020

2019

Colleague survey score

71

2022
2022

2021

0

0

4.8

4.7

4.7

4.6

CO2 emissions (tonnes)

6,080t

71

73

2022

2021

2020

2019

6,080t

6,527t

6,461t

8,156t

Why it’s important
Customers want confidence that their retailer of choice 
can deliver on their promises. We focus on our 
TrustScore to ensure we maintain our ‘Excellent’ rating.

What we measure
Our TrustScore, marked out of 5, is a measure provided 
by Trustpilot, an independent review platform used by 
our customers which asks them to rate our  
customer service.

Why it’s important
Our colleagues play a pivotal role in the success of our 
business, and we aim to ensure they benefit as we do. It is of 
utmost importance for us to listen to our colleagues and to 
get their thoughts and opinions to ensure that our 
colleagues are engaged. We take pride in being a place 
where colleagues can thrive and progress whilst feeling 
supported.

What we measure
Our ‘Colleague survey score’ measures the overall eSAT 
score of the annual survey sent to all colleagues for their 
feedback. The eSAT score is an average score used to 
provide insight into how happy our colleagues are 
working at ScS.

Why it’s important
As a retailer we recognise that our operations will impact 
the environment, and we have a duty to ensure that both 
now and in the future we seek to minimise this.

What we measure
Scope 1 (direct), scope 2 (indirect) and scope 3 
(business travel) as reported under the Streamlined 
Energy and Carbon Reporting (SECR), see further detail 
on pages 37 to 38.

Link to strategic priorities
5
3
1

4

2

6

Link to strategic priorities
5
3
1

4

2

6

Link to strategic priorities
5
3
1

2

4

6

Strategic priorities

1  

Outstanding team

2   Customer driven

3   Inspiring ranges

4   Digitally optimised

5   Engaging showroom

6   Strengthen the core

20

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Financial KPIs

Revenue

£331.6m

Like-for-like order intake growth**

Online sales

+3.9%

£32.2m

2022

2021*

2020*

2019*

£331.6m

£305.2m

£252.0m

£313.0m

2022

2021

2020

2019

-1.5%

-6.0%

3.9%

4.2%

2022

2021*

2020*

2019

£18.9m

£16.8m

£32.2m

£46.5m

Why it’s important
Sustainable growth in delivered sales is key to our 
long-term success, increasing market share and 
creating opportunities.

What we measure
Revenue is a measure taken directly from our primary 
statement of accounts, and is the combined total of all 
furniture and flooring delivered sales made, excluding 
VAT and the costs of interest-free credit, both online 
and across all of our showrooms.

Why it’s important
Whilst overall delivered sales growth is important, 
understanding how the same showrooms perform 
year-on-year provides a guide to underlying showroom 
performance. Due to lead times, order growth also 
gives a view as to future delivered sales performance.

What we measure
Like-for-like order intake** growth compares 
year-on-year trading performance from comparable 
showrooms. It therefore excludes new and closed 
showrooms. Order value is a combined total of all 
furniture and flooring orders booked, including VAT, 
both online and across all of our showrooms.

Why it’s important
The Group needs to maximise its share of customers 
wanting to transact online.

What we measure
Online sales growth is the portion of the gross sales** 
figure attributable to our website and telesales.

Link to strategic priorities
5
3
1

2

4

6

Link to strategic priorities
5
3
1

2

4

6

Link to strategic priorities
5
3
1

2

4

6

Gross margin % of gross sales**

Profit/(loss) before tax (PBT/LBT)

Earnings per share (EPS)

45.3%

£16.4m

36.2p

2022

2021*

2020*

2019*

45.3%

46.1%

45.2%

45.0%

2022

2021

2020

2019

£16.4m

£22.7m

-£3.1m

£14.3m

2022

2021

2020

2019

36.2p

50.4p

-5.8p

28.5p

Why it’s important
To grow profitably, the Group must ensure that sales 
growth is supported by maintaining or growing the  
gross margin.

What we measure
Gross margin % of gross sales is a measure taken 
directly from our primary statement of accounts and is 
the total margin made from sales of product, excluding 
VAT, as a proportion of total gross sales**.

Why it’s important
Delivering profitable growth is essential as we aim to 
create value for all stakeholders over the long term.

Why it’s important
EPS is key to the business to understand the return 
being generated from profits to our shareholders.

What we measure
Profit before tax reflects the performance of the  
Group before tax is deducted.

What we measure
EPS is calculated by dividing profit attributable  
to shareholders by the average number of  
outstanding shares. 

Link to strategic priorities
5
1
3

2

4

6

Link to strategic priorities
5
3
1

2

4

6

Link to strategic priorities
5
3
1

4

2

6

21

*  Restated figures.
**  This report includes alternative performance measures 

(APMs) which are defined and reconciled to IFRS 
information, where applicable, on pages 46 to 47.

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsResponsibility and sustainability report

Our aim is to create a business that we can be proud of, 
with a reputable brand and products that our customers 
love, a company that our colleagues love to work for and a 
business that our partners love to work with. Good value 
with good values is at the centre of our ESG strategy.

Progress during  
the year
Over the last twelve months we have 
established an ESG steering group, 
conducted a materiality assessment, 
developed our ESG strategy, defined clear 
targets and, with the help of a specialist 
consultant, began our journey to set out our 
roadmap to net zero. 

We recognise that ESG is a topic that is 
rapidly advancing and we continue to build 
momentum in this area. As we progress our 
commercial strategies across the business 
we will continue to align and review our ESG 
strategy and integrate sustainability 
throughout all aspects of the business.

Looking forward
The Group’s ability to create sustainable 
social and economic value can only be 
achieved by adopting a long-term 
perspective. Over the next decade the 
Group believes that the importance of 
sustainability will increase and be at the 
forefront of our stakeholders' decision 
making. 

In the next financial year we will be focusing 
on embedding our ESG strategy deeper into 
the business and delivering on our targets. 
We plan to review our workplace policies, 
work closely with our suppliers to improve 
the accuracy and efficiency of our ‘scope 3’ 
emissions data and enhance our reporting 
in line with the Task Force on Climate-
related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) 
requirements.

Materiality assessment
The first stage in the development of our 
ESG strategy was to conduct a materiality 
assessment to identify which issues matter 
most to the business and our stakeholders. 
To ensure that our strategy remains 
relevant, meaningful and credible we have 
aligned our focus areas with the United 
Nations Sustainable Development Goals 
(UN SDGs).

‘ Good value with 
good values’

22

Strategy area Material issue

Definition

Environmental

Greenhouse  
gas emissions  
(Scope 1,2,3)

Monitoring the emissions produced by our operations, with the aim to 
reduce our impact.

Environmental

Waste management 
and circular economy

Reducing the waste from our operations, including plastic and 
packaging.

Environmental

Responsible  
sourcing

Improving the volume of waste which is recycled and diverted from 
landfill alongside continuing to develop an end of life process (circular 
approach) for our products.

Carefully selecting our suppliers and working closely with them to 
improve sustainability within the supply chain. All suppliers are 
expected to adhere to the guidelines set out in our supplier handbook 
which includes specific details on modern slavery and human rights.

Improving leather and timber traceability within our supply chain.

Environmental, 
Governance

Ethical business 
practices, policy  
and compliance

Promoting high levels of compliance to our existing business practices.
Continuing to apply new guidance and best practice to support strong 
governance throughout the Group.

Social

Social

Social

Engagement and 
economic impact on 
our communities

Investing in our people through employment, charitable donations and 
volunteering we aim to make a positive contribution and improve the 
quality of life in our communities.

Employee 
development  
and wellbeing

Nurturing a culture where our colleagues feel supported to achieve 
their potential, take pride in their work and understand how their role 
contributes to our success.

Prioritising colleague wellbeing and ensuring senior members of the 
team lead by example and live by the Group’s RIGHT values.

Customer 
satisfaction  
and quality

Continuing to listen to customers and utilise data to determine 
satisfaction which will allow us to improve our services and products. 

Social, 
Governance

Diversity and 
inclusion

Continuing to create an inclusive and diverse team where all colleagues 
are treated with respect and there is equal opportunities for all.

Governance

Health and safety

Monitoring guidelines, improving procedures and continuous 
improvement of the training programmes we offer to protect the 
safety and welfare of our colleagues and customers throughout our 
operations. 

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022 
Our Group ESG targets
During the year the Group has set the below targets to ensure that the business continues to develop and stays on track to meet it’s long-term ESG objectives.

Target

Progress

Target date

100% renewable electricity used across the Group

Achieve Furniture Industry Sustainability Programme (FISP) certification

Environmental

100% of laminate flooring timber to be from responsible sources

95% post-consumer waste diverted from landfill for recycling

100% post-consumer recyclable waste for all ScS delivered product including the removal of polystyrene from all packaging

100% of leather to be from certified sources via the Leather Working Group

25% increase in the number of females in management retail roles

Social

5% increase in the value of donations and support to local and national charitable and community organisations by end of FY22, 
and 10% by end of FY23

A minimum of 1,000 volunteering days to be completed by colleagues

Over 30% of Board positions to be held by a woman

Governance

ESG measures to be introduced into remuneration performance targets

Obtain ISO14001-Environmental management certification for head office

At least one of the senior board positions (including Chair, CEO, CFO or Senior Independent Director roles) is held by a woman

Achieved

Achieved

Achieved 

Achieved 

Achieved 

On track

On track

Achieved
On track

On track

Achieved 

Achieved

Behind

On track

-

-

-

-

-

July 2023

July 2023

-
July 2023

July 2026

-

-

July 2024

July 2023

Our environment 
Climate change continues to be a growing 
concern for our colleagues and customers. 
To reflect the climate emergency that we 
are all facing it is essential that we consider 
our impact on the environment and work 
towards net zero. As we continue on our 
sustainability journey, we have set interim 
targets, which will evolve into a net zero 
strategy. 

Sustainable supply chain

Furniture and flooring products use 
materials including timber, leather and 
textiles. We recognise the importance of 
traceability within our supply chain and we’re 
committed to work towards more 
sustainable sourcing and reducing our 
environmental footprint.

Furniture Industry  
Sustainability Programme 
FISP is an independently certified 
sustainability programme tailored to the 
needs of the furniture industry supply chain. 
FISP promotes best practice to drive social, 
economic and environmental change via 
continual improvement of members’ 
business operations. 

We became the first national upholstery 
and carpet retailer to achieve the FISP 
certification and the Group has maintained 
its requirements set out by FISP. We are 
working with our suppliers to encourage 
membership of FISP and their application 
for certification. 

23

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsResponsibility and sustainability report continued

Sustainable timber supply – from 
forest to front room
PEFC (the Programme for the Endorsement 
of Forest Certification) and FSC® (Forest 
Stewardship Council®) are the two largest 
international forest certification 
programmes. These organisations work to 
protect forests by promoting sustainable 
forest management. Certification provides 
additional assurance that all of our products 
are from environmentally and socially 
responsible sources. 

In 2022, 100% of our wood flooring was 
independently certified and three of our 
own furniture brands contain FSC® certified 
timber. During the year these furniture 
brands accounted for £36m of gross sales*.

During the year we reviewed our timber 
sourcing policy to ensure that it is aligned to 
our ESG targets, we also undertook a review 
of our supply chain to ensure that no 
‘conflict timber’ (timber sourced from 
Russia and Belarus) entered our supply 
chain. 

Sustainable leather sourcing
The Leather Working Group (LWG) is a 
not-for-profit community organisation 
dedicated to driving excellence in 
sustainable leather production. 
As a member of the LWG our aim is to 
demonstrate that leather sourced by the 
Group is done so ethically. 70% of the 
leather used within our products comes 
from tanneries certified by the LWG, which 
works to raise standards and reduce 
environmental impacts in the global leather 
industry. We aim to increase this to 100% by 
July 2023.

Textiles
We recognise the wide use of textiles in our 
products, and acknowledge the 
environmental impact of the textile 
industry. Progress needs to be made with 
textile production to mitigate its 
environmental impact.

During the year we have introduced our 
Botanicals range of upholstered furniture. 
Exclusively designed for ScS it uses 100% 
recycled velvet as the main cover fabric. The 
range also uses recycled fibre insulators.

We offer our flooring customers the option 
of SpringBond underlay, which is composed 
of 85% recycled materials, primarily PET 
plastic bottles. In FY22, 10% of our flooring 
customers chose SpringBond with their 
carpet purchase. 

24

Engagement with suppliers 
We have a number of long-standing 
relationships with our suppliers and to help 
us deliver our ESG strategy we recognise 
that we must further collaborate with our 
suppliers to align our ESG targets.

During the year we held our first annual 
supplier conference. We invited all furniture 
suppliers to further embed our strategic 
alignment in areas such as quality assurance 
and supply chain processes and 
communicate our ESG strategy and how we 
will implement our strategy throughout our 
supply chain. 

In addition, we updated our supplier 
handbook to include our net zero and 
long-term environmental strategy.

Human rights and modern slavery

Our responsibilities for the welfare of people 
goes far beyond those we employ directly. We 
aim to ensure that all the jobs we help create, 
directly and through our supply chain, are 
decent, fair and safe and that human rights 
are always respected. 

We are members of Sedex, one of the world’s 
leading ethical trade organisations; who help 
businesses operate responsibly and 
sustainably, protect workers and source 
ethically. Our supplier charter requires 
suppliers to uphold the full range of labour 
standards set out in the Ethical Trading 
Initiative Base Code, together with additional 
requirements for reporting.

*  This report includes alternative performance measures 

(APMs) which are defined and reconciled to IFRS 
information, where applicable, on pages 46 to 47.

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022From April 2021 we have been supplied with 
100% renewable electricity at all ScS sites.

By being on a zero carbon, 100% renewable 
electricity contract, the Group has avoided 
emitting 3,473.8 tonnes of carbon*.

* Avoidedemissionscalculationisbasedon 
UKFuelMixDisclosureData(FMD)forthe 
averagecarbonemissionsfromallUK 
generatedelectricityinthe2021-22 
reportingyear(198gCO2/kWhfor 
theyear).

As part of our strategy, we have put in place 
additional due diligence processes based on 
the evolving risk association with the 
pandemic and conflict to ensure we continue 
to identify and focus our resource in areas of 
the highest risk in our supply chain. At the 
core of this framework is insight from our 
Sedex risk assessment tool and industry 
associations who help us identify areas of risk. 
All internal supplier audits are reviewed by our 
audit, risk and compliance function to ensure 
they remain relevant to the countries we 
source goods from.

We recognise that external audits alone may 
not discover well-hidden or systemic issues 
regarding modern slavery which may occur 
further upstream in our supply chain. In April 
2021 we set up our own internal supplier audit 
programme to gain a deeper understanding 
of our supply chain.

Sustainable packaging
Our packaging is essential to protect our 
products from damage. It is important that 
we adopt the right approach in this area, 
striking the balance between developing 
sustainable packaging options whilst 
ensuring that our products are adequately 
protected. 

During the year we have:
•  Worked to eliminate unnecessary or 
problematic packaging, including 
polystyrene, without compromising on 
quality through our product 
specification policies and packaging 
audits to ensure our standards are met. 
Our aim is to ensure that all of our 
packaging is 100% recyclable; 

•  Encouraged our customers to use our 
packaging recycling service which is 
provided by our home delivery teams; 
and

•  Began the process of working with 
suppliers to develop and source all 
plastic packaging with a minimum of 
30% post-consumer recycled content.

Fleet
To ensure that our fleet vehicles are 
efficient, safe and meet the required 
emissions standards, all our trucks are on a 
five-year replacement cycle. To help 
minimise our CO2 emissions, we utilise route 
optimisation software to reduce the miles 
that our trucks and vans travel. Using our 
fleet management system we are able to 
monitor our driver’s behaviour on the road 
to ensure that our high standards of safe 
and responsible driving are met. Each driver 
is assessed against a number of targets and 
both drivers and management are 
incentivised to improve.

During the year we installed a number of 
electrical vehicle charging points, and we 
are currently exploring how to continue to 
improve our internal infrastructure. Over 
the next 12 months we will be reviewing our 
entire fleet with the aim of introducing more 
electric vehicle options.

Energy and waste
During the year, we have continued to 
improve our energy efficiency with an 
ongoing programme of LED lighting 
installations and the replacement of 
outdated equipment with new energy 
efficient replacements.

S
t
r
a
t
e
g

i
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

|

C
o
r
p
o
r
a
t
e
g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

|

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

2525

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Responsibility and sustainability report continued

With electricity being one of the main 
contributors to the Group’s CO2 emissions, 
we are committed to further reducing our 
energy consumption, and thereby achieve a 
reduction in carbon emissions.

Throughout the year we obtained a clearer 
understanding of our energy usage across 
the Group. We use automatic meter 
readings to monitor and investigate usage 
of electricity, and smart loggers to monitor 
the usage of gas. We have embarked on a 
programme of replacing all gas fired 
appliances with a view to achieving this by 
the end of 2023, and the replacement of 
obsolete appliances with energy efficient 
air-source heat pumps. We will continue to 
work with the Carbon Trust and other 
advisors to reduce the amount of energy  
we use.

We have worked with our facilities 
management partners to understand our 
impact on the environment, specifically 
water and waste management. We have 
continued to maintain a high percentage of 
diversion from landfill and continue to 
re-evaluate and look for ways to improve 
our waste management.

26

Case study
The design brief was to create a sofa 
range that not only transforms our 
customer’s living space with a great design, but 
also reduces the impact on the environment 
through the use of sustainable materials.

During the year we developed, designed and launched  
our Botanicals Collection by collaborating with a  
leading UK manufacturer.

Using an exclusively designed 100% recycled velvet 
fabric together with a recycled padding from 
Texfelt (who make SpringBond) and FSC® 
certified timber for the frame, our 
Botanicals Collection launched.

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Our colleagues 

At ScS our aim is to 'Create a workplace 
people love to work', where colleagues feel 
they belong, are listened to and are given 
the opportunity to develop. Our people are 
what makes our business successful and 
developing an outstanding team is at the 
forefront of our business strategy. 
Attracting, developing and retaining 
colleagues with the appropriate skills, 
behaviours and attitudes and from a variety 
of backgrounds is the focus of the colleague 
element of our social strategy.

Training and development
During the year we saw our first cohort of 
‘moving up’ colleagues complete their 
year-long training programme and will now 
go on to progress to Business Manager 
positions within our retail stores. The 
subsequent cohort started in July 2022. 
This programme is an important investment 
as we work to strengthen our succession 
pipeline in retail. 

To help shape our future and improve the 
colleague journey, we utilised our Coventry 
concept store to trial our ‘the difference is 
you’ training programme. This programme 
is all about how our colleagues' behaviours 
really make the difference for our 
customers, ensuring that every customer 
receives a five-star service. The training 
programme will continue to be rolled out 
into our other concept stores before 
assessing suitability for the wider business. 

To set our colleagues up for success, we are 
working towards defining our leadership and 
behaviours framework. During the year we 
held a number of ‘winning team’ colleague 
focus groups and utilising the feedback we 
have formalised a training plan with the aim 
of training our leaders the ‘ScS way’. This 
plan will underpin our leadership 
development, succession planning and 
talent spotting as we move into the next 
financial year.

In May 2022 we launched our ‘know more to 
grow more’ lunch and learn sessions to help 
improve awareness and colleague 
knowledge in a wide range of areas. The 
topics vary with sessions on menopause, 
apprenticeships, better health and work, 
financial guidance and more. The sessions 
are open to all colleagues to come together 
to learn more, understand each other 
better, and talk about common topics. We 
have a further 37 topics scheduled for FY23. 

number of comments left by colleagues 
increased by 24%, giving us greater 
insight into our results and the actions 
needed. 

•  Colleague discussion forums were held 
with members of the Board to raise any 
concerns or issues directly. 
•  During the year three retail and 

distribution conferences have taken 
place, giving the Executive Board and 
members of our senior management 
team an opportunity to discuss key 
focus areas with our colleagues.

•  Our weekly e-newsletter, ScS News, has 
continued to be improved and adapted 
to keep our colleagues engaged and 
informed.

Health, safety and wellbeing
The health, safety and wellbeing of our 
1,802 colleagues is a top priority for us. Our 
established health and safety team, which 
forms part of our wider audit, risk and 
compliance team, have continued to 
promote safe working to prevent work-
related injuries and reviewed and maintained 
risk assessments across the business. We 
have a number of mandatory training 
modules for all colleagues including office 
health and safety and manual handling. We 
also run ‘Institution of Occupational Safety 
and Health’ (IOSH) training for members of 
the distribution and internal audit teams and 
each distribution centre has at least two 
qualified trainers in manual handling 
techniques. 

Working with a new apprenticeship provider, 
Lifetime, we have launched two new 
apprenticeship programmes for team 
leaders and operations supervisors in 
distribution and within our people team 
where colleagues are working towards their 
Chartered Institute of Personnel and 
Development (CIPD) qualification. These 
programmes run alongside our existing 
apprenticeship programmes and over the 
next financial year we hope to increase 
participation and offer a wider breadth of 
programmes across the business.

Engaging with our colleagues 
To help shape our decisions towards making 
ScS a great place to work it is key that we 
actively take on board feedback we receive 
from colleagues. 

Throughout the year we have engaged with 
our colleagues in a number of ways:
•  To ensure our colleagues are well 
informed we have launched a new 
programme of ‘ScS Essentials’ sessions. 
We have successfully delivered three 
sessions in FY22, providing updates on 
the Group’s results and development 
within year one of our refreshed 
strategy.

•  Colleagues have taken part in our 

‘winning team’ focus groups to help us 
shape our behaviours, define how we 
lead and review our current RIGHT 
values.

•  As part of our continued focus on 

improving the colleague journey we 
carried out our annual engagement 
survey and we were delighted that 1,446 
(83%) of our colleagues wanted to share 
their thoughts and opinions. Compared 
with our previous year’s survey, the 

27

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsResponsibility and sustainability report continued

Case study

Aisha Rasul, Application Support, IT
I first heard about the apprenticeship opportunities through 'ScS News' and by 
attending a 'know more to grow more' session hosted by the training team and  
was immediately interested in the Level 4 project manager apprenticeship.  
I’m hoping that by completing this apprenticeship I’ll not only gain a 
qualification, but the tools to do more and help the business by 
strengthening my knowledge for my role. It’s still early days for  
my apprenticeship but I already know that I’m going to learn  
so much. There’s a balance when doing an apprenticeship 
between what you learn to help in your role as well as what 
you unearth about yourself, not just in a learner setting 
but in a personal one too.

We continue to increase our focus on our 
colleague’s wellbeing, ensuring they get the 
support they need, when they need it. 
During the year we have appointed a lead 
wellbeing champion who is helping us work 
towards achieving a ‘Better Health at Work 
Award’. The award recognises the 
achievements of organisations addressing 
health issues within the workplace. We have 
already completed our first campaign ‘Walk 
This May’ which involved our colleagues 
walking and running 20,000 miles in the 
month of May and we will be focusing on a 
further two campaigns as we expand our 
better health at work portfolio. During the 
year colleagues also participated in a 
wellbeing survey to identify which mental 
health topics were most important to them. 
This has helped us to focus the information 
that we publish in ScS News and the topics 
that we cover in our ‘know more to grow 
more’ sessions.

As well as our mental health first aiders 
continual support across the business, we 
have a number of colleagues undertaking 
training to become health advocates to help 
us raise more awareness and make positive 
steps towards fostering a better place to 
work. Our colleagues also have access to 
further support through a free, confidential 
employee assistance programme which is 
available 24/7.

28

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Seamless customer experience
To ensure we deliver the highest levels of 
customer service we invest significantly in 
training and developing our colleagues. We 
worked with the Furniture and Home 
Improvement Ombudsman to support 
members of our customer experience team 
in undertaking City & Guilds accredited 
training to develop and improve the 
standard of service we offer. 

We strive to provide an excellent customer 
experience and our customers are 
encouraged to rate their experience with us 
on Trustpilot. We regularly review our 
customers’ feedback and use it to reward 
our staff, identify areas for improvement 
and discuss with suppliers to drive further 
product quality.

Our customers
Our customers are at the heart of 
everything we do and as a business we seek 
to offer our customers outstanding value, 
quality and choice with a seamless 
customer experience.

During the year we have launched 70 
furniture models and 88 flooring options. 
We carefully source our products and all of 
our sofas are covered by a 20-year warranty 
on frames and springs. Working with our 
distribution centres, upholstery teams and 
suppliers we have focused on identifying 
and trialling ways in which we can improve 
product quality. 

Customer engagement
Our concept stores offer us the opportunity 
to trial new ideas and to understand the 
preferences of our customers. The location 
of the digital team in our Coventry concept 
store also allows the team to gather 
real-time feedback from our customers.

We continue to monitor market trends and 
engage with our customers through social 
media channels. This helps us to develop 
product ranges and expand our customer 
base.

S
t
r
a
t
e
g

i
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

|

C
o
r
p
o
r
a
t
e
g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

|

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

2929

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Responsibility and sustainability report continued

provides healthy hot meals for anyone 
who may need one in the Wearside area. 
A cheque for £1,000 was presented to 
the charity, with monies raised matched 
by the Group, alongside food donations;

•  Our finance team volunteered over a 

number of days at Sunderland 
Foodbank, helping to organise the 
warehouse, arranging donations as well 
as providing a donation of food and 
hygiene supplies; and

•  Colleagues around the business 

donated Easter eggs to local food banks 
to support those who might not receive 
one otherwise.

Foundation of Light
Our long-standing relationship with the 
Foundation of Light (the official charity of 
Sunderland AFC) continued in FY22, with 
ScS supporting the charity’s ‘Wear Together’ 
programme. The programme is aimed at 
anyone over the age of 50 who might feel 
isolated and brings people together through 
a range of different activities to facilitate 
them becoming more connected to their 
community. During the year colleagues have 
supported the programme through 
attending various volunteering activities. 

We have recently extended our partnership 
into FY23 so that we can continue to provide 
support for the Foundation, while also 
encouraging further volunteering 
opportunities for colleagues.

Our communities
Our operations are spread across the UK 
and as a socially responsible business, ScS 
and its people want to make a meaningful 
contribution to our communities.

As part of our ESG strategy, we are 
encouraging all of our colleagues to take 
part in volunteering days. ScS aim to 
support a minimum of 1,000 volunteering 
days before the end of FY26. We have also 
donated £64,000 to various charities during 
the year.

#WalkThisMay in support of 
Samaritans
Throughout the month of May, we 
challenged colleagues to walk a combined 
total of 20,000 miles as part of our 'Better 
Health At Work Award' campaign. The 
Group donated £20,000 to the Samaritans 
in support of our colleagues, who 
completed an impressive 20,331 miles  
in total.

During the challenge, colleagues from head 
office took part in a group walk with 
volunteers from the Samaritans and visited 
their Sunderland branch to hear first hand 
how our donation will help and support so 
many people who are struggling to cope or 
going through a difficult time.

Food bank fundraising and donations
With the recent cost of living crisis, there is 
more pressure than ever on food banks. 
During the year our colleagues have taken 
part in number of fundraising activities:
• 

In December our customer experience 
team led a festive fundraiser for 
Sunderland Soup Kitchen, a charity that 

30

Bowel Babe 
Last year ScS worked with ITV’s Lorraine on 
their ‘No Butts’ campaign and had the 
honour or working alongside the late Dame 
Deborah James. Her spirit and commitment 
to raising awareness was inspiring and we 
continued to show our support once again 
this year by making a donation of £15,000 to 
the Bowel Babe Fund. 

Shelter
We are working with Shelter, the UK’s 
leading housing and homelessness charity, 
as their belief that 'home is everything' 
aligns closely with our own values.
Through working together, we will explore 
developing a sense of community, 
volunteering opportunities for our 
colleagues and ways of donating products 
and stock.

thatissadlyalltoocommoninmen.Upon
talkingtosomeofmycolleaguesitbecame
apparentjusthowmanypeoplehavebeen
touchedbyprostatecanceratsomepoint
orotherintheirlivesanditwashumblingto
findsomanycolleagueswhowantedtojoin
thechallengeandgetinvolved.”

Case study
The Big Golf Race 2022 for Prostate 
Cancer UK
In June a team of colleagues from across 
retail, distribution and head office 
completed a golf race in support of 
Prostate Cancer UK at the Wynyard Golf 
Club in Teesside. The team aimed to 
complete four rounds of golf, starting at 
sunrise and finishing just before sunset.

•  £10k raised by the team with the 

support of friends, family, colleagues, 
business partners and a donation 
from the Group.
It took 16 hours and 45 minutes to 
complete four rounds of golf.
•  Each person walked an average of 

• 

23.9km each - almost 130km in total.
•  Almost 25k calories burned in total on 

the day.

•  A fantastic internal event raising 

money for a worthy cause.

Dan Bennett, our Director of Customer 
Experience, said, “Thecharityretainsa
placeclosetomyheart.Mygrandadpassed
awayalmost10yearsagonowhaving
battledprostatecancerandit’sadisease

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022• 

Investors have direct access to the CEO 
and CFO throughout the year.
•  The Board receives investor views 

• 

through the Group’s corporate brokers 
who provide feedback on market 
reaction and investor views after full and 
half year results announcements. 
Independent investment research 
analysts have access to our Executive 
Directors as part of their investment 
advisory roles. The analysts’ research 
publications provide timely feedback on 
financial performance, strategy and 
share valuation.

Investors’ views were taken into 
consideration as part of the Board’s 
decision-making process throughout  
FY22 including:
•  The launch of a £7m share buyback 

programme.

•  The Board’s proposal for a final dividend 
of 9.0p per share taking the full-year 
dividend to 13.5p.
Incorporating ESG targets into the 
executive and senior management 
bonus schemes.

• 

Our shareholders
Our shareholders want to work with us to 
achieve sustainable long-term growth and 
returns. We aim to secure these outcomes 
by delivering our strategy and making 
informed decisions.

We have two main shareholder groups; 
institutional investors and individual 
shareholders. The majority of our 
shareholders are institutional investors, with 
our individual investor base growing. 

The Company has just one class of share in 
issue and so all shareholders benefit from 
the same rights as set out in the Company’s 
Articles of Association and the Companies 
Act 2006. The Board recognises its legal 
and regulatory duties and does not take any 
decisions or actions, such as selectively 
disclosing confidential or inside information 
that would provide any shareholder or group 
of shareholders with any unfair advantage 
or position compared to the shareholders 
as a whole.

Engaging with our shareholders
We engage with our shareholders through a 
range of channels including:
•  The Annual Report and trading updates 

through our dedicated corporate 
website.

•  Our Annual General Meeting (AGM) in 

which shareholders can direct 
questions to the Board.

•  The Group’s CEO and CFO participate in 
retail investor presentations and held a 
live analyst meeting open to all 
shareholders and a webcast of the 
meeting was published on our website 
for those unable to attend.

S
t
r
a
t
e
g

i
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

|

C
o
r
p
o
r
a
t
e
g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

|

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

3131

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Task Force on climate-related financial disclosures (TCFD)

Climate-related disclosures

Disclosure of the actual and potential impacts of climate-related risks and opportunities 
on an organisation is important to the business strategy. 

The Task Force provides recommendations 
for climate-related financial disclosures 
structured around four thematic areas:
1.  Governance
2.  Strategy
3.  Risk management
4.  Metrics and targets

The four overarching recommendations are 
supported by eleven specific recommended 
disclosures focusing on assessing climate-
related risks and opportunities. 

The Group recognises the importance of 
adopting the TCFD recommendations and 
reports climate-related information 
consistent with this framework to ensure 
high-quality and decision-useful disclosures 
that enable users to understand the 
potential impact of climate change on the 
organisation. 

Governance 
The governance disclosure considers an 
organisations’ oversight of climate-related 
risks and opportunities.

The oversight of climate change is owned by 
the Board, with decision making delegated 
to the Executive Board. 

The Group’s day-to-day governance of 
climate change is overseen by our ESG 
steering group, of which the Chief Financial 
Officer is a member. 

Climate change is covered within the remit 
of the ESG steering group under four 
working themes:
1.  Operational carbon
2.  Value chain
3.  Climate change and business strategy
4.  Engagement and accountability

The ESG steering group reports on its 
activities to the Executive Board.

Board oversight
The Group considers climate change to be a 
significant Board-level strategic issue.
Overall responsibility for climate-related 
risks and opportunities sits with the Board. 
As part of our activities to address risk, 

climate change is a standing Board agenda 
item included within the ESG update.

Climate-related financial issues fall in scope 
of the Audit Committee, which will review 
and take action as required on risk 
management policies and business 
planning.

The Board has undertaken carbon literacy 
training in the last 12 months to support 
understanding in this area and its risks and 
opportunities.

Management’s role
At management level, the climate change 
agenda is managed as part of the delivery of 
our ESG strategy. In the next twelve 
months, it will be driven by our net zero 
strategy which is currently being developed 
and as part of this we will set clear goals, 
metrics and targets to operationalise our 
approach.

Each year we will undertake a planning cycle 
to assess climate-related issues and ensure 

that our net zero strategy is fit for purpose 
in addressing climate-related risk and to 
deliver for the business.

We retain a specialist consultant on an 
ongoing basis who provides any specific 
technical advice that is required in relation 
to climate-related risk, in respect of 
mitigation, adaption and transition.

Next steps
We are committed to disclosing information 
relating to our governance approach and 
both the Board’s and management's role in 
assessing and managing climate-related 
risks and opportunities on an ongoing basis 
in line with the TCFD recommendations. We 
will continue to engage at both Board and 
management level on climate-related 
issues, considering how we can integrate 
best practice into our internal governance 
structure and processes. 

32

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Strategy
The strategy disclosure looks at the actual 
and potential impacts of climate-related risks 
and opportunities on the organisation’s 
businesses, strategy and financial planning.

We acknowledge that climate-related risks 
and opportunities have an impact on our 
business. We are therefore implementing a 
clear strategy to respond to that. Our focus 
is on:
•  Mitigation of our impact, by reducing 

our emissions; and

•  Managing any transition or physical risks 

in relation to adaptation.

We are currently finalising our net zero 
strategy, providing us a clear framework of 
how we manage our climate-related risks 
and opportunities.

Emissions reduction 
As part of our net zero strategy we will adopt 
six key principles which guide our approach:
1.  Make sustainability a key consideration in 

everything we do

2.  Take proactive action by implementing 
changes to our business to reduce our 
impact on the environment

3.  Engage with, and report to, our key 

stakeholders 

4.  Become efficient by design (including 
products, packaging and buildings)
5.  Renew our approach and technology 

where required to address the 
sustainability challenge

6.  Rebalance our impact (through carbon 

offsetting) where the other actions taken 
do not address it sufficiently

We have two headline commitments in 
relation to emissions reduction:
• 

It is our ambition to align to the rest of 
our industry and commit to a net zero 
date of 2040. We believe that this will 
provide us the right framework for 
managing our transition to net zero and 
support our reputation by aligning with 
best practice; and

•  We are finalising a strategy aligned with 
the latest climate science and will look 
to have that validated externally by 
relevant initiatives.

These are reinforced by resource level 
targets, which are further detailed in the 
metrics and targets section.

'The Group recognises the
importance of adopting the 
TCFD recommendations and 
reports climate-related 
information consistent with 
this framework to ensure 
high-quality and decision-
useful disclosures.'

Our most significant climate-related risks and opportunities identified from our process are:

Supply chain

The transition to net zero

Our reputation

Top risks

Top opportunities

Top risks

Top opportunities

Top risks

Top opportunities

Resilience to physical 
impacts – sea level rise/flood 
risk

Development of supply 
chain standards

Carbon pricing

Investment in energy 
efficiency/reducing 
operating costs

Changing consumer 
behaviour

Supporting consumers in 
their transition

Carbon pricing

Changing behaviours and 
policy

Development of products 
with lower lifecycle 
emissions

Insetting (collaborative 
investment to reduce our 
supply chain emissions)

Cost of decarbonisation

Investment in renewable 
energy

Attractiveness to 
stakeholders

Attractiveness to 
stakeholders

33

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsTask Force on climate-related financial disclosures (TCFD) continued

Whilst all organisations will have a significant impact from the costs of the transition to net zero (both directly 
and indirectly) we believe that we can control or mitigate costs well through the implementation of a net zero strategy. 

The three climate change scenarios that we consider in this risk assessment are summarised as follows: 

Early

Late

Business as usual

Smooth transition whereby global 
warming is <2°C

Disruptive transition whereby global 
warming is <2°C

No acceleration of action whereby global 
warming is >3°C

Transition to a carbon-neutral economy 
starts early and the increase in global 
temperatures stays well below 2°C, in 
line with the Paris Agreement.

We experience a high level of impact 
from transition risks in this scenario, with 
higher levels of policy and legislation 
impacting the business in the short to 
medium term. The physical risks are least 
extreme which mitigates medium to 
long-term challenges in our supply chain.

There is early and decisive action to 
reduce global emissions in a gradual way, 
with clearly signposted government 
policies implemented relatively 
smoothly. 

Global climate goal of keeping 
temperatures well below 2°C is met but 
the transition is delayed and must be 
more severe to compensate for the late 
start.

Physical risks under this scenario are 
higher than the smooth transition as 
there are significant differences in the 
impact on the environment, impacting 
our supply chain more severely. The 
transition risks are high and disruptive 
and are likely have a material impact 
because of the pace and nature of the 
interventions required.

To compensate for the delayed start a 
deeper adjustment is required, as 
evidenced in a steeper increase in global 
carbon prices in a late attempt to meet 
the climate target. Under this scenario, 
physical risks rise more quickly than in 
the early scenario and transition risks are 
severe.

No policy action beyond that which has 
already been announced is delivered, 
resulting in above 3°C of warming. 
Therefore, the transition is insufficient 
for the world to meet its climate goal.

Whilst we experience much more limited 
transition risks in this scenario, the 
physical risks are much more severe. This 
could have significant impacts on our 
supply chain in the medium to long term 
as the world will have to adjust to much 
more significant change and 
environmental damage from the impacts 
of the global temperature rise and the 
consequent effects on our climate.

This scenario tests organisations' 
resilience to both chronic changes in the 
environment (e.g. rising sea levels), as 
well as more frequent and extreme 
weather events (e.g. flash floods). 
Therefore, under this scenario, there are 
limited transition risks, but physical risks 
are significant.

Scenario

Description

Overview

Outcomes of our analysis

Assumptions

34

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Risk management
The risk management disclosure looks at 
the processes used to identify, assess and 
manage climate-related risks.

Identifying and assessing risk
The Group identifies climate-related risks 
and opportunities and defines materiality 
based on the ‘We Mean Business’ risk 
taxonomy, TCFD guidance and our existing 
climate-related risk and opportunity 
assessments.

Risks are grouped into two categories: 
transition risks, which relate to the transition 
to a low-carbon economy and physical risks, 
which relate to the physical impacts of 
climate change. These are then grouped 
into further sub-categories. We consider 
our climate change risk between now and 
2050 as a timeframe.

Managing risk
Our risk management process in relation to 
climate-related risk can be summarised by 
the following steps:

• 

Identify risks and opportunities and 
define materiality - based upon:
 - ‘We Mean Business’ taxonomy
 - TCFD guidance
 - Existing climate-related risks and 

opportunity assessments

•  Assess the risks and opportunities and 
any required action in a short-term 
timeframe (<5 years).

•  Model through scenario analysis (where 
relevant) the potential impact of the 
risks and opportunities against three 
climate change scenarios.

•  Manage by developing and 

implementing internal risk controls.

•  Monitor on an ongoing basis and 

improve risk management controls.

Integrating risk
To assess, manage and integrate risk, we 
maintain a climate-related risks and 
opportunity register. This is prepared 
following the risk management process 
already described. The taxonomy structure 
is aligned to the ‘We Mean Business’ 
structure and is described below. The 
register summarises our actions in relation 
to each risk area.

Risk taxonomy and assessment
Our risk taxonomy (in relation to climate-related risk) is shown below, with the underlying level of risk we believe that they present. 

Strategic risk/
opportunity

Risk/opportunity 
category

Description

Significant

Timeframe 
impacted

Scenario 
analysis

Transition risk – risks associated with transitioning to a low-carbon economy, e.g. new regulations or reporting requirements, disruptive technology, changing consumer preferences

Brand and 
reputation 

Reputation

Customer demand 

The potential impacts of stakeholder perceptions of our carbon performance and climate 
change position. Real or perceived inaction on climate change may affect the Group’s access 
to funding; ability to attract and retain talent; and damage the reputation of the Group with its 
customer base

The change in demand for a product or service as a result of climate change. Customers may 
change demand to lower-emission products, such as alternatives to leather and products with 
a lower carbon footprint.

Policy

An increase in regulation, standards or incentives relating to climate change including 
decarbonisation and adaptation could see additional costs borne by the Group.

Transition to net zero/
costs/taxes

Increased costs associated with decarbonisation and requirements to offset our emissions 
footprint that are increasingly expensive and unreliable.

There is a risk that carbon taxes will continue to be introduced in the future, which will increase 
the cost of products and services both purchased and sold by the Group.

Economic 
environment 

Regulation and 
compliance

Regulation and 
compliance

Yes

S, M, L

–

–

Yes

M, L

S, M

S, M

#

KEY Timeframes

S 
M 
L 

Next 3 years
Between 3 and 10 years
After 10 years, before 2050

Scenario analysis
#  

Quantitative/detailed
High level assessment

35

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statements 
Task Force on climate-related financial disclosures (TCFD) continued

Strategic risk/
opportunity

Risk/opportunity 
category

Description

Regulation and 
compliance

International treaties/
sector agreements

Actions or targets for companies determined by internationally binding agreements within 
United Nations international conventions or any other internationally recognised protocol or 
agreement, setting specific emissions targets, may impact the future net zero strategy of the 
Group and result in increased costs.

Significant

Timeframe 
impacted

Scenario 
analysis

–

S, M, L

Physical risk – Increasing global surface temperatures and changing weather patterns can lead to the increased intensity of flooding in some areas, impacting the supply chain

Economic 
environment

Social impacts

Changes to social order, culture and prosperity of communities as a result of physical climate 
or regulation change. There may be an increase in the number and intensity of hot days 
impacting the physical health of our colleagues, partners and suppliers. There may be 
workforce shortages and communities impacted if operations are forced to relocate, resulting 
in supply chain disruption.

–

M, L

Responsible 
sourcing and supply

Responsible 
sourcing and supply

Supply chain

The effect of the changing climate may cause extreme weather events including flooding 
which may result in damage to key supplier locations and affect transport routes.

Access to natural resources Changes in the availability of natural resources, e.g. water and food, due to the effects of 

climate change may impact our ability to source raw materials.

Yes

–

M, L

M, L

#

Opportunities associated with transitioning to a low-carbon economy, e.g. increasing resource efficiency, developing low-carbon products/business models, access to green capital

Responsible 
sourcing and supply

Supply chain

Enhancing our supply chain standards can create opportunities to develop lower emission 
technologies in the manufacturing process; identify the most carbon efficient transport 
routes; and source ingredients from markets most resilient to the physical impacts of climate 
change.

Economic 
environment

Customer demand

Development of low-emission products from low-carbon production facilities and materials 
may result in increasing demand for products resulting in increased revenue.

Regulation and 
compliance

Brand and 
reputation

Energy

Reputation

Strong climate change management can help strengthen relationships with investors, 
customers, consumers and other stakeholders, and potentially lead to new opportunities.

Investment in solar technology across our store and distribution network could help the Group 
increase its resilience to future energy/price shocks as well as reduce emissions.

Making clear our commitment to climate action may increase our attractiveness to our 
stakeholders.

–

–

–

–

M, L

M, L

S, M, L

#

S, M, L

KEY Timeframes

S 
M 
L 

Next 3 years
Between 3 and 10 years
After 10 years, before 2050

36

Scenario analysis
#  

Quantitative/detailed
High level assessment 

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022 
Greenhouse gas emissions
Emissions data in respect of the 2021-22* reporting period, based on operational control, are disclosed as follows:

Scope

Category

tCO2e 
(Location)

tCO2e 
(Market)

Previous year 
(Location)

Variance 

Variance (%)

Scope 1

Scope 1

Scope 2

Scope 2

Scope 3

Scope 3

Scope 3

Scope 3

Scope 3

Scope 3

Scope 3 

All

Combustion

TOTAL

Electricity/heat/steam/cooling

TOTAL

Business travel

Employee commuting

Fuel and energy-related 
activities

Purchased goods and services

Waste generated in operations

Transportation/distribution

TOTAL

TOTAL

2,715

2,715

 2,941

2,941

 424

 842

 719

 78,793

 559

 22,383

103,720

109,376

2,715

2,715

–

–

 424

 842

 719

 78,793

 559

 22,383

103,720

106,435

3,230

3,230

 3,049

3,049

(515)

(15.9%)

 (108)

(3.5%)

First year of reporting

*Due to complexity of obtaining the scope 3 data the carbon emissions reported above relate to financial year 2020-2021.

‘The Greenhouse Gas Protocol (2015) defines location-based Scope 2 emissions as reflecting ‘the average emissions intensity of grids on which energy consumption occurs’ and market-based 
Scope 2 emissions as reflecting ‘emissions from electricity that companies have purposefully chosen’. All stated variances are of our location-based emissions.

The UK emissions, in relation to scope 1 combustion, scope 2 Electricity/heat/steam/cooling and scope 3 business travel, measured in kWh total 28,072,887 (2021: 28,899,091). The Group has no 
overseas energy usage therefore the global energy usage is nil (2021: nil).

Metrics and targets
The metrics and targets disclosure looks at 
the metrics and targets used to assess and 
manage relevant climate-related risks and 
opportunities.

Metrics used
Our operational management of climate-
related risk is measured through the below 
metrics.
•  Energy efficiency (kWh per m2 building 

floor area) to measure the effectiveness 
of our energy conservation.

•  Renewables/PPA (% renewables/% 
self-generated) to measure our 
transition to renewable energy.
•  Waste targets (% recycled/landfill 

avoidance) to measure the 
effectiveness of our approach to  
waste management.

•  Product lifecycle (kgCO2e per unit) to 
measure the effectiveness of the 
decarbonisation of our supply chain (our 
largest emissions area).

•  Supply chain engagement targets  

(% of suppliers engaged) to measure 
the engagement of our supply chain  
in managing our climate change  
risks/opportunities.

•  Logistics performance (kgCO2e per km) 
to measure the effectiveness of the 
decarbonisation of our transportation 
and distribution related to our 
operation, which is a material  
emissions category.

37

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsTask Force on climate-related financial disclosures (TCFD) continued

Greenhouse gas emissions intensity ratio

Greenhouse gas protocol dual reporting

Total footprint (Scope 1, Scope 2 and expenses claims) - CO2e tonnes

Emission type

CO2e tonnes (Dual Reporting Methodology)

Current year 
(2021-22)

Previous year 
(2020-21)

Year on year 
variance

Location  
based

Market based 
(supplier specific)

Variance. %

Turnover (£m)

Intensity ratio 
(tCO2e/£100,000)

£344,710,000

£319,184,000

1.76

2.05

8.0%

-14.1%

Scope 1: Combustion

Scope 2: Purchased energy

Scope 3: Indirect  
energy use

Total

2,715

2,941

424

6,080

2,715

0

424

3,139

0.0%

-100.0%

0.0%

-48.4%

Emission reporting notes
•  Our methodology has been based on 
the principals of the Greenhouse Gas 
Protocol, taking account of the 2015 
amendment which sets out a ‘dual 
reporting’ methodology for the 
reporting of Scope 2 emissions. In the 
‘Total footprint’ summary above, 
purchased electricity is reported on a 
location based method.

•  We have reported on all the measured 
emissions sources required under The 
Companies (Directors’ Report) and 
Limited Liability Partnerships (Energy 
and Carbon Report) Regulations 2018.

•  The period of our report is 1 August 

2021 – 30 July 2022.

•  This includes limited emissions under 
Scope 1 and 2 (gas & fuel used in 
transport; purchased electricity), except 
where stated, and limited emissions 
under Scope 3 (fuel used in personal/
hire cars for business purposes).

•  Energy use and emissions figures relate 

to our UK operation only.

•  Conversion factors for UK electricity 

(location-based methodology), gas and 
other emissions are those published by 

38

the Department for Environment, Food 
and Rural Affairs for 2021-22.

•  Conversion factors for UK electricity 
(market-based methodology) are 
provided by the relevant supplier and 
published at electricityinfo.org

•  Electricity and gas has been pro-rated 
to cover the July period to match the 
financial year due to August to June 
currently being the only available data.
•  Some employee mileage has now been 
calculated using litres and some cost 
data has been converted into miles at a 
rate of 45p per mile whereas last year 
only mileage data was used. 

•  UK proportion versus global emissions 

have not been split as there is no 
non-UK energy use.

Statement of exclusions
•  Emissions in relation to fugitive 

emissions are excluded from the scope 
of reporting due to lack of quality data 
records in this area.

Energy efficiency action
During this reporting year, we have 
undertaken several energy efficiency 
actions across our estate. These include:
•  Retrofit of air heaters with improved 

efficiency and performance at multiple 
sites;

•  Replacement of gas fired air 

conditioning systems with all electric air 
conditioning systems at multiple sites;

•  Continued rollout of LED lighting;
•  All our sites use 100% renewable 

energy; and

•  Energy generation from waste which 
has 100% diversion from landfill.

In addition to the above, from 1 April 2021 
we have been using 100% renewable energy 
across all ScS sites. 

Our targets
Our net zero strategy will work towards the 
below targets:
• 

It is our ambition to align to the rest of 
our industry and commit to a net zero 
date of 2040.

•  We are finalising a strategy aligned with 
climate science and will look to have 

that validated externally by relevant 
initiatives.

Next steps
We will continue to drive forward to deliver 
significant carbon reductions. We are on 
track for all of the decarbonisation targets 
(shown above) and will continue to reduce 
our impact on the environment across  
all three emission scopes in line with  
climate science.

'We have reported on all the 
measured emissions sources 
required under The 
Companies Act 2006 
(Strategic Report and 
Directors’ Report) 
Regulations 2013 and The 
Companies (Directors’ 
Report) and Limited Liability 
Partnerships (Energy and 
Carbon Report) Regulations 
2018 except where stated.'

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022S
t
r
a
t
e
g

i
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

|

C
o
r
p
o
r
a
t
e
g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

|

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

3939

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Section 172 statement

The Board recognises the importance 
of engaging with stakeholders

Section 172 statement
The Board recognises the importance of 
engaging with stakeholders and taking their 
views into account when making decisions, 
although the Board acknowledges that not 
every decision it makes will necessarily result 
in a positive outcome for all of the Group’s 
stakeholders. Details on how the Board 
operates and the way in which it reaches 
decisions are set out on pages 64 to 101.

Details of our key stakeholders and 
engagement with these stakeholders are 
set out on pages 22 to 31. Examples of how 
the Directors have oversight of stakeholder 
matters and had regard for these matters 
when making decisions are included in the 
table below and discussed throughout the 
Strategic report and in the Governance 
section on pages 2 to 101.

Section 172 of the Companies Act 2006 
requires a director of a company to act in 
the way he or she considers, in good faith, 
would most likely promote the success of 
the company for the benefit of its members 
as a whole but having regard to a range of 
factors set out in section 172(1)(a)-(f) in the 
Companies Act 2006. This report is 
presented in compliance with The 
Companies (Miscellaneous Reporting) 

Section 172 duty
(a) The likely consequences of any decision in the long term
Example: the Board reviewed the progress made in year one of the Group’s refreshed strategy and ensured that both decisions taken and future plans continued 
to support the long-term success of the Group, with regard to allocating the Group’s capital in the most beneficial way.

(b) The interests of the company’s employees
Example: Our colleagues are critical to the success of our business and the Board has ultimate responsibility for ensuring the Group’s decisions consider their
interests. During the year colleagues have taken part in discussion forums held by members of the Board to raise any concerns or issues directly,

(c) The need to foster the company’s business relationships with suppliers, customers and others
Example: Managing these relationships is critical in ensuring the Group delivers on its strategy. During the year the Group held it’s first conference for its 
furniture suppliers. This was a great opportunity to engage with our suppliers and discuss with them our purpose, mission and strategic goals.

40

Regulations 2018 and the UK Corporate 
Governance Code July 2018.

The table below identifies where, in the 
Annual Report, information on the issues, 
factors and stakeholders the Board has 
considered in respect of Section 172(1).

Key examples
Our business model 
Our strategy
Key performance indicators
Financial review
Principal risks and uncertainties
Viability statement
Corporate governance statement
Directors’ remuneration report
Chair’s letter
Our business model
Chief Executive Officer’s review 
Our strategy
Key performance indicators
Responsible business
Principal risks and uncertainties
Corporate governance statement
Directors’ remuneration report
Chair’s letter
Our business model
Chief Executive Officer’s review 
Our strategy
Responsible business
Corporate governance statement
Directors’ remuneration report

Page
10 to 11
12 to 19
20 to 21
42 to 45
50 to 59
60 to 61
64 to 74
84 to 97
4 to 5
10 to 11
6 to 7
12 to 19
20 to 21
22 to 31
50 to 59
64 to 74
84 to 97
4 to 5
10 to 11
6 to 7
12 to 19
22 to 31
64 to 74
84 to 97

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Section 172 duty
(d) The impact of the company’s operations on the community and the environment
Example: as a responsible business, the Group is committed to acting in the best interests of our communities and in a sustainable manner. During the year the 
Group supported local charities and donated a total of £64,000. The Group has established an ESG steering group and developed an ESG strategy with clear 
targets that aims to integrate sustainability throughout all aspects of the business. 

(e) The desirability of the company maintaining a reputation for high standards of business conduct
Example: our colleagues received mandatory online training throughout the year on a wide array of topics including Equality & Diversity, Data Protection and 
Anti-Bribery. All suppliers are required to comply with our supplier code of conduct which sets out our expectations in relation to health and safety procedures, 
anti-bribery and corruption policies, product quality standards and much more.

(f) The need to act fairly as between members of the company
Example: the Board seeks to ensure that communications are clear and its actions promote the long-term success of the Company. During the course  
of the year, the Group has engaged with it’s stakeholders and as a result, the Board have been able to take their views and interests into account when  
making decisions.

Key examples
Chair’s letter
Our business model
Chief Executive Officer’s review 
Our strategy
Responsible business
Principal risks and uncertainties
Corporate governance statement
Our business model 
Our strategy
Responsible business 
Corporate governance statement
Directors’ remuneration report
Responsible business 
Corporate governance statement

Page
4 to 5
10 to 11
6 to 7
12 to 19
22 to 31
50 to 59
64 to 74
10 to 11
12 to 19
22 to 31
64 to 74
84 to 97
22 to 31
64 to 74

Non-financial information statement
The table below sets out where stakeholders can find information in our Strategic report that relates to non-financial matters, as required by the Non-Financial Reporting requirements as detailed 
in the Companies Act 2006.

Reporting requirement
Environmental matters

Employees

Social matters

Human rights

Anti-bribery and anti-corruption

Description of business model
Non-financial KPIs
Principal risks and uncertainties

Our policies
Regulatory and compliance
Responsible sourcing and supply chain
Sustainability
Monitoring our carbon footprint
Diversity and inclusion
Health and safety
Engagement
Code of Business conduct
Composition, succession and evaluation
Apprenticeship programmes
Supporting local communities and charities
Responsible sourcing and supply chain
Modern Slavery policy
Political donations
Whistle-blowing
Anti-bribery and corruption statement
N/A

N/A

N/A

Where you can find out more
Page 53
Pages 23 to 25 and page 54
Pages 23 to 25
Pages 37 to 38
Page 76
Pages 27 to 28
Page 27
Page 100
Pages 73 to 74
Pages 27 to 28
Page 30
Pages 23 to 25 and page 54
Pages 24 and 25 and visit our website
Page 101
Page 70
Page 100
Pages 10 to 11

Page 20

Pages 50 to 59

41

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsFinancial review

’  Shareholder returns have 
increased in the year, with a 
proposed full year ordinary 
dividend increase of 35%, 
coupled with the 
commencement of a £7m 
share buyback programme.’
The strong opening order book and the increase in orders 
in the year resulted in the Group achieving record levels of 
gross sales*. Despite facing significant inflationary cost 
pressures, the business is pleased to have achieved a 
strong gross margin* and underlying operating profit*. 

Overview
Improvements in the supply chain, coupled 
with the increase in orders in the year 
resulted in the Group achieving record levels 
of gross sales*. Whilst facing significant 
inflationary cost pressures, the business 
achieved a 45.3% gross margin* in the year, 
which is in line with pre-pandemic 
comparatives and delivered an underlying 
operating profit* of £20.2m (2021: £22.5m). 

The Group benefited from £2.6m  
of business rates relief in the year  
(2021: £10.2m).

Shareholder returns have increased in the 
year, with a proposed full year ordinary 
dividend increase of 35%, coupled with the 
commencement of a £7m share buyback 
programme. The Board are mindful of the 
challenging economic environment we face 

42

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022‘  Whilst facing significant inflationary 
cost pressures, the business 
achieved a 45.3% gross margin*.’ 

Gross sales* 

Revenue

Gross profit

Distribution costs

Administration expenses before exceptionals items and  

business rate relief

Business rates relief

Total operating expenses

Underlying operating profit*

Operating exceptional items

Operating profit

Net finance expense

Profit before tax

Tax

Profit after tax

Underlying profit before tax*

Statutory earnings per share

Underlying earnings per share*

EBITDA*

Underlying EBITDA* 

52 weeks ended 
30 July 2022
£m

As restated**
53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021
£m

344.7

331.6

156.3

(21.3)

(117.4)

2.6

(136.1)

20.2

–

20.2

(3.8)

16.4

(2.8)

13.6

16.4

36.2p

36.2p

46.8

46.8

319.2

305.2

147.0

(18.7)

(116.0)

10.2

(124.5)

22.5

4.3

26.8

(4.1)

22.7

(3.6)

19.1

18.4

50.4p

41.3p

52.8

48.5

*  This report includes alternative performance measures (APMs) which are defined and reconciled to IFRS information, where 

applicable, on pages 46 to 47.

**  The prior year gross sales and revenue have been restated to account for warranty sales as an agent rather than principal 
under IFRS 15, see note 29. This did not result in any change to reported profit, earnings per share, cash flows or in the 
consolidated statement of financial position.

and remain committed to retaining a robust 
balance sheet in these uncertain times. 

Gross sales and revenue
The Group continues to operate a special 
order business, where goods are built for 
customers in line with their specifications. 
Gross sales*, revenue and related profit is 
not recognised until the orders are 
delivered. Due to the impacts of the 
COVID-19 pandemic, the year commenced 
with the Group having an order book 
totalling £103.5m (including VAT). Despite 
increased year-on-year order intake, supply 
chain improvements in the past 12 months 
meant we were able to reduce the size of 
the order book to £71.7m at 30 July 2022. 
The closing order book at the year end was 
still £28.8m higher than at the same point  
in 2019.

Gross sales* increased by £25.5m (8.0%) to 
£344.7m (2021: £319.2m). 

This movement is further analysed below: 
•  An increase in furniture sales in stores of 

14.7% to £279.9m (2021: £244.0m);
•  An increase in flooring sales in stores of 
13.6% to £32.6m (2021: £28.7m); and
•  A decrease in online sales of 30.8% to 

£32.2m (2021: £46.5m).

Revenue, which represents gross sales* less 
charges relating to interest-free credit sales 
(see note 3 to the financial statements – 
Segment information), increased by 8.6% to 
£331.6m when compared to the prior year 
(2021: £305.2m).

Gross profit
Whilst gross margin* declined slightly on the 
prior year, it remained strong at 45.3% 
(2021: 46.1%) and in line with pre-pandemic 
levels. This was particularly pleasing given 
the inflationary cost pressures faced by the 
Group throughout the year. The decrease of 
72 basis points was largely due to an 
increase in lower margin stock sales, as the 
stores have been open for the full year 
unlike in the prior year which experienced 
periods of store closures due to COVID-19. 

The increased volume and margin year on 
year resulted in an increase in gross profit of 
£9.3m (6.3%).

Distribution costs
Distribution costs comprise the total cost of 
the in-house distribution function and 
includes employment costs, vehicle running 
costs, property and utility costs for the nine 
distribution centres, as well as costs of 
third-party delivery services contracted to 
support peak delivery periods.

Distribution costs increased 14.0% in the 
year to £21.3m (2021: £18.7m). This exceeds 
the 8.0% increase in gross sales* as a 
consequence of an increase in staff-related 
costs driven by salary pressures in the 
logistics sector and an increase in fuel and 
property-related costs.

As a percentage of gross sales* for the year, 
distribution costs were 6.2% (2021: 5.9%).

43

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsFinancial review continued

Administration expenses  
before exceptional items and 
government support
Administration expenses comprise:
•  Store operating costs, principally 
employment costs and property-
related costs (depreciation, rates, 
utilities and store repairs);
•  Marketing expenditure; and
•  General administrative expenditure, 

which includes the employment costs 
for the Directors, senior management 
and all head office based support 
functions and other central costs.

Administration costs for the year totalled 
£117.4m, compared to £116.0m in the prior 
year. Administration costs were 34.0%  
of gross sales*, down from 36.3% in the 
prior year.

There was an overall increase in 
administration costs of £1.4m.
•  Marketing costs increased by £6.1m to 
£23.3m (2021: £17.2m), as the business 
increased the investment in advertising 
with a return back to pre-pandemic 
levels (2019: £22.4m), together with 
increased digital marketing spend. The 
prior year saw reduced marketing 
investment during periods of store 
closure due to the pandemic; 

•  Performance-related pay decreased by 
£3.9m to £12.9m (2021: £16.8m) when 
compared to the prior year. Commission 
paid increased £0.5m in the year. However, 
this was offset by a £4.4m reduction in 
bonuses paid to senior and middle 
management due to performance levels 
achieved compared to the increased 
targets set at the start of the year as we 
emerged from the COVID-19 pandemic;

44

•  Other payroll costs have increased by 
£0.3m to £35.7m (2021: £35.4m) with 
the impact of wage inflation being 
largely offset by reducing headcount;

•  Property-related costs, including 
depreciation and amortisation, 
increased by £0.7m to £38.5m (2021: 
£37.8m) predominately due to increases 
in energy costs partly offset by cost 
savings as a result of store closures; and

Of total costs, 74% (2021: 72%), or £245.9m 
(2021: £224.9m) were variable or 
discretionary, and were made up of:
•  £188.4m cost of goods sold, including 

finance and warranty costs  
(2021: £172.2m);

•  £21.3m distribution costs  

(2021: £18.7m);

•  £23.3m marketing costs (2021: £17.2m); 

and

•  Other costs decreased by £1.8m to 

•  £12.9m performance-related payroll 

£7.0m (2021: £8.8m) as our cost base 
normalises and returns to pre-
pandemic levels.

Business rates relief
The Group’s result for the year has 
benefited from £2.6m (2021: £10.2m) of 
retail business rates relief provided in 
response to the COVID-19 outbreak. No 
further benefit is expected in the year 
ending 29 July 2023.

Flexible costs
The nature of the Group’s business model, 
where almost all sales are made to order, 
results in the majority of costs being 
proportional to sales. This provides the 
Group with the ability to flex its cost base as 
revenue changes, protecting the business 
should there be wider economic pressures. 
As shown below, the proportion of cost 
variability remained relatively consistent 
year on year.

Excluding business rates relief and 
exceptional items, total costs before tax for 
the year were £330.9m (2021: £311.0m). 
Total costs increased £19.9m, largely as a 
result of the movement in variable costs, 
which increased in line with the increase  
in sales. 

costs (2021: £16.8m).

Semi-variable costs totalled £42.7m, or 13% 
of total costs, for the year (2021: £44.2m; 
14%) and are predominantly other non-
performance-related payroll costs and 
store costs. Depreciation and interest 
(including on leased assets), rates, heating 
and lighting make up the remaining £42.3m 
(13%) of total costs (2021: £41.9m; 14%).

Underlying operating profit* 
Operating profit before exceptional costs 
was £20.2m for the year, compared to 
£22.5m last year, driven by the £9.3m 
increase in gross profit being offset by the 
decrease in business rates relief and an 
increase in both distribution and 
administration costs. Without the additional 
business rates relief, the Group would have 
recorded an underlying operating profit of 
£17.6m (2021: £12.3m).

Operating exceptional items
In the prior year a £4.2m exceptional credit 
was recorded relating to the reversal of 
previous impairment to the Group’s stores 
– both the property, plant and equipment 
and right-of-use lease assets. The majority 
of the prior year credit reversed the 
impairment taken in the FY20 as a 

consequence of reduced forecasts 
following the impact of COVID-19, with an 
additional element reversing historic store 
impairment following stronger forecast 
store performance.

Finance costs
The net finance expense has decreased  
by £0.3m to £3.8m (2021: £4.1m) as a result 
of a reduction in interest on the Group’s 
lease liability as the Group’s average lease 
length decreased.

Taxation
The tax charge for the financial year is lower 
(2021: lower) than if the standard rate of 
corporation tax had been applied, mainly 
due to the benefit of the capital allowances 
super deduction on qualifying additions and 
the increase in the rate used to measure the 
Group’s deferred tax asset.

Earnings per share (EPS) 
EPS for the year ended 30 July 2022 was 
36.2p (2021: 50.4p) and underlying EPS* 
which excludes exceptional costs, was 
36.2p (2021: 41.3p).

A full reconciliation of EPS is shown in note 
10 to the financial statements.

*  This report includes alternative performance measures 

(APMs) which are defined and reconciled to IFRS 
information, where applicable, on pages 46 to 47.

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Cash and cash equivalents
The Group operates a negative working 
capital business model whereby:
•  For cash/card sales, customers pay 

deposits at the point of order and settle 
outstanding balances before delivery;

•  For consumer credit sales, the loan 

provider pays ScS within two working 
days of delivery; and

•  The majority of product suppliers are 
paid at the end of the month following 
the month of delivery into the 
distribution centres.

Cash decreased £16.8m in the year to 
£70.8m (2021: £87.7m). A summary of cash 
flows is shown below: 

52 weeks 
ended
30 July 2022
£m

53 weeks 
ended
31 July 2021
£m

28.5

41.6

(28.6)
(4.7)

(3.9)

(8.7)
(4.4)
(3.6)

(26.4)
(4.5)

(3.8)

6.9
(1.1)
(0.4)

(16.8)

5.4

Cash generated from 
operating activities
Payment of capital and 
interest elements of 
leases

Net capital expenditure
Net taxation and 

interest payments

Free cash flow
Dividends 
Purchase of own shares

Net cash (outflow)/

generated

The cash generated from operating activities 
is £13.1m lower than FY21 due predominantly 
to the normalisation of working capital 
including a reduction in customer deposits 
and VAT owed.

The payment of capital and interest 
elements of leases has increased by £2.2m, 
principally as a result of a larger proportion 
of the repayment of rent deferrals 
negotiated with landlords in FY20 falling into 
FY22 than FY21. 

Capital allocation
The Group’s objectives when managing 
capital are to safeguard the Group’s ability 
to continue as a going concern whilst 
retaining financial flexibility to both invest in 
the business where economic returns are 
attractive and provide returns to 
shareholders. We aim to allocate capital, 
subject to strict returns criteria, to meet the 
strategic needs of the business. Our target 
is gross capital expenditure of under 4.0% of 
total sales per annum, on average. During 
this financial year we invested in developing 
our Coventry concept store and digital 
lounge as part of the ‘Engaging showrooms’ 
pillar of our strategy, and relocated two 
stores and one distribution centre to 
improve our operations. 

Return to shareholders
The Board recognises the importance of a 
dividend to investors and, despite 
suspending the dividend temporarily, is 
keen to reinstate a progressive policy, with 
the intention to:
•  Keep earnings cover in the range of 

1.25x to 2.00x;

•  Ensure cash cover remains in the range 
of 1.75x to 2.25x through the economic 
cycle; and 

•  Pay an interim dividend that will  

be approximately one-third of the  
total dividend.

‘  We aim to allocate capital, subject to 
strict returns criteria, to meet the 
strategic needs of the business.’ 

In March, the Group also launched a share 
buyback programme to further return funds 
to shareholders through the buyback and 
cancellation of up to £7m of shares. As at 
the signing date, the Group had purchased 
and cancelled £3.3m worth of shares, and 
will seek approval at the Group’s AGM in 
November 2022 to complete the 
programme.

Chris Muir
Chief Financial Officer
10 October 2022

The Board considers this policy appropriate 
given the strength of the balance sheet, 
whilst ensuring the Group has sufficient 
resources to pursue potential future 
opportunities to deliver growth.

As a result of the positive trading, the Group 
paid an interim dividend of 4.5p in May 2022 
(2021: 3.0p). The Board is confident in the 
outlook for the Group and proposes a final 
dividend of 9.0p (2021: 7.0p). If approved, 
this would give a full-year dividend of 13.5p 
(2021: 10.0p). The final dividend, if approved, 
will be paid on 9 December 2022 to 
shareholders on the register on 
11 November 2022. The ex-dividend date is 
10 November 2022.

The total dividend paid is in line with target 
earnings per share cover, and cash cover 
through the economic cycle.

45

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsAlternative performance measures (APMs)

In the reporting of financial information, the Board have adopted various alternative performance measures (APMs). APMs should be considered 
in addition to IFRS measurements. The Board believe that these APMs assist in providing useful information on the underlying performance and 
position of the Group and enhance the comparability of information between reporting periods by adjusting for non-underlying items which 
affect IFRS measures and are used internally by the Board to measure the Group’s performance.

Consequently, APMs are used by the Board and management for performance analysis, planning, reporting and incentive setting purposes and 
have remained consistent with prior year. A subset is also used by management in setting Director and management remuneration. The measures 
are also used in discussions with the investment analyst community. The key APMs used by the Group are summarised in the table below.

APM

Definition

Like-for like order growth

Gross sales

‘Like-for-like’ order growth comprises total orders 
(inclusive of VAT) in a financial period compared to total 
orders achieved in a prior period excluding new or closed 
stores to ensure comparability.

Gross sales represents turnover on the sale of goods and 
aftercare services before deduction of interest-free credit.

Reconciliation

N/A

Gross margin

Gross profit as a percentage of gross sales.

Non-underlying items

Certain costs or incomes that derive from events or 
transactions that fall outside the normal activities of the 
Group and are excluded by virtue of their size and nature  
to reflect management’s view of the performance of  
the Group.

Revenue
Add back: costs of interest-free credit

Gross sales (note 3)

Revenue
Add back: costs of interest-free credit

Gross sales (note 3)
Gross profit

Gross margin

Operating exceptional items (note 5)

2022 
£’000

331,569
13,141

344,710

2022 
£’000

331,569
13,141

344,710
156,264

45.3%

2022 
£’000

–

As restated*
2021 
£’000

305,231
13,953

319,184

As restated*
2021 
£’000

305,231
13,953

319,184
146,987

46.1%

2021 
£’000

4,242

46

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Alternative performance measures (APMs) continued

APM

Definition

Reconciliation

EBITDA and underlying 
EBITDA

Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and 
amortisation (EBITDA). Underlying EBITDA is before  
the effect of non-underlying items in the year.

Underlying operating profit Underlying operating profit is based on operating profit 

before the effect of non-underlying items in the year.

Underlying profit before tax Underlying profit before tax is based on profit before tax 

before the effect of non-underlying items in the year.

Underlying basic earnings 
per share (EPS)

Underlying basic EPS is based on earnings per share before 
the effect of non-underlying items in the year.

Statutory operating profit 
Depreciation on tangible fixed assets 
Depreciation on right-of-use assets 
Amortisation of intangible assets 

EBITDA

Non-underlying items 

Underlying EBITDA

Statutory operating profit 
Non-underlying items 

Underlying operating profit

Statutory profit before tax 
Non-underlying items 

Underlying profit before tax

Profit for the period
Non-underlying items net of tax

Underlying profit after tax

Number of shares (000’s)

Underlying EPS

2022 
£’000

20,199
4,162
21,523
882

46,766

–

46,766

2022 
£’000

20,199
–

20,199

2022 
£’000

16,358
–

16,358

2022 
£’000

13,584
–

13,584

37,499

36.2p

2021 
£’000

26,773
3,980
21,149
865

52,767

(4,242)

48,525

2021 
£’000

26,773
(4,242)

22,531

2021 
£’000

22,674
(4,242)

18,432

2021 
£’000

19,064
(3,436)

15,628

37,829

41.3p

*  The prior year results above have been restated to account for warranty sales as the agent under IFRS 15, see note 29.

47

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsRisk and risk management

Our approach to risk management

We recognise that effective risk management is essential to enable us to deliver our strategy and our 
commitments to our customers, colleagues, shareholders, the community and the environment.
The following pages set out our established approach to risk management.

Risk identification and evaluation
The Board, the Executive Board and the 
Group’s senior management team maintain 
a continuous process to manage the risks 
and internal controls of the Group.

Key activities of this process include:
•  The identification, assessment and 

reporting of risks;

•  Maintenance of detailed functional risk 
registers and mitigating activities;

•  Proactive monitoring, management and 

reporting of emerging risks;

•  Regular testing and enhancement of 

mitigating controls;

•  Regular review of the principal risks and 
mitigating controls by the Executive 
Board (which includes the Chief 
Executive Officer and Chief Financial 
Officer);

•  Formal review of the principal risks and 
uncertainties by the Audit Committee 
and Board three times a year;

•  Annual review of the Group’s viability 

statement;

•  Regular presentations on key risk areas 
by the Head of Audit, Risk & Compliance 
to the Audit Committee; and
•  Monitoring of key performance 

indicators to help identity emerging 
risks.

Risk appetite
Risk appetite is defined as the level of risk 
that the Group is willing to take in order to 
achieve its strategic and operational 
objectives. The risk appetite is set by the 
Board after seeking feedback from the 
Executive Board and the senior 
management team, and is aligned to the 
Group’s strategic goals and priorities. 

The Group’s risk appetite is used to ensure 
that decision making is in line with the 
Group’s risk management framework. 

The Board typically has a lower appetite for 
risk in areas such as regulation and finance, 
but is more willing to accept a higher 
appetite for risks such as competition and 
the economic environment.

Key roles and responsibilities 
The Board has overall responsibility for the 
leadership of risk management, sets 
strategic objectives the risk appetite and 
also monitors performance.

The Executive Board is responsible for 
disseminating risk policies. They support 
and help the Board assess risk. The 
Executive Board also oversee risk 
management and encourage open 
communication on risk matters, and have 
ownership for each of the principal risks. 
The Executive Board assesses the 
materiality of risks in the context of the 
whole Group. 

The Audit Committee oversees risk 
management and internal controls. The 
Committee reviews the Group’s internal 
controls framework, sets objectives, and 
monitors the effectiveness of the audit, risk 
and compliance teams. The Committee 
also monitors the independence and 
expertise of the external auditors.

The following groups provide bottom-up 
risk management at an operational level:

•  The audit, risk and compliance teams are 
responsible for the monitoring of the 
Group’s risk management approach and 
provides a link between the operational 
managers and Audit Committee. The 
Head of Audit, Risk & Compliance reports 
formally to the Audit Committee and has 
direct access to the Chair of the Audit 
Committee. The audit, risk and 
compliance teams take a risk-based 
approach to planning audit work.

•  The Executive Board and senior 

management team is responsible for the 
identification and assessment of existing 
and emerging risks at an operational level. 
The Executive Board is also responsible 
for the implementation of agreed 
mitigating controls. 

Further details of the Group’s internal 
control framework can be found in the Audit 
Committee report on pages 77 to 83.

48

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Managing risks internally
Functional risks 
•  The functional risk registers are 

maintained and emerging risks are 
identified by the senior management 
team with input from the relevant 
director. 

•  The functional risk registers and the 

mitigating controls are reviewed by the 
audit, risk and compliance teams 
quarterly.

•  The functional risk registers from all 
departments are shared with the 
Executive Board and the senior 
management team.

Consolidated corporate risks
•  The functional risk registers are 

consolidated into the corporate risk 
register.

•  The corporate risks are reviewed by the 
Executive Board quarterly and at every 
Audit Committee meeting. 

•  The risk appetite is determined by the 
Executive Board and approved by the 
Audit Committee.

External reporting
Following completion of the risk 
management process, the outcomes are 
subject to periodic review with the 
Executive Board. Subsequently, the 
principal risks and uncertainties are 
submitted to the Audit Committee ahead of 
final review and approval by the Board.

The link to our strategic priorities are shown 
against each principal risk on pages 51 to 59.

The graphic below illustrates how our risk management framework enables us to maintain 
governance over risk management activities across the Group.

Risk management framework

Top-down
Corporate level oversight of risk
Board, Executive Board and the Audit Committee

Key risks and 
emerging risks 
identified 

Review, monitor and 
report to the Audit 
Committee

Risk evaluated and 
rating assigned

Implement  
agreed processes 
and mitigation

Identify the 
required actions 
against each risk

Bottom-up
Functional and operational level risk
Audit, risk and compliance team, Executive Board  
and senior management team

Process for preparing consolidated 
financial statements 
The Group has established internal controls 
and risk management systems in relation to 
the process for preparing consolidated 
financial statements.

The key features of this are:
•  Management regularly monitors and 
considers developments in reporting 
regulation and, where appropriate, 
reflects developments in the 
consolidated financial statements. The 
external auditors and the Audit 
Committee also keep the Board 
appraised of these developments;
•  The Audit Committee and the Board 
review the consolidated financial 
statements. This review takes into 
account reports from management and 
the external auditors on significant 
judgements, changes in accounting 
policies, changes in accounting 
estimates and other relevant matters to 
the consolidated financial statements; 
and

•  The full-year financial statements are 
subject to external audit and the 
half-year financial statements are 
reviewed by the external auditors.

The Board’s assessment of the long-term 
viability of ScS is also reviewed annually, 
taking account of the principal risks faced. 
The approach for assessing long-term 
viability is set out on page 60.

49

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsPrincipal risks and uncertainties

Principal risks and uncertainties

Our principal risks and 
uncertainties have been 
assessed in accordance 
with our framework as set 
out on the previous pages.

Identifying risks
The identification and review of emerging 
risks are embedded into our risk review 
process, and our principal risks are  
updated accordingly. 

The Board confirm that they have performed 
a robust assessment of the emerging and 
principal risks and mitigating controls.

Key emerging risks that we are monitoring 
include the uncertain economic and 
geopolitical external environment and the 
potential impact on our business and 
customers. Further details are noted on the 
next section on principal risks. 

We continue to monitor the requirements 
and consider the impact of an increasing 
focus on environmental, social and 
governance (ESG) matters. We have set out 
our approach to tackling these issues within 
our Responsibility and sustainability report 
on pages 22 to 31, and further disclosures in 
our TCFD report on pages 32 to 39.

We have reviewed the residual risk of 
COVID-19, and we now consider that it is no 
longer a significant risk to the business. We 
will monitor and respond accordingly if the 
risk of a future pandemic increases.

We continue to monitor the ongoing risk of 
cyber security incidents following the global 
increase in malware and ransomware 
attacks, in particular following the conflict  
in Ukraine. 

Changes to the principal risks
Economic environment
Significant increases in energy prices, 
general price inflation and interest rate 
increases have all placed pressure on 
household budgets, which, along with 
widespread economic and political 
uncertainty has and will continue to 
negatively affect consumer confidence. 
The cost of living crisis is impacting all 
aspects of people’s daily lives, including 
their decisions in relation to spending on 
non-essential items, and in particular big 
ticket items. This risk continues to escalate 
as further increases in home energy, 
general costs and interest rates are 
predicted. Whilst recent and future 
government intervention may help reduce 
the impact, we are mindful that the recently 
announced government ‘Growth Plan’ has, 
initially at least, increased forecasted 
interest rates, reduced mortgage 
availability, and decreased the value of 

sterling against the dollar. Higher interest 
rates will impact mortgage costs and 
potentially decrease disposable household 
income, together with increasing the 
Group’s cost of supplying interest free 
credit. Lower mortgage availability could 
impact the level of housing transactions.  
A sustained decrease in the value of  
sterling against the dollar would increase 
product costs.

The ongoing conflict in Ukraine has added 
further uncertainty in the macro economy, 
which has and will continue to reduce 
consumer confidence and add increased 
pressure to the supply chain.

The ‘Economic environment’ principal risk is 
directly impacted by the decrease in 
consumer confidence and the cost of living 
increases highlighted above. We have 
therefore increased the risk level to high.

The principal risk ‘Supply chain and product’ 
has been renamed as ‘Responsible sourcing 
and supply chain’ to better reflect the risk 
and increased focus on responsible 
sourcing of products. Because of the risk of 
further disruption in the supply chain 
caused by geopolitical issues, we have 
indicated an increase in risk. However, the 
profile stays within our medium rating due 
to the mitigating controls in place.

Risk categories
Each principal risk is grouped into an over 
arching risk category to enable better 
analysis of risk and improved risk reporting.

Strategic risks are those, which affect the 
marketplace and the environment in which our 
business operates. The principal risks in this 
category are: ‘Economic environment’, 
‘Competition’ and ‘Regulation and compliance’.

Infrastructure risks are those, which affect 
the people and the resources that are 
required to operate our business. The 
principal risks in this category are: ‘Business 
systems and infrastructure’, ‘Responsible 
sourcing and supply chain’ and ‘Our people 
and culture’.

Reputational risks are those, which could 
damage the brand or perception of our 
business. The principal risk in this category 
is ‘Brand and reputation’.

The following pages set out our principal 
risks, their movement during the year along 
with a summary of key controls and 
mitigating factors.

50

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Economic environment

Risk 
category
Strategic

Change in 
risk level
Increasing

Risk 
appetite 
Balanced

Risk profile 
after controls
High

Performance 
indicator 
Gross sales

Management 
responsibility
Executive Board

Reports 
to 
Board

Consumer confidence 
Geopolitical and economic uncertainties and the 
resultant cost of living crisis may influence 
customer behaviour and buying choices within 
our market, leading to a reduction in spending on 
high value items, which could negatively impact 
the future performance of the Group.

Mitigation & progress during the year
Our product range is continually reviewed to 
ensure we are able to help our customers create 
a home they love at a competitive price. We have 
refined our key core value furniture products and 
introduced new designs and brands to expand 
our product offering. 

Interest rates, currency rates  
and consumer credit
The Group’s ability to offer interest-free credit to 
customers may be impaired because of high 
default levels or increased interest rates. 
Increased credit levels, due to economic 
uncertainty, may affect a customer’s ability to 
access credit.

Further interest rates and currency exchange 
rates fluctuations could lead to cost pressure on 
our suppliers which in turn could be passed on to 
the Group.

Our dining and occasional furniture offering is 
continually under review to ensure we can 
provide a competitive and attractive range. We 
have an extensive range of flooring products, 
including a number of low price point offerings, to 
ensure we continue to offer our customers a 
wide range at competitive prices and great value.

We continue to maintain a lean business model 
and with our flexible costs in 2022 totalling 73%, 
we are well positioned to maintain our viability if 
consumer confidence is subdued and as a result 
sales decline. At the end of the financial year the 
Group held a strong cash balance of £70.8m. We 
constantly review our structure, ensuring we 
maintain our efficient business model. 

As part of our strategy, we have completed 
reviews on key focus areas to identify and 
implement process improvements that ensure 
our costs remain lean and we maintain  
our profitability.

We purchase our products on a sterling basis, 
minimising direct exposure to exchange rate 
changes. We work closely with our suppliers to 
minimise any impact on our cost base of 
products and our retail pricing strategy.

We produce and operate to a detailed, bottom-
up budget, ensuring our teams work towards 
specific performance targets and maintain 
careful cost control.

The Group offers interest-free credit options for 
our customers to help make purchasing goods 
for their home more affordable. 

Cost and access to consumer finance is 
managed by having strong relationships with 
three finance houses. Relationships with other 
finance houses are also maintained to ensure the 
Group continues to receive the right service at 
the right cost. During the year, the Group has 
trialled a change to our in-store finance house 
provider with a view to improving acceptance 
rates and reducing costs. We continue to review 
our finance offering to ensure that we remain 
competitive and at an acceptable cost to  
the Group.

Strategic priorities

1

Outstanding team

2

Customer driven

3

Inspiring ranges

4

Digitally optimised

5

Engaging showroom

6

Strengthen the core

51

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsPrincipal risks and uncertainties continued

Competition

Risk 
category
Strategic

Change in 
risk level
Risk stayed level

Risk 
appetite 
Balanced

Risk profile 
after controls
Medium

Performance 
indicator 
Gross sales

Management 
responsibility
Executive Board

Reports 
to 
Board

Competitive marketplace and 
changes to the marketplace
The Group operates in competitive and 
fragmented markets. Failure to deliver an 
effective strategy in response to our competitors 
and changes in market conditions is a risk to the 
future success of the Group. 

Mitigation & progress during the year
The Group launched its refreshed strategy last 
year and continues to progress against the 
objectives set. See pages 14 to 19 for more 
details of our strategy in action. 

We continue to develop the product range 
offered to customers, whilst remaining focused 
on our core market. Over the year we have looked 
for opportunities to broaden our customer base, 
through the introduction of new brands, designs 
and ranges. We have also responded to 
customers looking for shorter lead times, 
through the introduction of ranges with 
significantly reduced delivery times. 

We continue to invest in our showrooms to 
provide a more inspiring experience for the 
customer, whilst continuing to promote our 
brand as a value retailer. 

We have a concept store in three locations, 
providing us with an opportunity to test and learn 
how we further improve our proposition and 
position in the market. See page 20 for more 
detail on this development.  

We encourage feedback from our customers at 
every step of the customer journey and across a 
number of platforms. The Group’s investment in 
enhancing the customer experience is reflected 
in our ‘Excellent’ Trustpilot score. We were 
delighted to be awarded five stars from our 
Trustpilot reviews and remain focused on 
maintaining these market-leading service levels.

An added functionality to our website allows 
customers to provide feedback about their 
online journey, as well as the product they have 
purchased. Feedback from customers across all 
channels and throughout the customer journey 
is reviewed in order to understand what we are 
doing well and identify areas for improvement.

Our line level margin analysis tools have allowed 
us to monitor the success of our product ranges 
and to focus on consistently managing our 
competitiveness and the profitability of  
our offering. 

Through investment in our digital platform, we 
are able to monitor customer interaction with the 
website, allowing us to establish the impact of 
factors such as dwell time and conversions and 
determine what is successful in order to improve 
the online shopping experience. We are working 
with new partners to help improve our social 
media presence, our paid-search investment and 
the search engine optimisation of our website.

We regularly carry out reviews of our marketing 
strategies to ensure we are reaching our target 
audience effectively, and we adjust our  
approach accordingly. 

We continue to obtain and develop insight into 
our customer demographics using an Experian 
dashboard, built within Microsoft Power Business 
Intelligence, which combines our customer  
data and Experian demographic data, enabling 
faster identification and reaction to trends in 
customers. Extensive research completed  
on the strength of our brand, across customer 
segments, has presented us with further 
opportunities to consider when targeting 
customers.

We monitor our market share in upholstered 
furniture, which has increased from 9.0% in 2021 
to 9.7% in 2022, similarly flooring share has 
increased from 1.6% to 1.8%.

Strategic priorities

1

Outstanding team

2

Customer driven

3

Inspiring ranges

4

Digitally optimised

5

Engaging showroom

6

Strengthen the core

52

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Regulation and compliance

Risk 
category
Strategic

Change in 
risk level
Risk stayed level

Risk 
appetite 
Low

Risk profile 
after controls
Medium

Performance 
indicator 
Prosecution and 
regulatory action

Management 
responsibility
Corporate Services 
Director

Reports 
to 
CEO

Key regulated activities
Many of the Group’s activities are subject to a 
number of compliance requirements, including 
the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA), the 
Information Commissioner’s Office (ICO) and the 
Financial Reporting Council (FRC). We are also 
subject to health and safety legislation, and other 
product-related regulation, such as fire safety. 

Failure to comply with our regulatory  
obligations could result in a financial impact  
and reputational damage.

Mitigation & progress during the year
Training programmes are in place to ensure that 
all staff are provided with relevant training for 
regulated activities, in line with their role. 
Completion of these training modules is 
reported monthly to the Executive Board.

The independent audit, risk and compliance team 
has a monitoring programme in place to ensure 
we maintain regulatory compliance across all 
areas, including data protection and  
FCA requirements. 

The Group continues to monitor any other areas 
of future guidance or regulations that may affect 
the Group’s activities and will implement any 
changes, if required. We continue to monitor the 
Department for Business, Energy & Industrial 
Strategy’s (BEIS) publications on audit, reporting 
and corporate governance reform, and prepare 
for any changes required.

The Group has relevant internal policies, 
guidelines and procedures, including our Code  
of Conduct, covering information security, 
anti-bribery and corruption, anti-money 
laundering and whistle-blowing. All our policies 
are subject to annual review and are updated  
and re-issued as required. Adherence to these 
policies form part of our compliance  
monitoring programme.

Our regional audit and health and safety teams 
carry out regular inspections at all our retail and 
distribution sites, to confirm that the required 
compliance and health and safety standards are 
being met. Results of all audits are reported to 
the Executive Board. 

Our distribution teams are given ongoing 
training, and monitoring is in place to ensure that 
the warehousing and delivery processes are 
operating to the highest safety standards. 

We have a long-established, independent, 
confidential whistle-blower hotline in place 
reporting directly to the Head of Audit, Risk & 
Compliance, who in turn reports any concerns  
to the Executive Board and the Board. Our policy 
is intended to make third parties or employees 
aware that they should report any serious 
concerns or suspicions about any wrongdoing  
or malpractice on the part of any employee of  
the Group.

Strategic priorities

1

Outstanding team

2

Customer driven

3

Inspiring ranges

4

Digitally optimised

5

Engaging showroom

6

Strengthen the core

53

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsPrincipal risks and uncertainties continued

Responsible sourcing and supply chain

Risk 
category
Infrastructure

Change in 
risk level
Risk increased

Risk 
appetite 
Low to medium

Risk profile 
after controls
Medium

Performance 
indicator 
Gross sales, customer 
feedback and delivery 
optimisation

Management 
responsibility
Commercial Director
Chief Finance Officer

Reports 
to 
CEO

We have developed strong relationships and 
credibility with credit insurers through regular 
communication and information sharing 
regarding ongoing trading performance and  
the Group’s resilience levels.
.

Supplier resilience and capacity
If a supplier were unable to meet demand or 
cease to trade, this would disrupt supply to our 
customers. The supply chain could be affected 
by availability or by an increase in the cost of raw 
materials, labour shortages and transport delays, 
which may result in a reduction in margin or lead 
to a less competitive price point.

Product quality, safety  
and ethical practices
Failure to meet product safety standards or to 
ensure that our products are sourced responsibly 
across our supply chain, could result in the loss of 
customer confidence, reputational impact and 
declining sales volume. 

Failure to reduce the environmental impact of our 
business, including those linked to our supply chain, 
could result in reputational damage, impacting the 
future performance of the Group.

Supplier credit
Failure of suppliers to obtain credit insurance 
could have a significant impact on our suppliers’ 
working capital requirements, which may have a 
material impact on the Group’s cash position and 
overall financial position.

Mitigation & progress during the year
We continue to monitor the production capacity 
and the financial stability of our suppliers, to 
ensure any concerns identified are immediately 
addressed. The Group has continued to work 
closely with our suppliers to monitor any increase 
in costs of materials, production or shipping and 
the impact this may have on our retail pricing. We 
are continually reviewing and expanding our 
supply base to reduce reliance on any key 
suppliers or any particular location.

Audits are completed on new suppliers, as part  
of our due diligence checks, to ensure quality 
management systems, ethical labour sourcing, 
health and safety processes, environmental 
stewardship and sustainability meet our 
expectations, as outlined within our  
supplier handbook. 

We expect that all suppliers are members of 
Sedex to monitor risks of modern slavery  
within our supply chain and all our suppliers  
must comply with relevant legislation and  
best practice. 

The Group works with our suppliers to ensure raw 
materials are obtained from known and traceable 
or certified sources. 

The Group has a programme to carry out regular 
independent product testing, to ensure ongoing 
compliance to current regulations. We are 
working with our suppliers to attain both Forest 
Stewardship Council® (FSC®) accreditation, which 
has already been achieved on a number of 
ranges, and the British Standard Institution  
(BSI) Kitemark.

We are a member of the Furniture Industry 
Research Association (FIRA) compliance scheme 
and achieve continued accreditation. We are also 
working with our suppliers and the Leather 
Working Group, whom we joined in 2021, to 
ensure that all leather is sourced from known, 
traceable or certified sources by July 2023. 

We continue to conduct quality checks at the 
point of inbound to our distribution centres. This 
allows us to ensure any minor quality issues are 
resolved prior to being delivered to the customer.

The Group has made significant progress on our 
ESG strategy and is committed to driving further 
change. Our TCFD reporting is set out on pages 
32 to 39.

Strategic priorities

1

Outstanding team

2

Customer driven

3

Inspiring ranges

4

Digitally optimised

5

Engaging showroom

6

Strengthen the core

54

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Business systems and Infrastructure

Risk 
category
Infrastructure

Change in 
risk level
Risk stayed level

Risk 
appetite 
Low to medium

Risk profile 
after controls
Medium

Performance 
indicator 
Number of major 
incidents
System performance

Management 
responsibility
Chief Marketing & 
Digital Officer

Reports 
to 
CEO

Cyber and information security
Failure to adequately prevent or respond to a 
cyber-attack, ransomware or data breach could 
result in business disruption, loss or corruption  
of information for our customers, which could 
adversely impact our reputation and customer 
confidence.

System availability
Failure of our IT infrastructure or key IT systems 
could result in the Group’s inability to operate 
effectively, which could result in a decline in sales 
and could adversely affect our ability to deliver 
goods to our customers.

Mitigation & progress during the year
The operation of our business-critical systems 
are subject to 24-hour system monitoring. There 
is also a contract in place for 24-hour third-party 
support for all critical systems.

A business continuity plan is in place and  
reflects our now established hybrid working 
arrangements. A disaster recovery plan is in 
place, with all operating systems being replicated 
at a secondary site. This is reviewed and  
updated annually.

All relevant software and hardware updates are 
installed when required to ensure the security  
of our data and protection of our systems is 
maximised.

We have an established third-party penetration 
testing programme in place that is carried out on 
a regular basis to monitor the Group’s resilience 
against cyber-attacks. Following external reviews 
carried out on our website and core network, 
actions have been taken to improve and 
strengthen our systems.

A monitoring programme is in place to ensure 
access to networks and systems is appropriately 
controlled and access to sensitive data is limited.
Information security and data protection policies 
are in place and training for information security 
(GDPR) is mandatory for all staff.

During the year, we engaged a third party to 
review our technology estate and created a  
road map to ensure that we invest in appropriate 
technology to support our future growth plans. 
We are now planning improvements to  
our existing systems and investment in  
new technology.

Strategic priorities

1

Outstanding team

2

Customer driven

3

Inspiring ranges

4

Digitally optimised

5

Engaging showroom

6

Strengthen the core

55

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsPrincipal risks and uncertainties continued

Our people and culture

Risk 
category
Infrastructure

Change in 
risk level
Risk stayed level

Risk 
appetite 
Low to medium

Risk profile 
after controls
Medium

Performance 
indicator 
Colleague retention
Team engagement 
surveys

Management 
responsibility
People Director

Reports 
to 
CEO

The Group is accredited with Investors in People 
status and this forms part of a wider strategy for 
‘Building and inspiring an outstanding team’.

Staff turnover has decreased 2.4% during the 
financial year when compared to 2021.

As part of the Group’s ESG strategy, we will  
be formalising a commitment to provide 
colleagues with paid volunteering days to  
work with local charities.

Team retention and capability
Failure to attract, retain and develop the right 
talent and required capabilities and to embed our 
values in our culture could impact our business 
performance and delivery of our strategy. 

Mitigation & progress during the year
The Group continues to review our terms and 
conditions of employment, including salary, 
incentives and benefit packages, to ensure they 
remain competitive across the sector. 

We regularly review and update succession  
plans for key roles within the Group. The year  
saw the Group significantly strengthening our 
leadership team with senior appointments in  
our commercial, customer experience and  
digital teams.

Development pathways have been mapped out 
for our retail and distribution teams which have 
been rolled out from August 2022.

We monitor turnover and retention rates,  
and further insight is gained through an exit 
interview process.

We carry out an annual employee survey to 
understand whether our colleagues are engaged 
and have a clear understanding of the Group’s 
culture and strategy. The feedback provided by 
our colleagues in the annual employee survey is 
used to implement change and drive 
improvements across the business.

Strategic priorities

1

Outstanding team

2

Customer driven

3

Inspiring ranges

4

Digitally optimised

5

Engaging showroom

6

Strengthen the core

56

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Brand and reputation

Risk 
category
Reputation

Change in 
risk level
Risk stayed level

Risk 
appetite 
Low to medium

Risk profile 
after controls
Low

Performance 
indicator 
Trustpilot
Negative press

Management 
responsibility
Corporate Services 
Director

Reports 
to 
CEO

Brand and reputation
Failure to protect our brand could result in a loss 
of confidence by customers, colleagues and 
other key stakeholders.

Our brand reputation may be damaged if we are 
unable to demonstrate our commitment to 
addressing our ESG obligations.

Mitigation & progress during the year
The Group’s policies, procedures and Code  
of Conduct set out the expectations  
and behaviours that we expect from all  
our colleagues.

We encourage feedback from our customers at 
every step of the customer journey and across a 
number of platforms. Our ‘Excellent’ Trustpilot 
score continues to recognise our ability to 
provide an excellent customer experience, with 
our TrustScore remaining high at 4.8 out of 5. We 
have added functionality to our website allowing 
us to have oversight of our customers’ opinions 
on our products, so we can ensure that we are 
meeting their expectations. We continue to 
monitor our customers’ reviews to identify areas 
for improvement. 

The Group has a programme to carry out regular 
independent product testing, to ensure ongoing 
compliance to current regulations. 

Product performance is monitored by our 
commercial and customer service teams and 
regular meetings are held with suppliers to 
identify areas of improvement with agreed 
actions that are followed through to completion.

During the year, members of the customer 
experience team have worked with the Furniture 
and Home Improvement Ombudsman to 
undertake City & Guilds accredited training to 
develop and improve the standard of service we 
offer. As of October 2022 we are full members of 
the Furniture Ombudsmen meaning any disputes 
can be handled effectively. 

We continue to review colleague engagement 
and feedback through completion of staff 
surveys, to identify areas of improvement  
within the business.

Our qualified technicians continue to complete 
quality checks at the point of inbound to our 
distribution centres. This allows us to ensure any 
minor quality issues are resolved prior to being 
delivered to the customer.

Our audit, risk and compliance teams monitor 
standards throughout the business ensuring  
that any risk to the reputation of the ScS brand  
is identified along with agreement of  
corrective actions.

Strategic priorities

1

Outstanding team

2

Customer driven

3

Inspiring ranges

4

Digitally optimised

5

Engaging showroom

6

Strengthen the core

57

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsPrincipal risks and uncertainties continued

Key trading periods

Risk 
category
Strategic

Change in 
risk level
Risk stayed level

Risk 
appetite 
Balanced

Risk profile 
after controls
Medium

Performance 
indicator 
Sales performance

Management 
responsibility
Executive Board

Reports 
to 
CEO

Our recent experience with the COVID-19 
pandemic demonstrated that although sales 
were impacted during periods of lockdown, once 
stores re-opened we saw a significant increase 
due to pent up demand. 

We will monitor the impact of the cost of living 
crisis on our key trading periods over the coming 
year and appropriate action will be taken in 
response if necessary.

Key trading periods 
Furniture retailing has historically relied on 
certain key trading days and periods. Extreme 
weather conditions or showroom closures, due 
to unexpected events, may reduce footfall in our 
showrooms over these key periods, resulting in 
reduced sales and potentially adverse effects  
on profitability. 

Our key trading periods could be impacted by the 
cost of living crisis, leading to a decline in sales 
and reducing profitability.

Mitigation & progress during the year
Our flexible approach to marketing has enabled 
us to react quickly to changes in the marketplace. 
We continually review our marketing strategies, 
ensuring our investment into relevant advertising 
channels maximises our opportunity to reach  
our customers.

We have developed an econometric model  
which uses our customer data to establish  
the most appropriate investment in our 
marketing channels.

Our website, telesales service and video 
appointments have been developed further and 
offer customers an opportunity to purchase 
goods without having to visit a showroom. 

We have invested in our digital platform to 
improve the online shopping experience for the 
customer, allowing us to continue to trade 
successfully throughout any impact of adverse 
periods of weather or showroom closures. 

Strategic priorities

1

Outstanding team

2

Customer driven

3

Inspiring ranges

4

Digitally optimised

5

Engaging showroom

6

Strengthen the core

58

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022 
S
t
r
a
t
e
g

i
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

|

C
o
r
p
o
r
a
t
e
g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

|

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

5959

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Variable or discretionary 
total Group costs

Undrawn committed 
revolving credit facility

Cash balance as at  
30 July 2022

74%

£12.0m

£70.8m

Group financial position
The Group remains in a strong financial 
position at the year end with cash of 
£70.8m, no financial debt and access to a 
revolving credit facility of £12.0m which 
remains undrawn.

The Board are satisfied with the resilience  
of our business model and ability to  
leverage this to achieve sustainable 
long-term growth.

Viability statement

The UK Corporate Governance Code requires the Group 
to issue a ‘viability statement’ declaring whether we believe 
the Group can continue to operate and meet its liabilities, 
taking into account its current position and principal risks  
in the medium to longer term.

Due to the inherent pace of change in the 
retail environment, and the wider economy, 
the Group tends to ensure focus on delivery 
of short to medium-term goals. The 
strategy and associated principal risks 
underpin the Group’s three-year strategic 
planning process (‘the Strategic Plan’), 
which is updated annually. This process 
takes into account the current and 
prospective macro-economic conditions in 
the UK and the competitive tension that 
exists within the markets in which we trade. 
The period of three years, set out within the 
Strategic Plan, is considered appropriate for 
business planning and measuring 
performance given it aligns with the 
payback requirements of any significant 
capital investment (new stores).

As part of assessing the Group’s financial 
performance against the Strategic Plan, 
sensitivity analysis of the main assumptions 
underlying the plan is also carried out. The 
plans are approved by the Directors and 
financial budgets and KPIs are subsequently 
used to monitor performance during the 
year. Reflecting the pace of change of the 
environment the Group operates in, 
management regularly updates its  
financial forecast, which is reviewed  
at each Board meeting.

60

Whilst assessing the Group’s future 
prospects the following was considered:

Economic environment
Uncertainty remains over the macro-
economic risks brought about by 
inflationary cost pressures which include 
changing customer behaviours and a 
reduction in consumer confidence. 

Our strategic progress
The Group has a detailed and specific 
strategy, and is reliant on delivering this to 
achieve its forecasts. We have made good 
progress in the first full year of the strategy, 
and are confident that the execution of the 
next phase will provide opportunities to take 
market share.

Supplier resilience and capacity
If a supplier were unable to meet demand, or 
cease to trade, this would disrupt supply to 
our customers. We continue to maintain 
good relationships to allow us to closely 
monitor their financial stability and 
production capacities. 

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Links to principal risks

Economic environment

Competition

Responsible sourcing and  
supply chain

Economic environment

Competition

Responsible sourcing and  
supply chain

Economic environment

Competition

Responsible sourcing and  
supply chain

Scenarios modelled

Scenario 1: Economic downturn resulting in a decrease in revenue whilst 
maintaining gross margin 
A challenging economic environment results in a loss of consumer 
confidence, reducing customers discretionary spend and causing a decline in 
sales volume. It is assumed that the gross margin remains consistent with the 
base case scenario and that the decrease in sales volume will be partially 
offset through management of our flexible cost base.
Assumptions
Sales: Reduction in volume for a period of 36 months.
Gross margin: Remains in-line with the base case scenario for a period of 
36 months.

Scenario 2:Economic downturn resulting in a decrease in gross margin 
with a compounding annual increase in fuel and utility costs
A challenging economic environment has resulted in an increase in both 
product costs and costs of providing credit to our customers. The Group is 
unable to pass on increases in full and, when combined with rises in fuel and 
energy costs which compound year on year, this results in reduced 
performance over the 36 month period being assessed.
Assumptions
Sales: Remain in-line with the base case for a period of 36 months.
Gross margin: Decreases for a period of 36 months to levels lower than 
seen historically.

Scenario 3: Severe economic downturn and the withdrawal of supplier 
credit insurance
A severe downturn in economic conditions resulting in both a reduction in 
revenue and gross margin, together with the assumption that our suppliers 
have the credit insurance they use to support their payment terms with the 
Group withdrawn, seeing our suppliers request earlier payment dates to 
alleviate their working capital challenges.
Assumptions
Sales: Severe reductions for a period of 24 months with a partial recovery in 
the final 12 months.
Gross margin: Significant reduction for 24 months remaining flat 
thereafter.
Working capital: Cash required to pay suppliers in advance of delivery of 
product (and therefore in advance of receipt of final balances from 
customers).

*  This report includes alternative performance measures (APMs) which are defined and reconciled to IFRS information, where 

applicable, on pages 46 to 47.

Assessment of viability
The Strategic Plan is stress tested for 
severe but plausible scenarios and the 
effectiveness of any mitigating actions that 
would reasonably be taken. Macro-
economic indicators such as price inflation, 
increased fuel and energy prices and 
interest rate increases have led to a 
downturn in consumer confidence which 
may present challenges for the Group as 
our customers reduce discretionary spend. 
Our finance providers become more 
expensive due to increases in interest rates 
and our supplier’s credit insurance, which 
they use to support their current payment 
terms, may be adjusted or withdrawn, 
accelerating the timing of cash payments. 
The Strategic Plan was therefore specifically 
stress tested against the key risks identified, 
with attention to the principal risks and 
uncertainties highlighted on pages 50 to 59. 
The scenarios ran are shown opposite.

Due to the significant cash reserves held, 
and the flexible cost structure of the Group, 
the outcome of this stress testing satisfied 
the Directors with respect to the ongoing 
liquidity and solvency of the Group over the 
three-year period under review. 74% of total 
Group costs are either variable or 
discretionary and as such, even in difficult 
trading conditions, these costs would also 
reduce. These reductions, together with 
relevant mitigating actions and significant 
cash reserves, would ensure the Group 
could continue to meet its liabilities. 

Further to the scenarios modelled, the 
Directors are comfortable that the work 
done to minimise the risk to the supply 
chain, chiefly ensuring the use of a variety of 
suppliers, and the ability of multiple 

factories to produce similar product ranges, 
would be sufficient to limit the Group’s 
reliance on a single supplier.

The Strategic Plan makes certain 
assumptions about the normal level of 
capital recycling likely to occur and, 
therefore considers whether additional 
financing will be required. The Group 
continues to hold a significant cash balance 
and an undrawn £12.0m committed 
revolving credit facility. The facility was 
extended in October 2022 and has a term of 
36 months. This facility has never been 
utilised and the modelling indicated it would 
not be required. The Strategic Plan also 
encompasses the projected cash flows and 
headroom against financial covenants 
under the Group’s facility.

Conclusion
Based upon this assessment, the Directors 
have a reasonable expectation that the 
Group will be able to continue to operate 
and meet its liabilities as they fall due over 
the period to 26 July 2025. In making this 
statement, the Directors have considered 
the resilience of the Group, taking into 
account its current position and the 
principal risks facing the business.

This Strategic report, which has been 
prepared in accordance with the requirements 
of the Companies Act 2006, has been 
approved and signed on behalf of the Board.

Steve Carson
Chief Executive Officer
10 October 2022

S
t
r
a
t
e
g

i
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

|

C
o
r
p
o
r
a
t
e
g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

|

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

6161

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Board of Directors

Strength in 
leadership

1

2

Committee membership key
A   Audit Committee Chair
A   Audit Committee member
R   Remuneration Committee Chair

R   Remuneration Committee member
N   Nomination Committee Chair
N   Nomination Committee member

4

6

5

3

62

ScS Group plc Annual Report 20221   Chris Muir 
Chief Financial Officer

Date of appointment: 4 April 2016

Committee membership

Biography

Chris joined ScS as Chief Financial Officer in April 2016. He is a chartered 
accountant, qualifying in 1999 whilst working at Deloitte. In 2003, he joined 
Northgate plc, Europe’s leading specialist in light commercial vehicle hire, as the 
Group Accountant and held a number of senior UK and group roles, including UK 
Finance Director and acting Group CEO in the summer of 2014. Prior to joining ScS 
he was Group Finance Director of Northgate. 

2   Carol Kavanagh
Non-Executive Director

Date of appointment: 26 September 2022

Committee membership

A   R   N

Biography

3   Alan Smith 
Non-Executive Chairman

Date of appointment: 22 October 2014

Committee membership

R   N

Biography

Carol joined the Board in September 2022 as a Non-Executive Director and is a 
member of the Audit Committee, the Remuneration Committee and the 
Nomination Committee. She is also the Remuneration Committee Chair of 
Speedy Hire plc and an independent Remuneration Committee member for 
British Swimming. Carol has over 20 years of experience working in senior public 
company human resource roles across construction and retail sectors, including 
as Group HR Director for Travis Perkins Plc from 2007 to 2020.

Alan is an experienced Chair and former CEO having held a number of roles for 
retail companies across the private equity and quoted sector previously, including 
Chairman and CEO of Robert Dyas, CEO of Somerfield, CEO of Evans Halshaw plc 
and Managing Director of B&Q. 

Key strengths

Key strengths

Key strengths

Chris has broad financial experience and his strategic and leadership strengths are 
a valuable asset to the Group as we deliver on our strategic priorities.

Carol has extensive retail and board experience. She brings with her a wealth of 
knowledge gained through previous HR roles and current Remuneration 
Committee positions which will be of great value to the Group.

Alan has significant board, retail and financial experience gained across a number 
of business sectors. As Chair, he has a deep understanding of governance and 
what is required to lead an effective Board.

External appointments

External appointments

External appointments

•  Remuneration Committee Chair of Speedy Hire PLC
• 

Independent Remuneration Committee member for British Swimming

•  Director of The Navy, Army and Air Force Institutes
•  Chair of The Royal Air Force Charitable Trust Enterprises
•  Director of Scampton Airshow Limited

i

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

|

C
o
r
p
o
r
a
t
e
g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

|

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

4   Steve Carson 
Chief Executive Officer

Date of appointment: 6 January 2021

Committee membership

Biography

Steve brings deep knowledge and experience in retail and leadership after an 
extensive career in the sector, most recently as Group Managing Director of 
Holland & Barrett. Prior to this, Steve held a number of roles at Home Retail Group 
plc (HRG), which owned a number of well-known brands such as Argos, Homebase 
and Habitat. Steve latterly served as Director of Retail and Customer Operations 
and a Board member from 2014-2018, during which time HRG was acquired by 
Sainsbury’s plc, where Steve had also begun his career.

5   Angela Luger 
Non-Executive Director

Date of appointment: 16 May 2019

Committee membership

A   R   N

Biography

6   Ron McMillan 
Non-Executive Director

Date of appointment: 22 October 2014

Committee membership

A   R   N

Biography

Angela began her career in marketing with Cadbury’s, Coca Cola and Mars, prior  
to moving into retail. She spent 10 years at Asda, holding a variety of positions 
including Trading Director and Global Managing Director for George. She was  
MD of Debenhams, CEO of The Original Factory Shop and most recently was  
the CEO of N Brown Group plc, where she led the business through a significant 
digital transformation.

Ron is the Chairman of N Brown Group PLC and the Senior Independent Director 
and Audit Committee Chair of B&M European Value Retail S.A. He is also a 
Non-Executive Director and Audit Committee Chair of Homeserve PLC. 
Previously, Ron worked in PwC’s assurance business for 38 years and has deep 
knowledge and experience of auditing, financial reporting issues and governance. 
As the Northern Regional Chairman of PwC in the UK and Deputy Chairman of 
PwC in the Middle East, he acted as engagement leader to a number of major listed 
companies, including many in the retail sector.

Key strengths

Key strengths

Key strengths

Steve is a strong business leader with excellent commercial, marketing and retail 
experience. He has experience in strategy implementation and developing digital 
revenue streams. 

Angela has significant experience in marketing, e-commerce and retail, including 
leveraging technology to optimise a value retail offering. As Chair of the 
Remuneration Committee, she is responsible for setting and implementing the 
remuneration policy.

Ron brings a wide range of experience and skills including finance, risk 
management and governance through holding a variety of executive and 
non-executive roles. As Chair of the Audit Committee, he is responsible for 
leading the Committee to ensure effective internal controls and risk management 
systems are in place across the Group.

External appointments

•  Director of Marie Curie
•  Director of CJC HR Consultancy Ltd

External appointments

External appointments

•  Non-Executive Director of Portmerion Group plc
•  Chair of The Paint Shed Holdings Limited
•  Non-Executive Director of New Look Retailers Limited
•  Non-Executive Director of The Hiring Hub Holdings Limited
•  Director of Majelan Limited

•  Chairman of N Brown Group plc
•  Audit Committee Chair and Senior Independent Director of B&M European 

Value Retail S.A.

•  Audit Committee Chair of Homeserve plc

63

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Corporate governance statement

Introduction  
from the Chair

I am pleased to present the Corporate governance 
statement for the year ended 30 July 2022. The 
report sets out our governance framework, the 
Board’s activity during the year, our approach to 
the alignment of purpose, values, culture and 
strategy and our engagement with stakeholders.

My role as Chair is to maintain high 
standards of corporate governance and our 
compliance with the 2018 UK Corporate 
Governance Code (‘the Code’) is set out on 
pages 65 to 67.

The Board’s focus during the year has been 
to monitor the progress in the first year of 
our refreshed strategy whilst navigating 
supply chain and shipping challenges. The 
Board maintained active engagement with 
our various stakeholders to ensure that we 
understand their interests and take them 
into account when making decisions on 
behalf of the Group, in line with section 
172(1) of the Companies Act 2006. The 
Group’s Section 172 statement is presented 
on pages 40 to 41.

decision making and activities reflect our 
core purpose, stakeholder views and 
promote the long-term success of the 
Group. The Board is committed to leading 
by example and creating an open and 
honest culture. During the year an external 
evaluation of the Board, it’s Committees 
and Directors was conducted. The 
outcomes of this were well received and the 
findings provide a clear agenda for us to 
continue to improve as a Board. Further 
detail on the review is provided on page 74.

We will be holding our Annual General 
Meeting (AGM) on 25 November 2022 and I 
will be available to answer any questions you 
may have on this report.

As a Board we are responsible for ensuring 
that the Group is purpose-led and our 

64

Alan Smith
Chair
10 October 2022

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Compliance with the UK Corporate Governance Code
The Board is committed to high standards of corporate governance and is responsible for ensuring the Group’s compliance with the requirements of the 2018 UK Corporate Governance Code, a 
copy of the Code is available on the FRC’s website: www.frc.org.uk. The Board believes that throughout FY22, the Group has complied with all the Code’s provisions, with the exception of provision 
24, as for part of the year the Audit Committee had less than the minimum membership of three due to the passing of George Adams.

The following pages provide a high-level overview of how the Board applies the Principles of the Code.

Board leadership and company purpose

Principle A
A successful company is led by an 
effective and entrepreneurial Board, 
whose role is to promote the long-term 
sustainable success of the company, 
generating value for shareholders and 
contributing to wider society.

Principle B
The Board should establish the company’s 
purpose, values and strategy, and satisfy 
itself that these and its culture are aligned. 
All directors must act with integrity, lead by 
example and promote the desired culture.

Principle C
The Board should ensure that the 
necessary resources are in place for the 
company to meet its objectives and 
measure performance against them. The 
Board should also establish a framework of 
prudent and effective controls, which 
enable risk to be assessed and managed.

Principle D
In order for the company to meet its 
responsibilities to shareholders and 
stakeholders, the Board should ensure 
effective engagement with, and 
encourage participation from,  
these parties.

•  Strategic report pages 1 to 61
•  Board leadership and company purpose 

pages 68 to 69

•  Strategic report pages 1 to 61
•  Board leadership and company purpose 

pages 68 to 69

•  Division of responsibilities  

pages 71 to 72

•  Section 172 statement pages  

40 to 41

•  Principal risks and uncertainties  

pages 50 to 59

•  Audit Committee report  

pages 77 to 83

•  Responsible business 22 to 31
•  Section 172 statement  

pages 40 to 41

Board leadership and company purpose continued
Principle E
The Board should ensure that workforce 
policies and practices are consistent with 
the company’s values and support its 
long-term sustainable success. The 
workforce should be able to raise any 
matters of concern.

•  Responsible business 22 to 31 
•  Section 172 statement  

pages 40 to 41

•  Board leadership and company  

purpose pages 68 to 69

•  Board leadership and company purpose 

pages 68 to 69

•  Division of responsibilities  

pages 71 to 72

•  Board of Directors page 63
•  Division of responsibilities  

pages 71 to 72

Division of responsibilities 

Principle F
The Chair leads the Board and is 
responsible for its overall effectiveness in 
directing the company. They should 
demonstrate objective judgement 
throughout their tenure and promote a 
culture of openness and debate. In 
addition, the Chair facilitates constructive 
Board relations and the effective 
contribution of all non-executive directors, 
and ensures that direct or receive 
accurate, timely and clear information.

Principle G
The Board should include an appropriate 
combination of executive and non-
executive (and, in particular, independent 
non-executive) directors, such that no one 
individual or small group of individuals 
dominates the Board’s decision-making. 
There should be a clear division of 
responsibilities between the leadership of 
the Board and the executive leadership of 
the company’s business.

65

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsCorporate governance statement continued

Division of responsibilities continued
Principle H
Non-executive directors should have 
sufficient time to meet their Board 
responsibilities. They should provide 
constructive challenge, strategic 
guidance, offer specialist advice and  
hold management to account.

Principle I
The Board, supported by the company 
secretary, should ensure that it has the 
policies, processes, information, time and 
resources it needs in order to function 
effectively and efficiently.

Composition, succession and evaluation

Principle J
Appointments to the Board should be 
subject to a formal, rigorous and 
transparent procedure, and an effective 
succession plan should be maintained for 
Board and senior management. Both 
appointments and succession plans 
should be based on merit and objective 
criteria and, within this context, should 
promote diversity of gender, social and 
ethnic backgrounds, cognitive and 
personal strengths.

Principle K
The Board and its committees should 
have a combination of skills, experience 
and knowledge. Consideration should  
be given to the length of service of the 
Board as a whole and membership 
regularly refreshed.

•  Board leadership and company purpose 

pages 68 to 69

•  Division of responsibilities  

pages 71 to 72

•  Audit Committee report  

pages 77 to 83

•  Board leadership and company purpose 

pages 68 to 69

•  Division of responsibilities  

pages 71 to 72

•  Nomination Committee report  

pages 75 to 76

•  Composition, succession and evaluation 

pages 73 to 74

•  Board of Directors page 63

66

Composition, succession and evaluation continued
Principle L
Annual evaluation of the Board should 
consider its composition, diversity and 
how effectively members work together 
to achieve objectives. Individual evaluation 
should demonstrate whether each 
director continues to contribute 
effectively.

•  Nomination Committee report  

•  Composition, succession and evaluation 

pages 75 to 76

pages 73 to 74

Audit, risk and internal control

Principle M
The Board should establish formal and 
transparent policies and procedures to 
ensure the independence and 
effectiveness of internal and external audit 
functions and satisfy itself on the integrity 
of financial and narrative statements.

Principle N
The Board should present a fair, balanced 
and understandable assessment of the 
company’s position and prospects.

Principle O
The Board should establish procedures to 
manage risk, oversee the internal control 
framework, and determine the nature and 
extent of the principal risks the company is 
willing to take in order to achieve its 
long-term strategic objectives.

•  Audit Committee report  

pages 77 to 83

•  Strategic report pages 1 to 61
•  Audit Committee report  

pages 77 to 83

•  Financial statements pages 103 to 136

•  Principal risks and uncertainties  

pages 50 to 59

•  Viability statement page 60 to 61
•  Audit Committee report  

pages 77 to 83

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Remuneration

Principle P
Remuneration policies and practices 
should be designed to support strategy 
and promote long-term sustainable 
success. Executive remuneration should 
be aligned to company purpose and 
values, and be clearly linked to the 
successful delivery of the company’s 
long-term strategy.

Principle Q
A formal and transparent procedure for 
developing policy on executive 
remuneration and determining director 
and senior management remuneration 
should be established. No director should 
be involved in deciding their own 
remuneration outcome.

Principle R
Directors should exercise independent 
judgement and discretion when 
authorising remuneration outcomes, 
taking account of company and individual 
performance, and wider circumstances.

•  Strategic report pages 1 to 61
•  Board leadership and company purpose 

pages 68 to 69

•  Directors’ remuneration report  

pages 84 to 97

•  Directors’ remuneration report  

pages 84 to 97

•  Directors’ remuneration report  

pages 84 to 97

i

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

|

C
o
r
p
o
r
a
t
e
g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

|

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

67

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
•  Continued prioritisation of colleague 

•  Reviewed reports on the Group’s key 

Governance and legal
•  Received and reviewed updates on 

corporate governance developments;

•  Reviewed the matters reserved for  

the Board and the terms of reference  
of its Committees;

•  Conducted an external evaluation of  

the Board’s effectiveness and reviewed 
the outcome;

stakeholders and reviewed engagement 
mechanisms; and

•  Appointed the Group’s professional 

advisors.

How the Board supports strategy
The Board spent time throughout the year 
reviewing the progress in year one of the 
refreshed strategy. This included six 
strategy-specific meetings which included 
in-depth assessments of specific strategic 
pillars and evaluations of progress.

Corporate governance statement continued

Board leadership and company purpose

Role of the Board
The Group is led and controlled by the Board 
which is collectively responsible for the 
long-term sustainable success of the 
Group, generating value for shareholders 
and contributing to wider society. The Board 
establishes the Group’s purpose, values and 
strategy and satisfies itself that these are 
aligned with its culture. 

Board activity in the year
The following summarises some of the 
Board’s key activities over the past year:

Strategy
•  Reviewed the Group’s performance 

against its strategic priorities;

•  Evaluated and approved targets for 
both financial and non-financial 
measures, including the Group’s 
environmental impact, to ensure 
alignment with strategic aims; and

•  Considered economic, social, 

environmental and regulatory issues 
and any other relevant external matters 
that may influence or affect the Group’s 
achievement of its objectives.

 Further information on the Group’s 
strategy can be found on pages 1-61.

Performance and monitoring
•  Received regular updates from the 

Executive Board on trading 
performance and progress on strategy;

•  Monitored the Group’s performance 

against its targets and KPIs; 

•  Defining clear environmental, social and 

governance (ESG) objectives;

68

•  Approved the 2021 Annual Report  

and the 2022 Interim Results;
•  Approved the dividend policy  

and declaration;

•  Reviewed and confirmed the  

Group’s Viability statement and  
going concern status;

Leadership, stakeholders and culture
•  Commenced and concluded the 

recruitment process for three new 
Non-Executive Directors;
•  Reviewed the succession plan  
for Directors and the senior 
management team;

•  Reviewed and approved the Group’s 

•  Reviewed recruitment and how diversity 

FY23 budget; and 

•  Assessed capital allocations and  

capital expenditure in respect of the 
Group’s strategy.

 Further information can be found in the 
Audit Committee report on pages 77 to 83.

Risk management and internal control
•  Carried out a robust assessment of  

the principal and emerging risks facing 
the Group; 

could be improved;

health and wellbeing;

•  Undertook carbon literacy training;
•  Received and reviewed updates on  

ESG activity; 

•  Reviewed the annual employee  

survey results;

•  Reviewed wider workforce 

remuneration and related policies and 
the alignment of incentives and rewards 
with culture; and

•  Reviewed and approved the risk 

•  Held discussion groups with colleagues 

across the business.

 Further information on succession 
planning can be found on page 76.

 Further information on stakeholder 
engagement can be found on page 69.

appetite statement;

•  Reviewed the effectiveness of the risk 
management and internal controls 
during the year; and 

•  Received updates on climate-related 

risks and opportunities. 

While the Board has ultimate responsibility 
for the Group’s risk management and 
internal control systems, monitoring  
of these systems is delegated to the  
Audit Committee. 

 Further information can be found in the 
Audit Committee report on pages 77 to 83.

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Values, culture and purpose
The Group’s purpose is ‘Helping create the 
home you love’ and this is underpinned by 
our values of being a responsive, inclusive, 
‘getting it right’, hard working and trusted 
retailer of sofas and carpets. Our values and 
purpose reflect how the Group operates 
culturally as a business and how we engage 
with our stakeholders.

The Board recognises the importance of 
ensuring a healthy and supportive culture 
within the Group. The Board monitors 
culture and values in a number of ways, 
including undertaking an annual survey of  
all employees, reviewing feedback through 
Director discussion groups, as well as 
reviewing feedback provided by our 
customers through forums such as 
Trustpilot and Google My Business. There 
are formal policies in place in relation to 
anti-bribery and corruption and an 
independent whistle-blowing helpline 
allowing any member of staff to report any 
suspected malpractice or wrongdoing. 

We also have a dedicated, free to use 
employee assistance programme,  
where employees can gain access to  
help and support on a whole range of 
personal issues including mental health  
and financial worries. 

During the year there was an increased 
focus for the Board on ESG considerations. 
The Board recognise the importance of this 
area and are committed to operate as a 
responsible and sustainable business. For 
the next financial year, ESG-related targets 
have been incorporated into both the 
executive and senior management  
bonus schemes. 

 For more information on this see the 
Directors’ remuneration report page 90. 

Carbon literacy training was undertaken by 
the Board to understand the impact of its 
decisions on climate change. The Board will 
continue to monitor progress in this area 
and integrate the ESG strategy throughout 
the business.

Stakeholder engagement
The Board appreciates the importance of 
engaging with the Group’s stakeholders and 
having regard to their interests in its 
decision-making process. The importance 
and influence of stakeholder groups differs 
depending on the matter being discussed. It 
is possible for stakeholder interests to 
conflict and when this happens, the Board 
uses its judgement to reach a final decision. 

The Board is advised of stakeholder views in 
a number of different ways:
•  Presentations on strategic progress;
•  Presentations from external advisors 

and internal experts;
•  Annual employee survey;
•  Colleague discussion forums;
•  Visits to the Group’s showrooms and 

distribution centres; and

•  The AGM.

Detailed below are some examples  
of matters discussed during the year  
and how the Board considered our 
stakeholder groups.

“I was delighted to have recently visited 
our Coventry and Gateshead concept 
stores. The refreshed, modern interior and 
features being trialled are very impressive 
and a credit to our colleagues hard work. 
The visits provided me with the 
opportunity to engage with our retail 
colleagues, listen to their thoughts on the 
concept stores and discuss the initial 
feedback from customers. I look forward 
to the launch of more concept stores and 
assessing the performance of the 
initiatives being trialled.”

Angela Luger
Remuneration Committee Chair

Matter discussed

Stakeholders considered

Discussions held

Outcome of discussions

Agreeing ESG targets

Environment, colleagues, suppliers,  
customers, communities, shareholders

Consideration was given to:
•  Expectations of our stakeholders
•  Emerging regulation and 

An ESG steering group was 
established and a number of ESG 
targets were defined 

Approving a share buyback

Colleagues, shareholders

Standardising arrangements  
with suppliers

Suppliers, customers, shareholders, 
environment

government policy 

•  The impact of our operations on  

the environment

•  Our brand and reputation

Consideration was given to:
•  Expectations of our shareholders
•  Strength of the Company

Consideration was given to:
•  Expectations of our stakeholders
•  The impact of our operations on  

the environment

•  Our brand and reputation

A £7m share buyback programme 
was approved

A new supplier handbook, new terms 
and conditions and a new service 
level agreement were all 
implemented to create a consistent 
approach and to drive quality

69

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsCorporate governance statement continued

Shareholder relations
The Board recognises that good 
communication is key to maintaining 
shareholder relations, and as such we will 
endeavour to explain our actions and 
financial results on a regular basis and to 
respond to investor inquiries and feedback.

The CEO and CFO hold regular meetings 
and calls with institutional and retail 
investors and analysts in order to provide 
the best quality information to the market. 
All shareholders also have access to the 
Chair and the other Directors, who are 
available to discuss any questions which 
they may have in relation to the running of 
the Group.

In addition, the Group will communicate 
with its shareholders through the AGM, at 
which the Chair will give an account of the 
progress of the business over the past year 

and will provide the opportunity for 
shareholders to raise questions with the 
Chair and the Chairs of each of the 
Committees of the Board.

At each of the six scheduled Board 
meetings throughout the year, the Board 
receives a report which includes an analysis 
of the Company’s shareholder register. 
Following the Interim and Preliminary 
Results presentations feedback is actively 
sought for discussion by the Board.  
Such feedback gives the Board an  
insight into what is important to the  
Group’s shareholders.

The Group also runs a corporate website at 
scsplc.co.uk, which is regularly updated with 
our releases to the market and other 
information and which includes a copy of 
this Annual Report.

70

Whistle-blowing
All employees are able to access a 
confidential helpline operated by Safecall 
should they want to report any wrongdoing 
anonymously. All reports are formally 
investigated by the Head of Audit, Risk and 
Compliance with support from relevant 
functions. Incidents and their outcomes are 
reported to the Board. A number of calls 
were made to the external hotline during 
the year, which are reported to the Head of 
Audit, Risk and Compliance in the first 
instance, following which management 
action was taken where appropriate. No 
issues were raised that required any direct 
action from the Board.

Conflicts of interest
There are no potential conflicts of interest 
between any of the Directors or senior 
management within the Group and their 
private interests.

There is an established process of the Board 
for regularly reviewing actual or potential 
conflicts of interest. In particular, there is a 
process for reviewing transactions 
proposed to be entered into by related 
parties of Directors with any entities in the 
Group. This includes professional advice 
and consideration of it by the Board and the 
Group’s corporate brokers on the 
application of the Listing Rules, the 
applicability and the appropriateness of any 
exemptions in respect of any transactions in 
the ordinary course of business and 
reporting to general meetings of 
shareholders under England and Wales 
Company Law. This process also includes 
consideration of the extent to which the 
Board may require external and any other 
reports and evaluations to be presented to 
it on any proposed transactions.

Executive/Non-Executive

  Chairman (1)

  Chief Executive (1)

  Chief Financial Officer (1)

  Non-Executives (3)

Board tenure

  0-5 years (3)

  5-15 years (3)

  15+ years (0):

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Division of responsibilities

Group Board
The Board is responsible for the overall 
leadership of the Group and setting its 
objectives and standards. All Directors act 
with integrity and understand the 
importance of leading by example to 
promote the desired culture throughout the 
organisation. It is the Board’s responsibility 
to ensure that the Group has the necessary 
resources to meet its objectives and 
measure performance against them. The 
Board also establishes effective internal 
control procedures which enable risk to be 
assessed and managed. The formal list of 
matters reserved for the Board can be 
found at scsplc.co.uk. 

Committees
The Board has delegated authority to a 
number of Committees to assist with and 
supervise specific matters. The key 
responsibilities of each Committee is 
outlined on the following page. The terms of 
reference of each of the Board’s 
Committees are available on our website, 
scsplc.co.uk. 

Detailed implementation of matters 
approved by the Board and Committees, 
and operational day-to-day matters, are 
delegated to the Executive Directors. The 
Executive Directors are also supported by 
an experienced and able senior 
management team. All Directors have 
access to the Company Secretary, whose 
appointment and removal is one of the 
matters reserved for the Board.

Chair

Chief Executive Officer

Senior Independent Director

Responsible for leading the Board, setting its agenda and 
overseeing its effectiveness in directing the Group

Responsible for the day-to day management of the Group  Leads the assessment of the  

Responsible for directing and focusing the Group, ensuring 
there is a clear strategy and business model

Reviews and devises the Group strategy for discussion and 
approval by the Board

Chair’s performance

Acts as a sounding Board for the  
Chair and a trusted intermediary for 
other Directors

Leads the succession process for the 
role of Chair

Ensures Directors receive accurate, timely and  
clear information

Facilitates the effective contribution of the Non-Executive 
Directors, promoting a culture of openness and creating a 
forum for constructive challenge

Responsible for implementing Board decisions

Leads by example and creates a culture centred around 
the Group’s values

Available to shareholders to resolve 
significant issues should they arise

Responsible for fostering good relationships between 
Executive and Non-Executive Directors

Responsible for ensuring effective communication with 
shareholders and other key stakeholders

Key roles
The positions of Chair and CEO are held by 
different individuals. There is a clear division 
of roles and responsibilities between the 
Chair and the CEO and no individual has 
unrestricted powers of decision making. 
Effective communication between 
Directors is vital for the long-term success 
of the Group with all Directors bringing their 
own views to the table and each providing 
constructive challenge to ensure decision 
making is informed.

Time commitment 
As part of the recruitment process the 
expected time commitment is discussed 
with both Non-Executive Directors and 
Executive Directors. 

The time commitments of the new 
Non-Executive Director’s, Carol Kavanagh, 
who joined the Board on 26 September 
2022, together with Andy Kemp and John 
Walden who are due to start with the Group 
in February 2023 and March 2023 
respectively, have been evaluated and the 
Board is satisfied that they have sufficient 

time for their roles. Subsequent external 
appointments for all Directors would not  
be undertaken without prior approval of  
the Board.

At the time of writing, where Directors have 
external appointments, the Board is 
satisfied that they do not impact on the 
time they need to devote to the Group.

Board administration
The Board held twelve scheduled meetings 
during the year which included six meetings 
dedicated to reviewing strategic progress. 
During the year the Board also met on a 
number of other occasions, as 
circumstances required. There is a rolling 
programme of Board meetings throughout 
the year and there are twelve Board 
meetings scheduled for FY23, six of which 
will also be dedicated to reviewing strategic 
progress. Meetings of the Board are usually 
held at the Group’s head office or local  
to a showroom, to afford the Board, 
particularly the Non-Executive  
Directors, the opportunity to meet  
with local management.

All Board and Committee members receive 
sets of Board packs in advance of the Board 
and Committee meetings. For scheduled 
Board meetings this includes updates on 
strategy, current trading, stakeholder KPIs, 
management accounts and detailed papers 
on other matters where Board approval  
is required. 

At each Board meeting, the Executive 
Directors discuss the reports included in 
the Board packs in more detail with the 
Board. In addition, members of the 
Executive Board are often invited to present 
to the Board to inform Directors of issues of 
importance affecting the Group. This not 
only allows the Board to maintain an 
awareness of the Group’s activities but also 
allows Directors to assess the ability of the 
senior management team. For Board 
meetings which are held as circumstances 
require, the Board packs reflect the agenda 
of the meeting.

71

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsCorporate governance statement continued

Directors’ attendance
All Directors are expected to attend all 
Board and relevant Committee meetings.  
If Directors are unable to attend a meeting 
they will review the relevant papers in 
advance and provide their comments to the 
Chair of the Board or Committee. Minutes 
of the meeting will be sent to any Director 
who was not in attendance for reference.

Total no. of meetings

Steve Carson

Chris Muir

Alan Smith

Ron McMillan

George Adams*

Angela Luger

PLC

12

12

12

12

12

4

11

Audit 
Committee

Remuneration 
Committee

Nomination 
Committee

3

–

–

–

3

1

2

4

–

–

4

4

1

3

7

–

–

7

7

2

6

*  Until his sudden passing in November 2021.

Further meetings of the Board and  
Audit, Remuneration and Nomination 
Committees have also been held  
since the year end.

Shareholders

Chair

The Board

Board Committees

Nomination Committee
•  Reviews the structure, size and composition of the Board, 
including the balance of Executive and Non-Executive 
Directors;

•  Considers succession planning for Directors and senior 

management positions;

•  Oversees the development of a diverse pipeline for 

succession, having regard to diversity of gender, social and 
ethnic backgrounds, cognitive and personal strengths; and
Identifies and nominates candidates for the approval of the 
Board, to fill Board vacancies when they arise.

• 

Audit Committee
•  Monitors the quality and effectiveness of the external and 

internal auditors;

•  Reviews and monitors the integrity of the financial  

statements and any formal announcements relating to 
financial performance;

•  Assists the Board with the development and execution of a risk 
management strategy, risk policies and current and emerging 
risk exposures, including the maintenance of the Group’s risk 
register; and

•  Monitors the adequacy and effectiveness of the Group’s 
internal financial controls and internal control and risk 
management systems.

Remuneration Committee 
•  Determines the policy for the Group on executive 

remuneration and sets remuneration for the Chair, the 
Executive Directors and senior management;

•  Reviews workforce remuneration and related policies and the 
alignment of incentives and rewards with culture, and taking 
these into account when setting the policy for Executive 
Director remuneration; 

•  Reviews the design of all share incentive plans for approval by 

the Board and/or shareholders; and

•  Determines and monitors any share ownership requirements 
for the Executive Directors and senior management including 
post-employment requirements.

  See Committee report on pages 75 to 76. 

  See Committee report on pages 77 to 83. 

  See Committee report on pages 84 to 97. 

72

Chief Executive Officer
Responsible for the day-to-day management of the Group and the implementation of strategy.

Executive Board - Assists the Chief Executive Officer in the performance of his duties including:
•  Progress against strategy and budgets;
•  Monitoring of operating and financial performance; and
•  Allocation of resource.

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Composition, succession and evaluation

Composition of the Board
The Board currently comprises of the 
Non-Executive Chair, two Executive 
Directors and three independent  
Non-Executive Directors. 

All Directors have service agreements or 
letters of appointment in place and the 
details of the terms of these are set out in 
the Directors’ remuneration report on 
pages 96 to 97.

The Chair has met with each of the 
Non-Executive Directors during the year on 
a one-to-one basis, without the Executive 
Directors being present. In addition, the 
Senior Independent Director holds a private 
meeting of the Non-Executive Directors 
without the Chair being present to assess 
his performance.

Board development
The Chair believes the current Board and its 
Committees have an appropriate balance of 
skills and experience to enable them to 
discharge their responsibilities effectively. 
The development of the Group’s Directors 
is regularly reviewed and the Chair discusses 
training requirements with each Director.

The Board’s composition is compliant with 
the 2018 Corporate Governance Code 
(‘The Code’).

The Code recommends that at least half of  
the Board, excluding the Chair, should be 
Non-Executive Directors whom the Board 
considers to be independent. The Group 
has met this requirement as Ron McMillan 
(Senior Independent Director), appointed 
22 October 2014, Angela Luger, appointed 
16 May 2019 and Carol Kavanagh appointed 
26 September 2022 are all considered by 
the Group to meet the definition of an 
independent Director. Each of them is 
considered by the Board to be independent 
in character and judgement and free from 
relationships or circumstances which may 
affect, or could appear to affect, their 
judgement. Independence is determined by 
ensuring that the Non-Executive Directors 
do not have any material business 
relationships or arrangements (apart from 
their fees for acting as Non-Executive 
Directors) with the Group or its Directors 
which in the opinion of the Board could 
affect their independent judgement.

Board gender diversity 

Executive Board gender diversity 

  Male (67%)

  Female (33%)

  Male (75%)

  Female (25%)

Executive Board and senior  
management team diversity 

All employees diversity 

  Male (60%)

  Female (40%)

  Male (70%)

  Female (30%)

73

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsThe main areas identified for continued focus and the actions taken were as follows:

Area of focus

Actions taken

Increasing the focus on succession planning and the 
need for increased diversity 

Opportunity to improve stakeholder engagement 

To ensure that ESG priorities are continuously 
reviewed whilst ensuring they provide sustainable 
commercial value

With both Alan Smith and Ron McMillan due to step down 
from the Board in late 2023, appointments have been made 
to ensure a smooth transition. Carol Kavanagh joined the 
Board on 26 September 2022, together with Andy Kemp and 
John Walden who are due to join the Board in February 2023 
and March 2023 respectively.

The Board have planned a visit to one of the Group’s suppliers 
and scheduled Director listening sessions for FY23. 

The Board will continue to monitor progress against the ESG 
targets and objectives. 

Corporate governance statement continued

Composition, succession and evaluation continued

Board effectiveness evaluation
During the year the Board took part in an 
externally facilitated evaluation by Sam 
Allen Associates Ltd. In accordance with the 
UK Corporate Governance Code, the Board 
will continue to undertake annual 
evaluations and at least once every three 
years with an external consultant facilitating 
the evaluation. 

The external evaluation offers an 
independent review of the effectiveness of 
the Board, its Committees and Directors. 
The evaluation process took place in July 
2022. Each of the Directors and the 
Company Secretary completed a 
questionnaire, on an anonymised basis, 
which was prepared to elicit their views on all 
aspects of the effectiveness of the Board 
and its Committees, including its 
composition, diversity and how effectively 
members work together to achieve the 
Group’s purpose and strategic aims. The 
facilitator also held one-to-one meetings 
with Directors and group discussions to  
gain further insights.

In considering the feedback from the above 
process, Sam Allen Associates Ltd 
concluded that the Board and its 
Committees were performing well and 
highlighted the following strengths:
•  There is a strong alignment in the views 
of the Board of Directors on the Group’s 
purpose and strengths.

•  Addition of strategy focused Board 
sessions have created greater 
engagement and debate amongst  
the Board. 

•  Governance and compliance amongst 
the Board and its members is strongly 
adhered to.

•  The Board has a strong focus on 

creating value for shareholders and 
wider stakeholder relationships are 
good and have been strengthened in 
the past year.

•  There is a culture of openness and 

transparency between Executive and 
Non-Executive Directors.

74

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Nomination Committee report

Dear Shareholder,
I am pleased to present the 2022 report of 
the Nomination Committee.

The primary purpose of the Committee is to 
lead the process for Board appointments, 
ensure plans are in place for orderly 
succession for both the Board and senior 
management and oversee the development 
of a diverse pipeline for succession.

The responsibilities of the Committee, as 
delegated by the Board, are set out in the 
terms of reference which are published on 
the Group’s corporate website at www.
scsplc.co.uk, which in summary include:
•  Reviewing the structure, size and 

composition of the Board, including the 
balance of Executive and Non-
Executive Directors;

•  Setting measurable objectives and 
targets for diversity and inclusion in 
relation to the Board and senior 
management positions;

•  Putting in place plans for the orderly 
succession of appointments to the 
Board and to senior management 
positions;

•  Overseeing the development of a 

diverse pipeline for succession, having 
regard to diversity of gender, social and 
ethnic backgrounds, cognitive and 
personal strengths;
Identifying and nominating candidates 
for the approval of the Board, to fill 
Board vacancies when they arise; and

• 

•  Reviewing and evaluating the 

performance of the Board, each Board 
Committee, the Chair of the Board and 
each individual Director.

Member and meetings  
attended in 2022

Alan Smith

Ron McMillan 

George Adams*

Angela Luger

Member 
since

Meetings 
attended

2014

2014

2015

2019

7

7

2

6

*  George Adams was also a member of the Committee 

until his sudden death in November 2021.

The Executive Directors also attend 
Committee meetings by invitation.  
The Committee is supported by the 
Company Secretary.

There are two scheduled Committee 
meetings annually, but with additional 
meetings or calls held on an as required 
basis. During the year, there were an 
additional five Committee meetings and a 
number of informal calls and discussions, 
largely reflective of the recruitment process 
for new Non-Executive Directors. The 
majority of the meetings were held in person.

Committee activities in 2022
Non-Executive Director positions
Myself and Ron McMillan are each due to 
step down from the Board in late 2023, both 
having completed nine years as Board 
members. As a result of this and George 
Adams’ passing in November 2021, we 
commenced a recruitment process to 
appoint three new Non-Executive Directors 
in early 2022.

With the assistance of Sam Allen Associates 
Ltd we agreed comprehensive role 
specifications and aligned these to the 
desired Board composition with reference 
to diversity, inclusion and a Board skills 
matrix. We also appointed Sam Allen 
Associates Ltd to facilitate the annual 

evaluation of the Board’s performance. 
Taking into account feedback from Board 
members, the role specifications and the 
key skills, knowledge and experience of the 
shortlisted candidates, the Committee 
recommended the appointment of three 
Non-Executive Directors which were 
approved by the Board. Upon joining the 
Board they will also be appointed as a 
member of the Audit Committee, the 
Remuneration Committee and the 
Nomination Committee.

Carol Kavanagh’s appointment was 
announced in August 2022 and she joined 
the Board on 26 September 2022. Carol has 
over 20 years of experience working in 
senior public company human resource 
roles and her Non-Executive Director 
experience began in the financial services 
sector with Leeds Building Society where 
she was a member of the Remuneration 
Committee. Whilst at Travis Perkins, Carol 
served as a Non-Executive Director with 
Verona Stone, which at the time was part 
owned by the TP Group. Carol is also 
currently a Non-Executive Director of 
Speedy Hire PLC and an independent 
Remuneration Committee member for 
British Swimming. 

Andy Kemp’s appointment was announced 
in June 2022 and he is due to join the Board 
as a Non-Executive Director on 1 February 
2023. Andy is a Non-Executive Director of 
The Berkeley Group Holdings plc, where he 
is a member of the Audit Committee and 
the Chairman of the Remuneration 
Committee. Andy was the former Chairman 
of PwC’s Non-Executive Director advisory 
programme and previously sat on PwC’s 
Audit and Risk Assurance executive board. 

John Walden’s appointment was 
announced in September 2022 and he is 
due to join the Board as Non-Executive 
Chair Designate on 1 March 2023 and the 
intention is that he will become Non-
Executive Chair of the Group on 
30 November 2023 upon my retirement. 
John is currently Non-Executive Chair of 
Motorpoint plc and SnowFox Topco Ltd. 
John has held a number of senior roles 
including Chair of Naked Wines and Chair of 
Holland & Barrett International. John was 
previously Executive Director at FTD 
Companies and CEO of Argos and its  
parent company Home Retail Group plc.

Board effectiveness evaluation
The Committee oversees the Board 
effectiveness review which evaluates the 
performance of the Board and its 
Committees, the Chair and individual 
Directors. During the year, the review was 
externally facilitated by Sam Allen 
Associates Ltd. The evaluation included  
a review of the time commitment required 
by each of the Company’s Non-Executive 
Directors and the size, structure and 
composition of the Board and its 
Committees. The Committee also 
undertook a review of the actions that arose 
from the effectiveness review to track 
progress. Full details are provided  
on page 74.

In accordance with the UK Corporate 
Governance Code, the Board will continue 
to undertake annual evaluations and at least 
once every three years with an external 
consultant facilitating the evaluation. Given 
the significant changes to the composition 
of the Board in 2023 an external evaluation 
will be carried out in 2024. 

75

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsNomination Committee report continued

Succession planning
During the year, the Committee considered 
the succession arrangements for the Board 
and for the senior management team, 
comprising the operational directors below 
Board level. We reviewed immediate, 
mid-term and long-term succession 
planning and arrangements and the Board 
skills matrix. Our succession arrangements 
are directly aligned to the long-term 
strategy of the Group.

2
2
0
2
t
r
o
p
e
R

l

a
u
n
n
A

c
l
p
p
u
o
r
G
S
c
S

76
76

membership status. All employees are 
required to perform mandatory annual 
training on diversity and inclusion.

Ensuring that our future Board and senior 
management team better reflects the 
diversity of the communities we serve and 
the people we employ is a key objective of 
our ‘Outstanding team’ strategy pillar. 
Similarly to other businesses, we are 
starting this journey by focusing on a plan to 
drive gender diversity within our teams and 
in the succession pipeline. See page 73 for 
further detail of the gender balance across 
the Group. We recognise that diversity is 
much broader than gender but believe that 
achieving sustainable traction in this critical 
area of talent will help us develop strategies 
that can be applied more widely. 

We welcome the new Listing Rule on 
diversity and inclusion and will continue  
to use our best endeavours to increase  
the diversity of our Board over the  
coming years.

Our people are our greatest asset and key 
to our success, incorporating their views 
into Board decision making is essential to 
achieving our business objectives and 
creating a workplace which treats  
everyone equally. 

Alan Smith
Chairman of the Nomination Committee
10 October 2022

This process informs the Group’s 
framework for the skills we wish to focus on 
when preparing role specifications, 
evaluating potential new candidates and 
developing a diverse and inclusive pipeline. 

This year the succession arrangements for 
the Board have been in particular focus, as 
we are addressing the need to recruit an 
additional three new Non-Executive 
Directors due to the planned retirements of 
Alan Smith and Ron McMillan in 2023 and 
the sudden death of George Adams in 
November 2021.

Diversity and inclusion
The Committee recognises the need to 
monitor and review diversity and inclusion, 
including gender, social and ethnic 
backgrounds and cognitive and personal 
strengths in relation to how the Group is led 
and represented. During the year the 
following targets have been set to increase 
accountability in this area:
•  To increase the number of females in 
management retail roles by 25%  
by July 2023.

•  To increase the percentage of women 
on the PLC Board to over 30% by Dec 
2022. This target has been achieved 
upon the appointment of Carol 
Kavanagh in September 2022.

Employment positions throughout the 
Group are filled with the candidates who 
possess the most appropriate skills and 
competencies relevant for the particular job 
role. We have a policy to treat all employees 
fairly and equally regardless of gender, 
sexual orientation, marital status, race, 
colour, nationality, religion, ethnic or 
national origin, age, disability or union 

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022 
 
 
 
 
Audit Committee report

‘ The Committee exercises oversight of the 
Group’s financial policies and reporting, 
monitors the integrity of the financial 
statements and reviews and considers 
significant financial and accounting 
estimates and judgements.’

The Audit Committee has oversight of the external financial 
reporting of the Group, risk management and mitigation, the 
internal audit framework and the effectiveness of internal and 
external audit.

Dear Shareholder,
The Audit Committee is integral to the 
Group’s governance framework and 
continues to keep its activities under review 
to reflect regulatory developments and 
best practice. The Audit Committee advises 
the Board on financial reporting, viability and 
going concern and whether the Annual 
Report provides shareholders with the 
information necessary to assess the 
Group’s performance. It also monitors risks, 
risk mitigation and internal control.

The Committee exercises oversight of the 
Group’s financial policies and reporting, 
monitors the integrity of the financial 
statements and reviews and considers 
significant financial and accounting 
estimates and judgements.

The Committee satisfies itself that the 
disclosures in the financial statements 
about these estimates and judgements are 
appropriate and obtains from the external 
auditor an independent view of the key 
disclosure issues and risks.

Whilst risk management is a Board 
responsibility, the Committee has 
continued to work closely with the Board 
and senior management to ensure that all 
significant risks are considered on an 
ongoing basis and that all communications 
with shareholders are properly considered. 
In relation to risks and controls, the 
Committee ensures that these have been 
identified and that appropriate 
responsibilities and accountabilities  
have been set.

i

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

|

C
o
r
p
o
r
a
t
e
g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

|

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

77

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Audit Committee report continued

A key responsibility of the Committee is to 
review the scope of work undertaken by the 
internal and external auditors and to 
consider their effectiveness.

During the year, the Committee again 
oversaw the process used by the Board to 
assess the viability of the Group, the stress 
testing of key trading assumptions and the 
preparation of the Viability statement which 
is set out on page 60 of the Strategic report. 

The Committee has considered the 
narrative in the Strategic report and 
whether the 2022 Annual Report is fair, 
balanced and understandable and whether 
it provides the necessary information to 
shareholders to assess the Group’s 
performance, business model and strategy. 
The Committee considered management’s 
assessment of items included in the 
financial statements and the prominence 
given to them. The Committee, and 
subsequently the Board, were satisfied that, 
taken as a whole, the 2022 Annual Report 
and Accounts is fair, balanced and 
understandable.

During the year and as part of their normal 
cycle of work, the Financial Reporting 
Council (FRC) reviewed the Group’s Annual 
Report for the year ended 31 July 2021.  
The FRC raised a query in relation to the 
accounting for warranty sales under IFRS 15 
as explained on page 130. The changes  
that have been made have no impact  
on reported profit, cash flows or in  
the consolidated statement of  
financial position.

The Committee reviewed, on behalf of the 
Board, the Group’s compliance with the 
Modern Slavery Act and its policies in
relation to money laundering and anti-

78

bribery. The Committee has also given 
consideration to the development of 
climate-related reporting and the Group 
has reported in line with the Task Force on 
Climate-related Financial Disclosures 
(TCFD) requirements in the year, see pages 
32 to 39 for further detail. 

The meetings at which the above and 
certain other matters were discussed were 
as follows: 

Member and meetings  
attended in 2022

Member 
since

Meetings 
attended

Ron McMillan (Chairman)

George Adams*

Angela Luger

2014

2015

2019

3

1

2

The Audit Committee met three times during the year.

*  George Adams was a member of the Committee until his 
sudden death in November 2021 which reduced the 
membership of the Committee to below the minimum 
required by the 2018 UK Corporate Governance code. 
Upon Carol Kavanagh’s appointment in September 2022, 
the Audit Committee is again compliant with provision 24.

Going forward, I shall ensure that the 
Committee continues to acknowledge and 
embrace its role of protecting the interests 
of shareholders in regards to the integrity of 
published financial information and the 
effectiveness of audit. I am available to 
speak with shareholders at any time and 
shall be available at the Annual General 
Meeting (AGM) in November to answer any 
questions you may have on this report. I 
would like to thank my colleagues on the 
Committee for their help and support 
during the year.

Ron McMillan
Chair of the Audit Committee
10 October 2022

Committee composition
Until the untimely death of George Adams 
in November 2021, the Committee 
comprised three members, all of whom 
were Non-Executive Directors. Two 
members constitute a quorum and the 
Committee must include one financially 
qualified member with recent and relevant 
financial experience. The Committee Chair 
fulfils this requirement. All members are 
expected to have an understanding of 
financial reporting, the Group’s internal 
control environment, relevant corporate 
legislation, the roles and functions of 
Internal Audit and external audit and the 
regulatory framework of the business. 

The members of the Committee during the 
year were Ron McMillan, George Adams and 
Angela Luger. Details of Committee 
meetings and attendance are set out in the 
Corporate governance statement on page 
72. In November 2023 Ron McMillan will step 
down from the Board, and as Chair of the 
Audit Committee, having served the 
maximum nine-year tenure for an 
independent non-executive director. As 
noted in the Chair’s report, Andy Kemp will 
be joining the Board and the Audit 
Committee as a Non-Executive Director on 
1 February 2023 and, following the end of 
Ron’s tenure, will assume the Audit 
Committee Chair role. Andy is financially 
qualified with recent and relevant financial 
experience. The timing of Committee 
meetings is set to accommodate the dates 
of releases of financial information and the 
approval of the scope of and outputs from 
work programmes executed by the internal 
and external auditors. The biographies of 
the members of the Committee can be 
found on page 63 and reflect the significant 
experience that the Committee members 

have of working in or with companies in the 
retail and consumer goods sectors.

Although not members of the Committee, 
Alan Smith, as Group Chairman, Steve 
Carson, as CEO, and Chris Muir, as CFO, 
attend meetings, together with 
representatives from the Internal Audit 
function and the external auditors. 

In addition to scheduled meetings, the 
Committee Chairman met with the Head of 
Audit, Risk & Compliance, the external 
auditors and the CFO during the year, and 
the Head of Audit, Risk & Compliance and 
the external auditors are provided with the 
opportunity to raise any matters of concern 
that they may have in the absence of the 
Executive Directors whether at the 
Committee meetings, or more informally, 
outside of them.

The Committee critically evaluates its own 
performance on an annual basis and 
considers where improvements can be 
made. During the year the Committee was 
also externally evaluated as part of a review 
conducted by Sam Allen Associates Ltd, 
further details of which can be found on 
pages 74 to 75. 

Board reporting
The Committee provides an update of 
matters discussed to the Board and the 
minutes of Audit Committee meetings are 
circulated to the Board.

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Responsibilities
The responsibilities of the Committee, as 
delegated by the Board, are set out in the 
terms of reference which are published on 
the Group’s corporate website. They 
include the following: 
•  Reviewing the integrity of the financial 
statements and other price sensitive 
financial releases of the Group and the 
significant financial judgements and 
estimates related thereto;

•  Monitoring the scope of work and the 

quality, effectiveness and 
independence of the external auditors 
and approving their reappointment and 
fees;

•  Monitoring the independence and 

activities of the Internal Audit function;

•  Assisting the Board with the 

development and execution of a risk 
management strategy, risk policies and 
current risk exposures, including the 
maintenance of the Group’s risk 
register; and

•  Keeping under review the adequacy and 
effectiveness of the Group’s internal 
financial controls and the Group’s risk 
management and compliance system.

Activities
In discharging its oversight of the matters 
referred to above and in the introductory 
letter to this report, the Committee was 
assisted by management and both the 
internal and external auditors. 

The recurring work of the Committee 
comprised:
•  Review of the Annual Report and 

Financial statements of the Group;
•  Review and approval of the statements 
to be included in the Group’s Annual 
Report concerning internal controls and 
risk management;

•  Review of the Interim Results report and 
non-statutory financial statements of 
the Group for the half year;

•  Consideration of the significant areas of 
accounting estimation or judgement;

•  Consideration of the principal risks 
included in the Annual Report;
•  Consideration of going concern  
and viability issues and the  
related disclosures; 

•  Consideration of the Group’s 

compliance with the European Single 
Electronic Format (ESEF) tagging 
requirements to facilitate comparison 
and analysis of financial data  
across markets;

•  Approval of the external auditors’ terms 
of reference, audit plan and fees; and

•  Approval of the Internal Audit Plan.

The meetings at which the above and 
certain other matters were discussed  
were as follows:

September 
2021 

March  
2022

July  
2022

Review of Interim Results

Review of Annual Report; approval of Audit Committee report, 

consideration of significant areas of accounting estimation or judgement 
and whether the Annual Report is fair, balanced and understandable

Review of management representations

Review and approval of Internal Audit Plan, reports and updates

Approval of the external audit strategy and fees

Update on the provision of any non-audit services and fees provided by the 

external auditors

Effectiveness of the Internal Audit function

Effectiveness of the external audit 

Risk management update and review of related disclosures

Review of internal control processes and related disclosures

Review of disaster recovery practices

Update on the Group Data Protection compliance including policy review 

Reviewed and agreed the structure and annual plan for compliance function 

Effectiveness of procedures for detecting fraud

Consideration of the 2018 UK Corporate Governance Code and  

disclosure regulations

Year-end final review of related party transactions

Accounting policies and disclosures in relation to:

–  IFRS 16

–  Corporation tax and VAT

–  Supplier rebates

–  Stock and related provisions

–  Impairment assessment for loss making stores

–  Dilapidations

–  Accounting for warranties

–  Parent company investment

Going concern and viability issues and disclosures, including the  

impact of COVID-19

Reviewed TCFD reporting requirements

In considering the above accounting matters the Committee had regard to papers and reports prepared by the Group finance 
team and the external auditors and the explanations and disclosures made in the Annual Report.

79

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsClimate change and risk reporting
During the year, the Group prepared its first 
report in line with the TCFD requirements 
which can be found on pages 32 to 39. The 
report outlines the progress made in 
understanding, identifying and managing 
the business’s climate-related risks and 
opportunities. We acknowledge that 
climate-related reporting is a rapidly 
advancing topic and that we are relatively 
early on in our journey. We will continue  
to monitor this area and strive to make 
further improvements.

Significant issues and judgements 
relating to the financial statements
The Committee monitors the integrity of 
the annual and interim reports, including a 
review of the key accounting issues, areas  
of judgement and related disclosures 
contained in them.

When reviewing the Group’s 2021 Annual 
Report and Accounts, the FRC has made 
clear the limitations of its review as follows: 
Its review is based on the 2021 Annual 
• 
Report and Accounts only and does not 
benefit from a detailed knowledge of 
the Group’s business or an 
understanding of the underlying 
transactions entered into; 

•  Communications from the FRC provide 
no assurance that the Group’s 2021 
Annual Report and Accounts are 
correct in all material respects and are 
made on the basis that the FRC (and its 
officers, employees and agents) 
accepts no liability for reliance on them 
by the Group or any third party, 
including but not limited to investors 
and shareholders; and

•  The FRC’s role is not to verify 

information provided but to consider 
compliance with reporting 
requirements. 

The Committee reviewed the disclosures 
and amendments proposed by 
management and concluded that  
they are appropriate. 

Audit Committee report continued

FRC review of the Group’s 2021  
Annual Report
During the year the Group’s 2021 Annual 
Report was reviewed by the FRC as part  
of its routine monitoring of corporate 
reporting. In March 2022, the FRC’s 
Corporate Reporting Review team 
requested further information in relation  
to the Group’s accounting for the sale  
of warranties. 

As a result of subsequent communication 
with the FRC, the Group has amended its 
accounting policy for transactions involving 
the sale of warranties, and a prior year 
adjustment to gross sales, revenue and cost 
of sales has been disclosed as set out in 
note 29 to the financial statements. There 
was no impact on the reported profit for the 
prior year or cash flows and no impact on 
the prior year consolidated statement of 
financial position. 

The FRC also suggested some changes to 
the disclosures within the Annual Report. 
Revenue has been disaggregated into 
additional categories as explained in note 3 
to the financial statements, the 
classification of interest paid in the 
statement of cash flows has been adjusted 
from within operating activities to within 
financing activities and the prominence 
given to alternative performance measures 
(APMs) over statutory measures has been 
reassessed. All communications with the 
FRC were closed prior to the signing of this 
year’s Annual Report.

80

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Area of focus

Committees response

Impairment
Management reviews the carrying amount of 
property, plant and equipment and right-of-use 
assets every year to determine if there are any 
indications of impairment. The estimate of the 
recoverable amount is based on value in use 
calculations which requires management to estimate 
future cash flows and an appropriate discount rate. 
The prior year impairment assessment is also taken 
into consideration and where it is identified that the 
impairment has reduced, a reversal of the impairment 
is recorded. 

IFRS 16 discount rate
In calculating the present value of lease payments, 
the Group’s policy is to use its incremental borrowing 
rate. However, currently, the Group has no 
borrowings. It, therefore, uses an approximation 
based on UK government gilt rates of an appropriate 
duration, adjusted by an indicative credit premium. 

Parent company investment
The ultimate parent company of the Group, ScS 
Group plc, holds a £70m investment in the subsidiary 
companies of the Group. The carrying value of this 
investment is reviewed by management to determine 
if there are any indications of impairment. A value in 
use model is used to estimate the recoverable 
amount. Cash flow projections are based on the 
Group’s internal budgets, which are then extrapolated 
into perpetuity and discounted using the Group’s cost 
of capital. 

Supplier rebates
The Group receives volume rebates from suppliers 
which are pre-negotiated and split between suppliers 
with rebate ‘hurdle’ rates dependent on spend and 
those that have a flat rate. Where rebate 
arrangements were not coterminous with the year 
end, judgements were required but the amounts 
involved were not material. 

Stock provisions
The Group’s policy in relation to stock provisioning  
is to provide for obsolete, slow moving and  
defective stock. 

Dilapidation provision
The Group’s policy is to ensure a suitable dilapidations 
provision is in place to utilise to cover costs when a site 
is exited at the end of a lease. Historical data is used to 
estimate future liabilities; therefore, a degree of 
judgement is required.

The Committee discussed with management  
and the external auditors the validity of cash flow 
projections and the significant financial assumptions 
used, including the selection of appropriate discount 
and growth rates used over the remaining lease 
period. The Committee satisfied itself that  
the principles and judgements applied were 
appropriate and that no impairment charge  
or reversal was required.

The Committee discussed with management and 
the external auditors how an approximate rate had 
been derived. The Committee considers that the 
judgements made are appropriate to the Group’s 
particular circumstances.

The Committee discussed with management and 
the external auditors the validity of cash flow 
projections and the significant financial assumptions 
used, including the selection of appropriate discount 
and growth rates used. The Committee satisfied 
itself that the principles and judgements applied were 
appropriate and that no impairment charge or 
reversal was required.

The Committee gained an understanding of these 
arrangements, discussed them with management 
and the external auditors and satisfied itself with the 
controls that are in place to ensure that amounts 
received and receivable from suppliers are properly 
accounted for on a monthly basis and that the related 
judgements are limited.

The Committee has discussed with management 
and the external auditors how the policy has been 
applied in practice so as to ensure that stock is held at 
the most appropriate estimate of net realisable value. 
The Committee satisfied itself that stock was not 
materially misstated.

The Committee has reviewed management’s 
dilapidations calculation and assumptions, and 
satisfied itself that an appropriate provision is in place.

Going concern
The Board and the Committee have 
discussed going concern issues on a 
number of occasions and have satisfied 
themselves that the underlying 
assumptions continue to be reasonable and 
support the conclusion that the Group has 
adequate resources to continue to operate 
for a period of at least 12 months from the 
date on which the financial statements are 
signed. Accordingly, they continue to adopt 
the going concern basis in preparing the 
financial statements (see note 2 to the 
financial statements on pages 113 to 114).

Viability statement
The Board is required to consider whether 
the Group can continue to operate and 
meet its liabilities, taking into account its 
current position and principal risks in the 
longer term, having considered severe but 
plausible risks and risk combinations. The 
Committee reviewed the process 
undertaken by management and 
considered management’s scenario 
modelling and the stress testing of these 
models. The Committee reviewed and 
challenged the assumptions used and 
concluded that the Board is able to make 
the Viability statement on page 60 of the 
Strategic report.

Fair, balanced and understandable
The Committee considered whether the 
2022 Annual Report and Accounts is fair, 
balanced and understandable and whether 
it provides the necessary information to 
shareholders to assess the Group’s 
performance, business model and strategy. 
Also considered was management’s 
assessment of items included in the 
financial statements and the prominence 
given to them. The Committee and 
subsequently the Board were satisfied that, 
taken as a whole, the 2022 Annual Report 
and Accounts is fair, balanced and 
understandable. 

Risk management and internal control
The Board has overall responsibility for 
ensuring that the Group maintains a sound 
system of internal control. There are 
inherent limitations in any system of internal 
control and no system can provide absolute 
assurance against material misstatements, 
loss or failure. Equally, no system can 
guarantee elimination of the risk of failure to 
meet the objectives of the business. 
Against that background, the Committee 
has helped the Board develop and maintain 
an approach to risk management which 
incorporates risk appetite, the framework 
within which risk is managed and the 
responsibilities and procedures pertaining 
to the application of the policy.

81

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsAudit Committee report continued

The Group is proactive in ensuring that 
corporate and operational risks are 
identified and managed. A corporate risk 
register is maintained which details:
1.  The risks and the impact they may have;
2.  Actions to mitigate risks;
3.  Risk scores to highlight the implications 

of occurrence;

4.  Ownership of risks; and
5.  Target dates for actions to mitigate risks.

A description of the principal risks is set out 
on pages 50 to 59.

The Board has confirmed that it has carried 
out a robust assessment of the principal 
risks facing the Group, including those 
which threaten its business model, future 
performance, solvency or liquidity.

The Board considers that the processes 
undertaken by the Committee are 
appropriately robust and effective and in 
compliance with the guidelines issued by 
the FRC. During the year, the Board has not 
been advised by the Committee nor has it 
identified itself, any failings, frauds or 
weaknesses in internal control which it has 
determined to be material in the context of 
the financial statements.

The Committee continues to believe that 
appropriate controls are in place throughout 
the Group, and that the Group has a 
well-defined organisational structure with 
clear lines of responsibility and a 
comprehensive financial reporting system. 
The Committee also believes that the 
Company complies with the FRC guidance 
on risk management, internal control and 
related financial business reporting.
Furthermore, the Internal Audit function 

has carried out an assessment of the 
effectiveness of actions taken by 
management to mitigate significant risks.

Internal Audit
The Head of Audit, Risk & Compliance has a 
direct reporting line to the Committee and 
attends every Committee meeting to 
present Internal Audit and risk management 
reports. During the financial year, Internal 
Audit has undertaken a programme of work 
which was discussed and agreed with both 
management and the Committee and 
which was designed to address both risk 
management and areas of potential 
financial loss. All of the agreed work has 
been performed and the Committee is 
comfortable that all key areas of risk have 
been covered. Internal Audit has also 
established procedures within the business 
to ensure that new risks are identified, 
evaluated and managed, and that necessary 
changes are made to the risk register.

During the year, the Committee reviewed 
reports from Internal Audit in relation to:
•  Fraud risk and related internal controls; 
•  Anti-money laundering; 
•  Anti-bribery and corporate crime;
•  Compliance with the Modern  

Slavery Act;

•  Compliance with data protection; 
•  Compliance assessments of the 

Group’s operating processes in relation 
to retail outlets and distribution centres;

•  Risk management, including the 

effectiveness of mitigating actions in 
relation to the Group’s principal risks, 
including IT systems, business 
continuity and cyber-risk;
•  E-commerce processes; 
•  Compliance processes; 

82

•  Central customer experience 

processes;

•  Merchandise processes;
•  Estates management;
•  Motor fleet management;
•  Strategy implementation;
•  Supply chain;
•  Third-party and outsourced contract 

processes;

•  Flooring sales processes; and
•  Health and safety processes. 

In relation to each of the above, Internal 
Audit made recommendations for 
improvement, the vast majority of which 
were agreed by management and either 
have been or are being implemented.

The Committee has evaluated the 
performance of Internal Audit during the 
year and concluded it is a function which has 
a strategic plan developed in collaboration 
with the Committee, and which provides 
constructive challenge and demonstrates  
a realistic and commercial view of the 
business.

External auditors
Following a tender process in 2019, 
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC) were 
re-appointed as the Group’s external 
auditors. The audit partner is Andy Ward, 
who is a partner in PwC’s Leeds office and 
has been the audit partner for two years. 
PwC have been the Group’s auditors for  
12 years. 

The Committee has established policies in 
relation to the provision of non-audit 
services by the auditors. The external 
auditors are not permitted to perform any 
work that they may be later required to audit 
or which might affect their objectivity and 
independence or create a conflict of 
interest. Furthermore, the external auditors 
may not perform any work prohibited by the 
Ethical Standards published by the FRC. 

All fees for non-audit work require pre-
authorisation by the Chief Financial Officer 
and the Audit Committee, and non-audit 
fees paid to the auditors are not permitted 
to exceed 70% of average audit fees over a 
three-year period. During the year other 
non-audit services provided by PwC 
included £25,000 for their review of the 
interim financial statements. No other 
non-audit services were provided by the 
external auditor. Fees paid to PwC for audit 
work were £226,000.

The Group is in compliance with the 
requirements of The Statutory Audit 
Services for Large Companies Market
Investigation (Mandatory Use of 
Competitive Tender Processes and Audit 
Responsibilities) Order 2014, which relates 
to the frequency and governance of 
external audit tenders and the setting of a 
policy on the provision of non-audit 
services.

In accordance with International Standards 
on Auditing (UK & Ireland) 260 and Ethical 
Statement 1 issued by the Accounting 
Practices Board, and as a matter of best 
practice, the external auditors have 
confirmed their independence as auditors 
of the Group.

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022The Committee is responsible for assessing 
the effectiveness of the external audit 
process and does so in a number of ways:
1.  The Committee, together with the CFO, 
met with the senior members of PwC, 
prior to both the interim review and year 
end audit, as they presented their plan 
for discussion;

2.  The Committee, together with the CFO 
and other members of the Board, met 
with PwC to assess the execution of the 
review/audit and reporting of their 
findings; and

3.  The Committee considered the matters 
set out in PwC’s 2021 Transparency 
Report dealing with audit quality 
monitoring and remediation. It 
considered the results of internal and 
external engagement reviews and the 
steps taken by PwC to address findings. 
Within PwC, audit quality is monitored  
at a global level and at an engagement 
level, with all engagement partners  
being reviewed at least once in a 
three-year cycle.

In reviewing PwC’s 2021 Transparency 
Report, the Committee noted the firm’s 
commitment to quality and risk 
management. The Committee also 
discussed with PwC the results of the FRC 
Audit Quality Inspection of the UK firm. 
During PwC’s attendance at Committee 
meetings, the Committee also met privately 
with the auditors and, as Chair of the 
Committee, I had regular dialogue with  
the audit partner.

The Committee considered in detail PwC’s 
audit planning documentation and satisfied 
itself that the audit work to be carried out by 
PwC covered all significant aspects of the 
Annual Report and Accounts and, therefore, 
did not feel it was necessary to ask PwC to 
look at any additional areas specifically. 
PwC’s report to the Audit Committee at the 
conclusion of the audit confirmed that the 
audit had been carried out in accordance 
with the planning documentation and the 
Audit Committee considered the findings of 
PwC as reflected in their audit opinion and 
their year end report to the Board. PwC’s 
audit opinion set out the key matters that, in 
their opinion were of most significance in 
this audit. These were consistent with the 
key matters considered and agreed with the 
Audit Committee when the audit was 
planned. PwC’s report describes how these 
matters were addressed in the audit and the 
scope and nature of their work reflects the 
thoroughness of their approach and the 
degree of scepticism applied.

The Committee reviews annually the 
performance of PwC with feedback from 
management, the Group’s finance team, 
the Internal Audit function and the Board. 
As part of this review, the Committee met 
with members of the audit team to 
understand the experience of the wider 
team and their understanding of the Group, 
the retail sector and the extent of challenge 
to management on areas which required 
judgement. The conclusions reached were 
that PwC has continued to perform  
the audit in a professional and efficient 
manner with the necessary objectivity and 
challenge to demonstrate independence 
and it is, therefore, the Committee’s 
recommendation to the Board that PwC be 
re-appointed auditors at the AGM on 
25 November 2022. The Board has no 
present plans to consider an audit tender 
process.

The Committee reviewed the reports 
prepared by PwC on key audit findings as 
well as the recommendations made by PwC 
to improve processes and controls together 
with management’s responses to those 
recommendations. PwC did not highlight 
any material internal control weaknesses 
and management has committed to making 
appropriate changes in controls in the areas 
highlighted by PwC.

Ron McMillan
Chair of the Audit Committee
10 October 2022 

83

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsDirectors’ remuneration report

‘Our strategic priorities are reflected 
in our pay and incentive arrangements 
for the wider workforce.’

The Committee has decided to incorporate environmental, social  
and governance (ESG) metrics in the form of employee engagement 
and waste reduction measures into the annual bonus.

Dear Shareholder,
I am pleased to present this year’s Directors’ 
remuneration report on behalf of the 
Remuneration Committee (‘the Committee’). 

In January 2022, I stepped into the role of 
Remuneration Committee Chair, following 
the sudden death of the former 
Remuneration Committee Chair, George 
Adams. We were all saddened to hear this 
news. I would like to thank the members of 
the Committee, both past and present, for 
all their support and guidance. 

This report provides context and insight into 
our pay arrangements for Non-Executive 
Directors and Executive Directors including 
the assessment of FY22 performance and 
pay, and our focus on fairness of pay across 
the Group, as well as our plans for FY23.

We continue to strengthen our core 
business, focus on growing our market share 
and embed sustainability in every decision 
we make, all while operating as efficiently as 
possible. These ambitions and strategic 
priorities are reflected in our pay and 
incentive arrangements for the  
wider workforce. 

The team continued to react to challenging 
conditions (post COVID-19 impacts) and 
produced a strong financial result in the face 
of ongoing disruption to demand in our 
supply chain and cost inflation. In recognition 
of our teams’ hard work and resilience, in 
August 2021 we awarded a minimum 2% pay 
increase (excluding the Directors) and in 
August 2022 we awarded a minimum 3% 
increase in pay to all colleagues. This was in 
addition to a £400 (full time equivalent) 
one-off payment to all colleagues, to 
support the current cost of living crisis.

Voting outcome at last year’s Annual 
General Meeting (AGM) and 
communication with shareholders
Our Remuneration policy was approved by 
shareholders at the 2021 AGM. 

Prior to the AGM, George, our previous 
Remuneration Committee Chair,  
engaged with many of our shareholders  
to discuss changes we were looking to  
make and also to get their views on LTIP  
and bonus arrangements.

We received 79.8% approval for the 
Directors’ remuneration report. George 

84

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022then continued to communicate with 
shareholders post the AGM to understand 
the reasons for any votes against. After the 
AGM we reconfirmed our intention for 
Executive Director salary increases to be 
aligned to the wider workforce. We also 
committed to review the LTIP targets for 
awards vesting in 2025 and to incorporate an 
ESG element into the remuneration 
packages going forward. We have kept to 
this commitment and will be incorporating 
ESG into the annual incentive in FY23 as 
detailed below. 

FY22 incentives
The Executive Directors were eligible for 
annual bonus incentives with a maximum 
opportunity of 140% of salary. The annual 
bonus scheme is solely based on underlying 
EBITDA, and despite all the challenges faced 
we continued to deliver strong results. The 
threshold target for EBITDA was set at 
£44.0m and actual achievement was in 
excess of this at £48.4m. Therefore, the 
bonus will pay out at 48.1% of the maximum. 

Long-term incentives
The FY20 award is due to vest in October 
2022, however, the performance period 
ended 30 July 2022 and so the vesting 
percentage can be determined. The 
Remuneration Committee has applied 
judgement to calculate EPS using the 
original accounting basis, number of shares 
and statutory tax rate that applied at the 
date of grant; this results in an adjusted EPS 
of 33.8p. The award had a minimum EPS 
performance target of 31.6p before any 
award can vest; as such the EPS 
achievement has resulted in the award 
vesting at 48.2% of the maximum. 

Remuneration in FY23
The CEO and CFO have received increases 
of 3% of salary in line with the increases 

applied to the wider workforce. Benefit and 
pension provisions remain unchanged for 
the forthcoming year. 

The Committee has decided to incorporate 
ESG metrics in the form of employee 
engagement and waste reduction measures 
into the annual bonus. These metrics will 
account for 10% of the overall bonus with 
the remainder being subject to EBITDA 
targets. The maximum bonus opportunity 
for the CEO and CFO remains unchanged  
at 140% of salary. 

A strong senior leadership team is in place at 
ScS, selected to deliver our future growth 
plans. Long term incentives play a key role in 
the motivation and retention of this team. 
This is a resilient business with good 
prospects, however, recent economic 
factors, particularly the slow down in  
the housing market linked to mortgage 
costs and the real decline in consumer 
disposable income, have created some 
short-term uncertainty. 

As a consequence we want to review our 
long-term incentive targets, ensuring they 
are appropriately stretching and 
motivational. As part of this process we will 
consult with our executive remuneration 
advisers, to receive independent advice, and 
seek feedback from a range of our key 
shareholders before finalising our FY23 LTIP 
award. Our aim is to conclude this process by 
the end of November 2022. 

Fees for our Chairman and Non-Executive 
Directors remain unchanged for the 
forthcoming year. 

Colleague input
We have actively engaged with our 
colleagues from across the business 
through face to face feedback sessions, 

where they were able to openly raise any 
topics. These sessions, combined with our 
annual employee engagement survey, 
provided insight to help shape future People 
strategy for the business.

From March 2023, Carol Kavanagh will be 
taking the role of Remuneration Committee 
Chair; I will remain on the Committee as  
a member. 

On behalf of the Committee, I would like to 
thank shareholders for their input and 
engagement in the year, and we welcome 
any comments. I will be available at the 
Annual General Meeting in November to 
answer any questions you may have on  
this report.

Angela Luger
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
10 October 2022

Remuneration principles
The key aims of the Remuneration Policy 
are to:
•  Attract, retain and motivate  

high-calibre senior management;
•  Focus senior management on the 
delivery of the Group’s business 
objectives;

•  Promote a strong and sustainable 

performance culture;
• 
Incentivise profitable growth; and 
•  Align the interests of the Executive 

Directors and senior management with 
those of the shareholders. 

In promoting these objectives, the 
Committee’s aims are to implement the 
Remuneration Policy in a simple, 
transparent and understandable way, 
supporting the principles set out in 
Provision 40 of the 2018 UK Corporate 
Governance Code (‘the Code’):

Clarity

Simplicity

Risk

The Remuneration Policy is closely aligned to the business, purpose and 
strategy and has a clear link between performance and reward. 

The Policy has operated largely unchanged since IPO, with the most 
significant change being our formal commitment to align executive pension 
contribution with the wider workforce.

Performance targets are set to ensure the delivery of sustainable profitable 
growth and appropriate safeguards are in place to ensure that overall 
outcomes are aligned with underlying business performance and the 
stakeholder experience. 

Predictability

The range of possible rewards for variable pay are set and disclosed. 

Proportionality Remuneration levels are periodically benchmarked against other similar 

sized companies and actual rewards are closely linked to the delivery of the 
strategy and the long-term performance of the Company. 

Alignment to 
culture

The incentive schemes are focused on our strategy of sustainable profitable 
growth and are designed to encourage behaviours that are consistent with 
ScS’ purpose, culture and values. 

i

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
c
r
e
p
o
r
t

|

C
o
r
p
o
r
a
t
e
g
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

|

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

85
85

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ remuneration report continued

Annual remuneration report

Single figure table of total remuneration Executive Directors – audited
The audited table below shows the aggregate remuneration of the Directors of the Group 
during FY22 and FY21:

The Executive Directors received a car allowance which was as follows:
•  Steve Carson, CEO: £20,000
•  Chris Muir, CFO: £17,000

Salary1 
£

Benefits2
£

Bonus
£

LTIP3
£

Pension4
£

Total fixed 
remuneration
£

Total variable 
remuneration
£

Total
£

The Executive Directors are also provided with private medical insurance and life assurance 
that provides cover of up to four times taxable earnings. 

Steve Carson

FY22

FY21

Chris Muir

FY22

FY21

400,000

21,534 269,360

227,692

11,718 326,667

–

–

20,000

710,894

441,534

269,360

11,384

577,461

250,794

326,667

320,000

18,534 215,488 131,985

16,000

702,007

354,534

347,473

286,667

19,035 401,334 438,051

29,335 1,174,422

335,037

839,385

1.  Salary increase for Chris Muir effective from 1 January 2021. Steve Carson’s appointment effective from 6 January 2021.
2.  Taxable benefits of the Directors are discussed in detail below: Executive Directors received a car allowance and private 

medical insurance.

3.  Estimated value of the 2020 LTIP award, using the average of the closing mid-market share price in the three-month period 
ending 31 July 2022, being 160.9p. The value of the FY19 LTIP has been restated to reflect actual vesting of awards based on 
a share price of 268.0p on the date of vesting. The share price on the date of grant was 222.6p, therefore £65,567 of the 
CFO’s 2019 awards were due to share price appreciation. LTIP participants are not entitled to any dividends (or any other 
distribution) of shares subject to an award until the award vests. The value of the dividend equivalents paid on the CFO’s 2019 
award was £51,003, taken as shares (19,031 shares).

4.  Steve Carson and Chris Muir opt to receive part of their pension contributions as a cash allowance. The pension was aligned 

to that of the wider workforce (5%) for Chris Muir effective 1 January 2021.

Elements of remuneration
Salary
Steve Carson joined the Group as CEO in January 2021 on a basic salary of £400,000, which 
was reviewed and increased to £412,000 effective 1 August 2022. The basic salary of Chris 
Muir, CFO, was also reviewed based on the same principles and increased from £320,000 to 
£329,600 effective 1 August 2022. This is in line with the wider workforce basic salary increase.

Pension and other benefits – audited
Having reviewed our pension arrangements, Executive Directors are eligible to pension 
benefits equating to 5% of their basic salary, which are non-contributory. This change aligns to 
the pension rate applicable to the wider workforce. 

Steve Carson, CEO, received £4,000 of pension benefits and Chris Muir, CFO, received £3,458. 
The balance was paid as a cash allowance. 

86

Any new Executive Director appointments will have a pension contribution in line with that 
provided to the wider workforce. 

Annual bonus – audited
The Executive Directors were eligible to receive annual bonuses for performance in 2022 with 
a maximum bonus opportunity of 140% of salary. The annual bonus is solely based on 
underlying EBITDA* performance, which is adjusted for exceptional items. A pre-bonus 
EBITDA of £48.4m was above the minimum target set for the year; as a result, 48.1% of the 
maximum bonus opportunity was paid. The Committee considers that this fairly reflects  
the results for the year. The details of the targets and how the bonus was calculated are set  
out below:

Pre-bonus EBITDA

% maximum

Steve Carson

Chris Muir

£44.0m

12.5%

£70,000

£56,000

£48.7m

50%

£280,000

£224,000

£50.4m

75%

£420,000

£336,000

£52.2m

100%

£560,000

£448,000

*  Underlying EBITDA is defined in the alternative performance measures section on pages 46 to 47.

Long-term incentives
Awards vesting in 2022 – audited 
The LTIP granted on 14 October 2019, which vests in 2022, has exceeded the minimum 
performance conditions set (a minimum EPS of 31.6p) and will result in an award of 48.2% of 
maximum. The initial award provided vesting conditions on a straight-line basis between 25% 
and 100% based on an EPS in 2022 from 31.6p to 38.7p. 

The underlying EPS as reported under IFRS 16 for the year is 36.2p, which would result in 73.9% 
award under the terms of the LTIP. The Remuneration Committee are, however, conscious 
that the award was granted before transition to IFRS 16, at a time when there were 40,009,109 
shares in issue, and that the Group has benefited during the year from an effective tax rate 
lower than the rate assumed when setting the LTIP target.

As a consequence, the Remuneration Committee have recalculated EPS using the same 
accounting basis, number of shares and tax rate as at the date of the grant and based the 
vesting calculation on the adjusted EPS of 33.8p. As such, the award will vest at 48.2% of  
the maximum.

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Awards granted during the year – audited
During the year, the Executive Directors were granted a Long-Term Incentive Plan award with a 
face value of 150% of salary. The awards were made in the form of nil-cost options and were 
for 223,797 and 179,038 shares respectively for Steve Carson, CEO, and Chris Muir, CFO. The 
awards have a three-year vesting period, plus a two-year hold period. Details of the award are 
set out in the table below: 

Director

Alan Smith 

Ron McMillan

George Adams

Angela Luger

Steve Carson

Chris Muir

Max. award
(% of salary)

150%

150%

Max award1 
£

 £600,000

£480,000

No. shares

223,797

179,038

Performance 
measures

100% EPS

100% EPS

Holding period

2 years

2 years

1.  The 5 day average share price prior to the date of grant, 18 October 2021, was 268.1p.

As disclosed in last year’s Annual Report, the following EPS targets were applied:

EPS figure (in 2024) 

Less than 19.0p

19.0p

Percentage of award that vests

Nil

25%

Greater than 19.0p but less than 33.2p

Straight-line basis between 25% and 100%

33.2p

100%

The EPS targets of the FY20 and FY21 LTIP were set before taking into account the impact of 
IFRS 16 or changes in effective tax rate. Whilst we have all the data we require with regards to 
property and vehicle leases, the final impact of IFRS 16 will not be known until we reach the 
relevant year. Furthermore, specific differences between the effective and statutory tax rates 
would impact EPS, and can only be adjusted when they are known. The Committee, therefore, 
intends to adjust future EPS targets when these items have crystallised. The adjustment will 
purely be to reflect the technical changes created as a result of IFRS 16, share buybacks and 
differences in the effective and statutory tax rate and are not an amendment to the agreed 
targets per se.

All-employee share plans
The Group offers an all-employee UK Share Incentive Plan (SIP). All employees on completion 
of six months service become eligible to join. Under the SIP employees may elect to acquire up 
to £150 worth of shares in the Group every month or pay a maximum one-off lump sum of up 
to £1,800 in a tax year. 

The Executive Directors are eligible to participate in the SIP on the same basis as  
other employees.

Directors’ shareholding and share interests – audited
The table below sets out the number of shares held or potentially held by Directors (including 
connected persons or related parties where relevant) as at the financial year ended 30 July 2022.

Shares held beneficially

Unvested 

18,096

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Total

298,797

£480,734

578,763

£931,172

Steve Carson

Number 

Value at year end

Chris Muir

Number 

Value at year end

Shares 
held beneficially

Nil cost options  
subject to performance1

Option awards vested  
but unexercised2

75,000

£120,668

137,104

£220,587

223,797

£360,067

359,625

£578,601

–

–

82,034

£131,985

1.  Awards vest subject to EPS performance over a three-year period. This relates to awards granted in FY21 and FY22.
2.  Option awards vested (but unexercised) is inclusive of the FY20 EPS LTIP award and dividend equivalents.

The value of share interests at the year-end is based on the average share price in the three 
months ending on 30 July 2022 of 160.9p. There have been no changes to share interests as at 
the date of this report.

The Executive Directors are required to build and maintain a shareholding equivalent to 200% 
of base salary. The beneficial shareholding for Steve Carson and Chris Muir is currently 29.3% 
and 66.9% of salary respectively, but they are required to continue to build up a shareholding, 
which will be achieved by the retention of share options awarded under the LTIP.

Payments to past Directors – audited
David Knight left the Board on his retirement on 31 July 2021. He retired with the agreement of 
the Board and worked his full 12-month notice period. As such the Committee determined 
that he should be treated as a good leaver, and therefore his unvested conditional shares 
awarded under the FY20 and FY21 LTIPs will be time pro-rated to 31 July 2021. The LTIP award 
granted in FY19 vested in October 2021 at 89.3%, resulting in the award value of £562,033. The 
LTIP award granted in FY20 will vest in October 2022 at 48.2%, resulting in an award of 69,730 
shares (inclusive of dividend equivalents) with a value of £112,189 (using the average of the 
closing mid market share price in the three-month period ending 31 July 2022, being 160.9p). 
(FY21: none).

Payments for loss of office – audited
There were no payments to past directors in the year ended 30 July 2022. 
(FY21: payments to retiring CEO, David Knight).

87

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statements 
 
Directors’ remuneration report continued

Fees retained for external non-executive directorships
Executives may hold external non-executive directorships in non-competing businesses with 
the express consent of the Board. Fees may be retained for those roles with Board consent. 
There are no remunerated non-executive roles currently held by either the CEO or CFO.

Relative importance of the spend on pay
The table below shows the movement in spend on pay for all employees compared with the 
distributions to shareholders.

FY22 
£’000

FY21 
£’000

Total pay for employees

Distributions to shareholders

65,420

4,443

65,602

1,133

% Change

(0.3%)

292.1%

Performance graph and pay table
The chart below illustrates the Group’s Total Shareholder Return (TSR) performance against 
the performance of the FTSE Fledgling Index, from the date of the IPO of the Group. This index 
was selected as it represents a broad equity market index which includes companies of a 
comparable size. 

Steve Carson

FY22

FY211

David Knight

FY212

FY20

FY19

FY18

FY17

FY16

FY15

FY14

FY13

CEO single 
figure 
£

Annual bonus 
payment 
(% of maximum) 

LTIP vesting 
(% of maximum)

 710,894 

 577,461 

48.1%

100.0%

 1,382,077 

100.0%

 388,027 

 1,094,972 

 815,408 

 591,303 

 801,290 

 380,183 

557,786

587,375

0.0%

99.3%

99.8%

39.2%

100.0%

0.0%

42.3%

79.1%

N/A

N/A

89.3%

0.0%

56.3%

0.0%

0.0%

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

ScS

FTSE Fledgling Index

1.  Remuneration relates to seven months of employment. Shown for illustration only. Comparisons in this report to are made 

against David Knight’s full year remuneration. 

2.  David Knight’s FY21 single figure value has been restated to reflect actual vesting value of the FY19 LTIP award, based on a 

share price of 268.0p on the date of vesting.

27 Jan 2015

27Jul 2015

27 O ct 2015

27Jan 2016

27Jul 2016

27 O ct 2016

27Jan 2017

27Jul 2017

27 O ct 2017

27Jan 2018

27Jul 2018

27 O ct 2018

27Jan 2019

27Jul 2019

27 O ct 2019

27Jan 2020

27Jul2020

27 O ct2020

27Jan 2021

27Jul 2021

27 O ct 2021

27Jan 2022

27Jul 2022

Source: Datastream (Thomson Reuters).

This graph shows the value, by 30 July 2022, of £100 invested in ScS Group plc on 26 January 
2015 compared with the value of £100 invested in the FTSE Fledgling Index.

Changes in the remuneration of the CEO 

The Committee believes that the Remuneration Policy and remuneration structure clearly 
aligns with the Group’s strategic objectives and performance. The table shows the 
remuneration data for directors undertaking the role of CEO in the last 10 years.

88

Changes in the remuneration of the Directors
The table below shows the percentage changes in the Executive and Non-Executive Directors’ 
remuneration over the last 3 years, compared to the amounts for full-time employees of the 
Group for each of the following elements of pay:

Percentage change from FY21

Percentage change from FY20

Percentage change from FY19

Salary

Benefits

Bonus

Salary

Benefits

Bonus

Salary

Benefits

Bonus

Executive Directors

Steve Carson1

N/A

N/A

N/A 

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Chris Muir2

11.60% (2.6)% (46.3)% 19.40%

–

100%

Non-Executive Directors

Alan Smith

Ron McMillan

–

–

George Adams3

N/A

Angela Luger4

10.82%

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

–

–

–

–

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

–

–

–

–

–

2.30% (100)%

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Average per 
employee  
(excluding 
Directors)

8.8% (6.1)% (49.1)%

1.6% (10.6)% 

221%

1.2%

7.3% (56.3)%

)
d
e
s
a
b
e
R

(
n
r
u
t
e
R
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

l

l

a
t
o
T

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022 
 
 
 
1.  Steve Carson has had no increase in salary or benefits from FY21 to FY22, as he was appointed in January 2021.
2.  Chris Muir received a salary increase in January 2021. 
3.  George Adams received no change in salary, and no figures are provided as they do not provide a meaningful comparison as 

The table below provides the individual remuneration information in relation to our employees 
ranked at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentiles: 

full-year equivalent values.

4.  Angela Luger was appointed Chair of the Remuneration Committee during FY22 and therefore received an additional 

payment for this role for part of the year.

CEO pay ratio
The table below shows the ratio of CEO pay for FY22 comparing the sum of the single total 
figures of remuneration for Steve Carson to the full-time equivalent total reward of those 
colleagues whose pay is ranked at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentile in our UK workforce. 

Year

FY22

FY21

FY20

Method

25th percentile

50th percentile

75th percentile

Salary

Total pay and benefits

Salary

Total pay and benefits

Salary

Total pay and benefits

£19,898

£20,241

£17,213

£19,641

£17,601

£18,190

£25,549

£26,082

£24,483

£25,095

£24,259

£24,259

£33,381

£34,138

£27,898

£32,190

£19,727

£31,412

We have adopted Methodology Option A to calculate the ratio, as we believe it provides the 
best comparison of colleague pay with that of our CEO by using a consistent methodology to 
value remuneration and identify our employees ranked at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentiles.

Colleague pay was calculated based on actual pay and benefits for the 12 monthly payrolls in 
respect of the full financial year to 30 July 2022. We can confirm that none of the three 
individuals received additional or exceptional pay within the year and no adjustments were 
made to the calculation of the total remuneration for these employees from the methodology 
set out for the CEO’s single total figure remuneration. The ratios as set out below: 

Gender pay gap
The Group continues to focus on our people and have an opportunity to make improvements 
across a number of areas when it comes to our gender pay gap.

We are pleased that a number of senior females have been hired over the last two financial 
years and will continue to focus on female representation across all areas of our business. This 
will be a particular focus in retail.

Year

FY22 – Steve Carson

FY21 – David Knight1

FY20 – David Knight

Method

25th percentile

50th percentile

75th percentile

Option A

Option A

Option A

35:1

70:1

21:1

27:1

55:1

16:1

21:1

43:1

12:1

Our people-focused strategy projects include work focused on talent, reward and employer 
brand. This work will help us to make sure we’re supporting and representing our female 
colleagues at every level. Within our learning and development programmes, we will ensure a 
fair proportion of female colleagues are included to help provide a supportive environment to 
develop further. 

1.  David Knight’s FY21 single figure value has been restated to reflect actual vesting value of the FY19 LTIP award, based on a 

share price of 268.0p on the date of vesting.

The difference in the ratios from FY21 to FY22 is predominantly the result of the reduction in 
the CEO single figure value. The CEO was not eligible to receive an LTIP vest in FY22 due to his 
start date and the change in incumbent CEOs’. In addition, the FY22 annual bonus resulted in 
lower bonus payment, We anticipate further volatility in the CEO pay ratio over the next couple 
of years until the CEO LTIPs begin to vest on an annual basis.

As part of our ESG strategy, we will be reporting and monitoring numbers of females in 
management roles in retail, with the aim of increasing numbers by 25% by the end of FY23.

 For further information and to view the full report, please visit www.scsplc.co.uk

Remuneration of the Chairman and Non-Executive Directors – audited
The structure of Non-Executive Directors fees, and their levels, were set by the Board on 
admission. No review is expected during FY23. 

The fees of the Non-Executive Directors are set by the Board and take account of  
the chairmanship of Board Committees and the time and responsibility of the roles  
of each Director. 

89

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsDirectors’ remuneration report continued

The fees paid during FY22 to the Non-Executive Directors were as follows:

Alan Smith

Ron McMillan

Angela Luger

George Adams

FY22

FY21

£125,000

£125,000

£60,000

£55,410

£20,000

£60,000

£50,000

£60,000

Our Non-Executive Directors (excluding the Chair) have a base fee of £50,000. Ron McMillan, 
Angela Luger and George Adams each received an additional £10,000 per annum for chairing 
the Audit and Remuneration Committees respectively. Angela Luger was appointed as 
Remuneration Committee Chair on 12 January 2022. George Adams was paid to up to 
30 November 2021.

There were no other amounts disclosable for the Non-Executive Directors for the year. 

The remaining 90% of the bonus is based on the achievement of stretching EBITDA targets. 
The Committee does not disclose the EBITDA targets in advance as they are commercially 
sensitive. Retrospective disclosure of the EBITDA targets will be included in next year’s report. 

Long-term incentives
Due to economic uncertainty, which is having a substantial impact on the housing market, we 
are reviewing the long-term incentive targets for our senior leadership team to ensure they are 
appropriately stretching and motivational. As part of this process we will receive independent 
advice on executive remuneration, and seek feedback from a range of our key shareholders 
before finalising our FY23 LTIP award. Our aim is to conclude this process by the end of 
November 2022. 

The Remuneration Committee intends that the FY23 grants would be maintained at the 
normal levels (150% of base salary for the Executive Directors). However, the Committee has 
full discretion, under the plan rules, to ensure that the final vesting outcomes are justified 
based on the performance of the Group, including consideration of any windfall gains.

Implementation of the Remuneration Policy in FY23

Chairman and Non-Executive Director fees
Fees for the Chairman and Non-Executive Directors remain unchanged as below. 

Salary, pension and other benefits 
As anticipated, increases in FY23 were aligned to that of the wider workforce with average 
increases of 3%. The current basic salaries as at 10 October 2022 are:
•  Steve Carson: £412,000
•  Chris Muir: £329,600 

Role

Chairman

Non-Executive Directors base fee

Audit and Remuneration Committee Chair

Fee

£125,000

£50,000

£10,000

The Executive Directors will continue to receive pension contributions of 5% of salary in line 
with the rate available for the wider workforce. They will also continue to receive a car 
allowance, private medical insurance and life assurance. 

Approach for FY23 annual bonus
For FY23, the maximum bonus opportunity is unchanged at 140% of base salary for both the 
CEO and CFO. 

To further align with the strategy, the Committee has proposed to introduce non-financial 
ESG performance measures into the bonus with a total weighting of 10%. The measures are:
•  Social – employee engagement 
  Measured via an independent colleague engagement survey, the measure is to increase the 
colleague positive response to the statement ‘ScS takes a genuine interest in my wellbeing’ 
Target score of 65 before the end of FY23 (Scored 62 in FY21).

•  Environmental – Waste reduction across the business 
  Target of a 5% reduction on waste volume to landfill. 

Remuneration Committee
The members of the Committee for the 2022 financial year were Angela Luger (Committee 
Chair from January 2022, previously a Committee member), George Adams (Committee Chair 
until November 2021), Alan Smith and Ron McMillan. All of the current members are 
independent Non-Executive Directors. 

The responsibilities of the Committee are set out in the Corporate Governance section of the 
Annual Report on pages 71 to 72.

The Committee may invite the Executive Directors or other members of the senior 
management team to attend meetings and assist the Committee in its deliberations as 
appropriate. No person is present during any deliberations relating to their own remuneration 
or involved in determining their own remuneration. During the course of the year, Steve 
Carson, Chris Muir, and Lucy Clough, People Director, were in attendance as required. 

90

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022The attendance of members of the Committee at meetings was as follows:

Member and meetings attended in FY22

Member since Meetings attended

This report has been approved by the Board of Directors of the Group and signed on behalf of 
the Board by:

Angela Luger

George Adams (until November 2021)

Alan Smith

Ron McMillan

2019

2015

2014

2014

3

1

4

4

Angela Luger
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
10 October 2022

Advisors to the Committee
During the year, the Committee received independent advice on executive remuneration 
matters from Mercer Ltd.

Mercer Ltd are members of the Remuneration Consultants Group and, as such, voluntarily 
operate under the code of conduct in relation to executive remuneration consulting in the UK. 
The Committee has received advice provided by Mercer Limited during the year and is 
comfortable that they have been objective and independent. Total fees received by Mercer 
Limited in relation to remuneration advice provided to the Committee during FY22 amounted 
to £14,000, excluding VAT, based on the required time commitment. 

Shareholder voting
At the AGM on 26 November 2021, the total number of shares issued with voting rights was 
38,012,655. The resolution to approve the Annual remuneration report from the 2021 AGM 
and the resolution to approve the Remuneration Policy from the 2021 AGM received the 
following votes from shareholders.

Resolution

Votes for

Percentage  
of votes cast 
in favour

Votes  
against

Percentage 
of votes 
cast against

Votes 
withheld

Total votes 
cast

Percentage of 
issued share 
capital voted 

To approve the Annual 
remuneration report 
(2021 AGM)

To approve the 

Remuneration Policy 
(2021 AGM)

21,011,956

79.8% 5,331,618

20.2% 2,383  26,343,574

69.4%

21,118,213

80.2% 5,225,361

19.8% 2,383  26,343,574

69.4%

91

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsRemuneration Policy report 

Remuneration Policy overview
Total remuneration packages for the Executive Directors established at the time of the IPO will 
provide the basis for the structure of Director Remuneration for the Group. Variable elements 
of reward including performance-based annual bonuses and long-term incentives will form a 
significant part of the overall remuneration package for Executive Directors and senior 
management. 

How the views of shareholders are taken into account 
The Committee recognises that developing a dialogue with shareholders is constructive and 
informative in developing and applying the Remuneration Policy. The Committee monitors the 
feedback received from shareholders during the year, feedback was pro actively sought and 
shareholders accounting for over 69% of total equity responded. The Committee takes into 
account the best practice guidance issued by institutional shareholders and their 
representative bodies.

The Directors’ Remuneration Policy 
The Directors’ Remuneration Policy was last approved by shareholders at the 2021 AGM and is 
due to be renewed at the 2024 AGM. This report has been prepared on behalf of, and has been 
approved by, the Board. It complies with The Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups 
(Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013. 

The most significant changes made last year are our formal commitment to reduce executive 
pension contribution rates to align more closely to the wider workforce rate and the 
implementation of bonus deferral when it is felt appropriate to do so. 

Remuneration element

Purpose

Operation

Maximum

Performance measures 

This is the basic pay and 
reflects the individual’s role, 
responsibilities and 
contribution to the Group; 
critical to help attract and 
retaining the right talent.

Base salaries are reviewed annually with changes typically taking effect from the 
beginning of the relevant financial year. When reviewing, consideration is given 
by the Committee to a range of factors, including the Group’s overall 
performance, market conditions and individual responsibility of executives and 
the level of salary increases given to employees across the Group. Higher 
increases may be awarded where there has been an increase in responsibility. 

Base salaries will be benchmarked 
periodically against companies  
that are both main and AIM listed,  
who are of a similar size, sector  
and complexity.

N/A

To provide benefits which 
are valued by the individual 
and assist them in carrying 
out their duties and to 
support wellness and 
engagement.

If a new Executive Director’s salary is set on appointment below the median 
market rate, phased increases (as a percentage of salary) above those granted 
generally to other employees may be awarded subject to the individual’s 
performance and development. 

The Group will provide market competitive benefits, which may periodically be 
reviewed. Executives will generally be eligible to receive those benefits on similar 
terms to other senior executives and those available to the broader workforce.

Executives are entitled to a car allowance or a company car, car insurance, other 
running costs and fuel, death in service life assurance, private medical care and 
any other Group-wide benefits including employee discount. Business travel 
and associated hospitality are provided in the normal course of business.

The Committee has the discretion to add or remove benefits to remain market 
competitive or to meet the needs of the business including where new benefits 
are introduced for the wider workforce. In addition, where the Committee 
considers it appropriate to do so, additional relocation expenses may be paid.

Salaries will generally be set at the 
mid-market levels; however, the 
Committee remains mindful of the 
need to attract, recruit and retain 
talent within the team.

No explicit maximum. We ensure that 
benefits offered are in line with the 
market and review their cost from 
time to time in the context of the 
wider workforce provision.

N/A

Base salary

Benefits

92

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022 
Remuneration element

Purpose

Operation

Maximum

Performance measures 

Pension

Bonus

To provide a market 
competitive pension 
contribution (or equivalent 
cash allowance).

To provide an incentive 
linked to the financial 
performance of the Group 
and any other appropriate 
individual or business 
measures.

Deferral provides further 
alignment to shareholders’ 
long-term interests for 
achievement of stretching 
targets.

Executive Directors may take pension benefits as a contribution to defined 
contribution personal pension plans or receive cash in lieu.

Bonuses are normally paid in cash. Payments are made subject to meeting 
pre-determined targets set at the start of the year and approved by the 
Committee. 

Malus and clawback rules apply to cash and deferred awards; see explanatory 
notes for more information. 

The Committee will consider the introduction of bonus deferral arrangements 
for any bonus earned in excess of 100% of salary.

N/A

A total maximum value of 5%, which 
aligns closely to the workforce rate. 
The Committee reserves the right to 
increase the rate if changes are made 
for the workforce – no such increase is 
planned at the present time.

The current annual bonus potential 
for the CEO and CFO is 140% of base 
salary. The threshold bonus levels will 
be no more than 25% of their 
respective maxima. As the 
regulations require a formal cap for a 
three-year period, future bonus 
potential will only increase where 
appropriate against market data and, 
in any event, will be subject to an 
overall maximum of 200% of salary 
for any Executive Director.

The Committee intends for the majority of the 
bonus to be based on financial measures, but has 
the discretion to introduce operational, corporate, 
divisional and/or individual performance measures 
if appropriate to the business including measures 
relating to the Group’s ESG objectives.

Performance conditions, once set, will generally 
remain unaltered, but the Committee has the right 
in its absolute discretion to make adjustments 
during any performance period to reflect any 
events arising which were unforeseen when the 
performance conditions were originally set by the 
Committee, for example, related to transactions. 
Any amended targets should be no more or less 
difficult to achieve than the original targets were 
considered to be when set.

Long-term incentives 

To align the Directors with 
the long-term performance 
of the business and the 
returns received by 
shareholders.

Awards may be made annually as options (including nil cost options) or as 
conditional share awards based on performance conditions. The Committee 
may set performance conditions typically over a three-year period.

The current intention is to use conditional shares or nil cost options for awards.

The policy is to award Executive 
Directors nil cost share options 
equating to no more than 150% of 
their basic salary in respect of each 
financial year.

Performance is normally based on earnings per 
share targets, but different measures and targets 
may be used alongside or instead of earnings per 
share for future awards at the discretion of  
the Committee.

Dividend equivalents will be made as either a cash payment or delivery of plan 
shares in an amount equal in value to the dividends that would have been payable 
on the number of vested plan shares under the award in respect of the period 
between the award date and the date on which the award vested or, where the 
award is an option and a holding period applies, to the date of expiry of the 
holding period or exercise (if earlier).

A two-year post-vesting holding period shall apply to LTIP awards granted to 
Executive Directors and may apply (at the discretion of the Committee) in 
relation to LTIP awards granted to others.

Malus and clawback rules apply to vested awards; see explanatory notes for 
more information.

No more than 25% of an award can be 
earned for a threshold performance.

Performance conditions, once set, will generally 
remain unaltered, but the Committee has the right 
in its absolute discretion to substitute or vary the 
performance conditions during any performance 
period in case of events arising which were 
unforeseen when the performance conditions were 
first set by the Committee, provided that such 
substitution or variation is reasonable and produces 
a fairer measure of performance and is not 
materially less difficult to satisfy.

93

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsRemuneration Policy report continued

Remuneration element

Purpose

Operation

Maximum

Performance measures 

Shareholding guidelines

Executive Directors are 
expected to maintain their 
minimum shareholding 
levels once they have  
been obtained.

The Committee will review shareholding annually against the Policy. The 
Committee reserves the right to alter the shareholding guidelines during the 
period of the Policy but without making the guidelines any less onerous overall.

Employee share plan

To encourage share 
ownership by employees 
and participation in the 
long-term success of the 
Group, the Group operates 
an employee share 
incentive plan for UK 
employees which was 
adopted in April 2015.

Executive Directors can participate in the employee Share Incentive Plan (SIP) 
on the same terms as other employees of the Group in the UK.

Executive Directors will also be eligible to participate in any replacement  
or new all employee share plan that is introduced on the same terms as  
other employees. 

N/A

The minimum required level of 
shareholding is 200% of base salary of 
the relevant Executive Director. We 
encourage Executive Directors to 
meet this requirement within five 
years of the date of appointment. 

N/A

Executive Directors are expected to 
retain vested LTIP awards (after tax) 
until the minimum shareholding level 
is attained. 

Under the rules of the SIP employees 
can purchase shares from their 
pre-tax and pre-national insurance 
salary through a resident SIP trust. 
Although the Group has no current 
intention to do so, the Group may also 
award matching shares (in proportion 
to the number of shares an employee 
chooses to purchase), or make an 
award of free shares.

The maximum amount that can be 
purchased, offered as a match or 
awarded for free under the SIP is 
subject to the published HMRC 
annual limits.

Payment of statutory entitlements and settlement of claims
The Group may pay any statutory entitlements to which an Executive Director is entitled, or 
settle or compromise any claims made in connection with the termination of employment of 
the Executive Director where the Committee considers such claims to have a reasonable 
prospect of success and that it is in the best interests of the Group to do so.

Remuneration Policy and other employees
As well as the Executive Directors, other senior management will also participate in the 
performance-based annual incentive. Around 82% of our colleagues are eligible for either a 
sales commission or bonus, based broadly on the same metrics of sales and profit as the 
Executive Directors. A small group of senior management also participates in the Long-Term 
Incentive Plan for performance share awards.

The Group is committed to widespread share ownership. The Group employee SIP, which was 
adopted prior to admission, has been launched. Under the SIP, Executive Directors are eligible 
to participate on a basis consistent with all other employees. Currently, 63 employees 
participate in the scheme.

In setting the Remuneration Policy going forward, the Committee will also have regard to pay 
structures across the broader Group. The Committee takes into account the general base 
salary increase for the broader workforce when undertaking annual salary reviews for the 
Executive Directors and will consider consultation with the wider workforce should it be felt 
appropriate to do so.

94

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Operation of variable pay
Annual incentive plan
The Committee will set the performance targets annually under the annual incentive plan to 
take account of the Group’s strategic plan and financial performance. The performance 
targets are set by the Committee based on a range of factors including against the budget for 
the financial year. The metrics adopted by the Committee and the weighting of them may vary 
in relation to the Group’s strategy each year. 

The Committee sets a threshold on-target and maximum pay-out target under the plan.

Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)
The Committee will regularly review the performance targets in relation to the LTIP to take 
account of the Group’s strategic plan and financial performance. Targets will be set by the 
Committee at the time of the grant of each award. 

The Committee will operate the scheme in accordance with the plan rules which were 
approved by shareholders in January 2015. Under the plan rules the Committee has authority 
to vary the terms of an existing award in certain circumstances. This includes the ability to:
•  Settle awards in cash in extremis;
•  Make adjustments to the number of shares, in the event of a change in the share capital 

of the Group; and

•  Permit the early vesting of awards in the event of a change in control of the Group or, if 
appropriate to do so, on cessation of employment (see policy on service contracts and 
payments for loss of office). 

Clawback
The annual incentive plan and the LTIP rules include provisions for malus and clawback within a 
three-year period following payment or vesting if the Committee concludes that there has 
been a material misstatement of financial results; an error has been made in assessing any 
performance targets; conduct of the individual amounts to fraud or gross misconduct; events 
or behaviour of the individual leads to censure of the Group by a regulatory authority which has 
an impact on the reputation of the Group which justifies clawback being operated; or where 
the Committee discovers information from which it concludes that a bonus or award was paid 
or vested to a greater extent than it should have been. Malus and clawback provisions have 
applied to awards made since January 2015.

Potential reward scenarios
The graphs opposite show an estimate of the Executive Directors’ remuneration package as it 
will be implemented for FY23. 

Assumptions
•  The minimum scenario reflects fixed remuneration only which is base salary, pension  

and benefits. 

•  The on-target scenario reflects the fixed remuneration plus 50% of the maximum annual 
bonus under the annual incentive plan, which is 140% of base salary, and 25% vesting 
under the LTIP being the threshold level (assuming an award of 150% of salary to 
Executive Directors under the LTIP).

•  The maximum scenario reflects fixed remuneration plus 100% of the maximum annual 
bonus under the annual incentive plan, which is 140% of base salary and 100% vesting 
under the LTIP (assuming an award of 150% of salary under the LTIP). 

•  The maximum plus scenario is the same above but shows the impact of a 50% increase in 
the share price on the value of the LTIP award (the on-target and maximum scenarios 
exclude the impact of share price increase). 

Steve Carson (Chief Executive Officer)

Chris Muir (Chief Financial Officer)

£’000

2,000

1,500

1,000

500

0

1,957,934

47%

1,648,934
37%

29%

35%

897,034
17%
32%

23%

28%

51%

454,134
100%

Maximum 
plus

Maximum On-target Minimum

Base

Bonus

LTIP

£’000

2,000

1,500

1,000

500

0

1,567,654
47%

1,320,454
37%

29%

35%

718,934
17%
32%

23%

28%

51%

364,614
100%

Maximum 
plus

Maximum On-target Minimum

Discretions retained by the Committee in operating variable pay schemes
The Committee operates the Group’s various incentive plans according to their respective 
rules and (in the case of the SIP in accordance with relevant legislation and HMRC guidance. In 
order to ensure efficient administration of these plans, certain operational discretions are 
reserved to the Committee. These include:
•  Determining who may participate in the plans;
•  Determining the timing of grants of awards and/or payments under the plans;
•  Determining the quantum of any awards and/or payments (within the limits set out in the 

• 

Policy table above);
In exceptional circumstances, determining that a share-based award shall be settled (in 
full or in part) in cash;

•  Determining the performance measures and targets applicable to an award (in 

accordance with the statements made in the Policy table above);

•  Where a participant ceases to be employed by the Group or relocates abroad, 

determining whether ‘good leaver’ status shall apply;

95

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsRemuneration Policy report continued

•  Determining the extent of vesting of an award based on assessment of the performance 
conditions, including discretion as to the basis on which performance is to be measured if 
an award vests in advance of normal timetable (on cessation of employment as a ‘good 
leaver’ or on the occurrence of corporate events);

•  Whether, and to what extent, pro ration shall apply in the event of cessation of 
employment as a ‘good leaver’ or on the occurrence of corporate events;

•  Whether malus and/or clawback shall be applied to any award and, if so, the extent to 

which they shall apply; and

•  Making appropriate adjustments to awards on account of certain events, such as major 

changes in the Group’s capital structure.

Recruitment and promotions
The remuneration package for a new Executive Director would be set in accordance with the 
terms of the Group’s Remuneration Policy at the time of the appointment. 

Additionally, on appointment of any new Executive Director (whether by external recruitment 
or internal promotion) the Remuneration Policy will permit the following:
•  Variable pay will be capped at the limits set out in the Policy for existing Directors. 
•  On pensions, the intention is to limit the pension provision (provided either through a 

Company contribution to a defined contribution scheme or paid as a cash allowance in 
lieu of pension) to the same level as the wider workforce for all new Executive Directors 
and members of the senior management team. 

•  The Group may compensate a new Executive Director for amounts forgone from the 

individual’s former employer in addition to ongoing remuneration provided under the Policy 
(as permitted under Listing Rules) taking account of the amount forfeited, the extent of any 
performance conditions, the nature of the award and the time period for vesting. 

•  The annual incentive plan would operate in accordance with its terms pro-rated for the 

period of employment, and depending on the appointment timing, different performance 
targets might be set as the Committee considers appropriate.

•  On an internal appointment, any variable pay element awarded in respect of the 

individual’s former role would be allowed to pay out according to its terms, with any 
relevant adjustment to take account of the appointment. Any other ongoing 
remuneration obligations existing prior to the appointment would also continue. 

•  On any appointment, the Committee may agree that the Group will meet any appropriate 

relocation expenses. 

An Executive Directors’ service contract can also be terminated without notice or payment of 
compensation except for pay accrued up to the termination date on the occurrence of certain 
events such as gross misconduct. 

Payment in lieu of notice equal to the base salary only for the unexpired period of notice can be 
paid under the Executive Directors’ service agreements.

Ordinarily, an Executive Director shall not be entitled to receive any benefits or allowances 
following their cessation of employment. However, the Committee may in exceptional 
circumstances allow an Executive Director to continue to receive appropriate benefits  
or allowances (such as reasonable outplacement or legal fees) for a limited period  
following cessation. 

There are no enhanced provisions on a change of control under the Executive Directors’ 
service contracts. Should a change of control event occur then awards under the bonus and 
long-term incentive plans shall become payable as soon as practicable after the event date. 
The awards will be pro-rated to reflect the extent to which the relevant performance targets 
have been met at the date of the relevant event, and on a time-apportioned basis, although 
the Committee has discretion to disapply time-apportionment if it considers it appropriate  
to do so.

Any new contracts will be on similar terms.

The service contracts of the Executive Directors are available for inspection at the registered 
office of the Company. 

Annual bonus on termination
There is no contractual entitlement to annual bonus on termination or if an Executive Director 
is under notice. Under the annual incentive plan, the Committee has absolute discretion to 
permit a bonus to be paid to a ‘good leaver’ based on the full or part-year performance, subject 
to consideration by the Committee. A full or pro-rata time-based bonus may be awarded, and 
this may be paid either at or before the normal payment date. 

Good leavers include individuals who leave due to ill health, death or redundancy, or in other 
circumstances at the discretion of the Committee. 

Service contract and payments for loss of office
Main provisions on termination
The service contract for the CEO is indefinite but terminable either by the Company or the 
CEO on 9 months’ notice. The service contract for the CFO is indefinite but terminable either 
by the Company or the CFO on 12 months’ notice. The service contract for the CEO is dated 
24 November 2020 and for the CFO, 8 January 2016.

Performance share plans on termination
Share-based awards made under the Group’s share plans are governed by the relevant plan 
rules. Under the rules of the LTIP, unvested awards shall ordinarily lapse on the individual giving 
or being given notice of termination of employment, except in certain prescribed ‘good leaver’ 
scenarios. Good leavers include individuals who leave due to retirement, ill health, death or 
redundancy, or in other circumstances at the discretion of the Committee. 

96

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022In determining the extent of any vesting, the Committee will take into account the 
achievement of any applicable performance targets. A pro-rata reduction would normally be 
applied on a time-apportioned basis, although the Committee has discretion to disapply this 
requirement in exceptional circumstances if it considers it appropriate to do so. Awards will 
typically vest at the usual date but early vesting of outstanding awards may be permitted at the 
discretion of the Committee.

Awards which may have vested before giving or receiving notice of termination of  
employment remain exercisable for a period of six months after leaving or (if later) the  
expiry of any holding period which the award was subject to. The Committee has the  
discretion to extend this period. 

Chair and Non-Executive Directors
Fees
The level and structure of fees for the Non-Executive Directors was set by the Board from 
admission. The fees of the Non-Executive Directors are set by the Board taking account of the 
chairmanship of Board Committees and the time and responsibility of the roles of each of 
them. The fees are paid in cash. The Committee has responsibility for determining fees paid to 
the Chair of the Board. All fees are subject to the aggregate fee cap for Directors in the Articles 
of Association, which is currently £400,000 per annum. 

Details of the fees paid to the Non-Executive Directors are set out in the Directors’ 
remuneration report. The Chair and the Non-Executive Directors are entitled to be 
reimbursed for all expenses reasonably incurred by them in the performance of their  
duties. The Chair and Non-Executive Directors do not participate in any bonus or share  
plans of the Company.

The Non-Executive Directors do not have service contracts. They are appointed for an initial 
three-year period subject to being re-elected by members annually.

Remuneration 
element

Non-Executive 
Directors’ fees

Purpose

Operation

Helps recruit 
and retain high 
quality, 
experienced 
individuals.

Reflects time 
commitment 
and role.

The level and structure of fees was set by the Board at 
admission. The fees consist of an annual basic fee plus 
additional fees paid for the chairmanship of Board 
Committees. Limited benefits relating to travel and 
accommodation may be provided in relation to the 
performance of any Director’s duties.

Non-Executive Directors’ fees are set by the Executive 
Directors with reference to external data on fee levels in 
similar businesses, having taken account of the 
responsibilities of individual Directors and their expected 
annual time commitment.

Maximum

The aggregate 
amount of 
Directors’ fees is 
limited by the 
Group’s Articles 
of Association.

Letters of appointment
Alan Smith and Ron McMillan have letters of appointment dated 22 October 2014 for an  
initial period of three years and are subject to three months’ notice of termination by either 
side at any time and subject to annual re-appointment as a Director by the shareholders. 
Angela Luger’s letter of appointment is dated 16 May 2019. Alan Smith and Ron McMillan  
were re-appointed for a further term of three years commencing 22 October 2020. George 
Adams was re-appointed for a further term of three years commencing 9 July 2021, but  
sadly passed suddenly in November 2022. Carol Kavanagh’s letter of appointment is dated 
26 September 2022.

The appointment letters provide that no other compensation is payable on termination. 

Insurance
All of the members of the Board have the benefit of Directors and Officers Liability Insurance 
which gives them cover for legal action which may arise against them personally.

97

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsDirectors’ report

Activities and results
The Directors present their Annual Report, together with the audited consolidated financial 
statements for the year ended 30 July 2022. ScS is one of the UK’s leading furniture and 
flooring retailers, operating from 98 ScS stores principally located in modern retail park 
locations across the country.

Management report
The Directors’ report, together with the Strategic report, set out on pages 1 to 61, form part  
of the Management report for the purposes of Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rule 
(DTR) 4.1.5R.

Statutory information contained elsewhere in the Annual Report 
As permitted by legislation, the Group has chosen to include certain matters in its Strategic 
report that would otherwise be required to be included in the Directors’ report, as the Board 
considers them to be of strategic importance. The Strategic report can be found on  
pages 1 to 61. 

Other information that is relevant to the Directors’ report, and which is incorporated by 
reference into this report, can be located as follows:

Information

Future developments

Colleague engagement

Stakeholder engagement

Greenhouse gas emissions

Section 172 statement

Risk and risk management

Viability statement 

Going concern

Corporate governance statement

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities 

Post balance sheet events

98

Page(s)

14 to 19

27 to 28

27 to 31

37 to 38

40 to 41

48 to 49

60 to 61

113 to 114

64 to 74

102

Not applicable

Disclosures required pursuant to Listing Rule 9.8.4R can be found on the following pages:

Listing Rule

Listing Rule requirement

Interest capitalised by the Group and any related  
tax relief

Disclosure 

Not applicable

9.8.4(1)

9.8.4(2)

9.8.4(4)

9.8.4(5)

9.8.4(6)

9.8.4(7)

9.8.4(8)

9.8.4(9)

9.8.4(10)

9.8.4(11)

9.8.4(12)

9.8.4(13)

9.8.4(14)

Unaudited financial information (LR 9.2.18R)

Strategic report, page 1 to 61

Long-term incentive schemes (LR 9.4.3R)

Directors’ waivers of emoluments

Directors’ waivers of future emoluments

Non pre-emptive issues of equity for cash

Non pre-emptive issues for cash by any unlisted major 
subsidiary undertaking

Parent company participation in a placing by a  
listed subsidiary

Contract of significance in which a Director is or was 
materially interested

Contract of significance between the Company (or 
one of its subsidiaries) and a controlling shareholder

Directors’ remuneration report, 
pages 86 to 87

Not applicable

Not applicable

Not applicable

Not applicable

Not applicable

Not applicable

Not applicable

Waiver of dividends by a shareholder

Waiver of future dividends by a shareholder

Directors’ report, page 99

Directors’ report, page 99

Board statement in respect of relationship agreement 
with the controlling shareholder

Not applicable

Non-financial information statement
In addition to the above referenced sections of the Annual Report, the Section 172 statement 
and non-financial information sections of the Annual Report set out on pages 40 to 41 are 
intended to help stakeholders understand the Group’s development, performance and impact 
of its activities, information relating to the environment, employee, social, respect for human 
rights, anti-corruption and anti-bribery matters in accordance with the non-financial reporting 
requirements contained in sections 414CA and 414CB of the Companies Act 2006.

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Results and dividend 
The financial statements set out the Group’s results for the year ended 30 July 2022 and are 
contained in pages 109 to 130. The Group’s profit after tax for the financial year ended 30 July 
2022 of £13.6m (2021: £19.1m) is reported in the consolidated statement of comprehensive 
income on page 109. 

The Group continues to maintain a strong balance sheet which, coupled with the strategic 
progress to date provides further confidence in the Group’s future and as a consequence the 
Board announced an interim dividend of 4.5p per share paid in May 2022. The Board is also 
recommending a final dividend of 9.0p per ordinary share which, together with the interim 
dividend, results in a full-year dividend of 13.5p. This dividend, if approved, will be paid on 
9 December 2022 to shareholders on the register on 11 November 2022. The ex-dividend  
date is 10 November 2022.

Movements in reserves are shown in the consolidated statement of changes in equity  
on page 111.

Articles of Association
The Company’s Articles of Association may only be amended by special resolution at a general 
meeting of the shareholders. 

Share capital
Details of the Company’s issued share capital are shown in note 9 to the financial statements 
on page 136.

The Company has one class of ordinary shares which carry no fixed income. Each share carries 
the right to one vote at general meetings. The ordinary shares are listed on the Official List and 
are traded on the London Stock Exchange. No person has any special rights over the 
Company’s share capital and all issued shares are fully paid. There are no restrictions on voting 
rights or the transfer of securities in the Company and the Directors are not aware of any 
agreements between holders of the Company’s shares that may result in such restrictions.

Details of outstanding employee share options and the operation of relevant schemes are 
shown in note 21 to the financial statements on pages 126 to 128. 

Share buyback programme
On 22 March 2022, the Company announced the commencement of a share buyback 
programme with a value of up to £7m. The purpose of the share buyback programme is  
to return capital to shareholders. During the year the Company bought back 1,317,140  
ordinary shares with a nominal value of £0.001 each through market purchases on the  
London Stock Exchange. This represents 3.6% of the issued share capital of the Company  
as at 30 July 2022. The total consideration paid for the shares was £2,281,000 and associated 
expenses totalled £36,000. All shares purchased under the share buyback programme are 
subsequently cancelled.

Employee benefit trust
The Company established the ScS Group plc Employee Benefit Trust (EBT) with Sanne 
Fiduciary Services Limited as the Trustees in Jersey in January 2015. The purpose of the EBT 
continues to be to hold shares in trust in connection with the Group’s share incentive schemes. 
During the financial year to 30 July 2022, the Trust purchased 624,453 ordinary shares of 0.1 
pence each in the Group at an average price of 236.4 pence per ordinary share, and 554,204 
ordinary shares were used to satisfy management incentive awards. The EBT has waived any 
dividends which it may be entitled to receive in respect of ordinary shares held by it and has also 
agreed to waive voting rights to such shares. 327,663 ordinary shares in the Company 
remained held as treasury shares at 30 July 2022. 

Significant agreements – change of control
The Group is not party to any significant agreements that would take effect, alter or terminate 
upon a change in control of the Company following a takeover. The Directors are not aware of 
any agreements between any member of the Group and its Directors and employees that 
provide for compensation for loss of office or employment that occurs following a takeover 
bid, except that provisions of the Group’s share plans may cause options and awards granted 
under such plans to vest on a takeover.

99

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsDirectors’ report continued

Directors and their interests
Details of the Directors of the Company as at 30 July 2022 are shown on pages 62 to 63 and 
their interests in shares and share awards made to them under share incentive schemes in 
respect of the Company’s shares are shown in the Directors’ remuneration report on page 87, 
all of which form part of this report. Subsequent to 30 July 2022, Carol Kavanagh was 
appointed to the Board on 26 September 2022.

Directors’ indemnities
As permitted by the Company’s Articles of Association, the Directors have the benefit of  
an indemnity which is applicable in certain circumstances. The Company also purchased  
and maintains Directors’ and Officers’ liability insurance. Both the insurance and indemnities 
applied throughout the financial year ended 30 July 2022 and through to the date of  
this report.

The Directors of the Company who were in office during the year and up to the date of signing 
the financial statements unless otherwise stated were:

Alan Smith 
George Adams 

Non-Executive Chair
Non-Executive Director (appointment terminated  
following his death on 30 November 2021) 
Non-Executive Director
Non-Executive Director 

Ron McMillan 
Angela Luger 
Carol Kavanagh   Non-Executive Director (appointed on 26 September 2022)
Steve Carson  
Chris Muir 

Chief Executive Officer
Chief Financial Officer

Subject to provisions of the Companies Act 2006, the Company’s Articles of Association, and 
to any directions given by special resolution, the business of the Company shall be managed by 
the Board, which may exercise all the powers of the Company.

Appointment and replacement of Directors
The appointment and replacement of Directors is governed by the Company’s Articles of 
Association, the UK Corporate Governance Code, the Companies Act 2006 and related 
legislation. All the Directors will seek re-election at the Annual General Meeting (AGM). A 
Director may be appointed by ordinary resolution of the shareholders or by the Board. The 
Board may from time to time appoint a Director to fill a vacancy or as an additional Director, 
provided that the individual seeks election at the next AGM.

100

Employment policies
The Group’s policy is to actively involve its employees in the business and to ensure that 
matters of concern to them, including the aims and objectives and the financial and economic 
factors which impact thereon, are communicated in an open and regular manner. 

The Group is committed to providing equality of opportunity to employees and potential 
employees. This applies to recruitment, training, career development and promotion for all 
employees, regardless of disability (including colleagues who may have become disabled 
during service), gender, sexual orientation, pregnancy or maternity, race, religion or age. See 
page 76 for more information on our diversity and inclusion policy. 

All of our applicants and colleagues are treated fairly and we have a zero-tolerance approach, 
not only to harassment but also to discrimination and bullying of any kind. Full and fair 
consideration is given to employment applications by disabled persons wherever suitable 
opportunities exist, having regard to their particular aptitudes and abilities. Training and career 
development support is provided where appropriate. Should an employee become disabled, 
efforts are made to ensure their continued employment with the Group, with re-training being 
provided if necessary.

We also encourage colleagues to become involved in the financial performance of our 
business through a variety of share and bonus schemes. Employee engagement is considered 
further within the Section 172 statement on pages 40 to 41.

Our Code of Conduct which applies across the Group sets out the standard of behaviour 
expected of all of our people and includes guidance on policies such as anti-bribery, conflicts of 
interest and whistle-blowing procedures. We have a zero-tolerance approach to bribery and 
provide our colleagues with the ability to raise concerns regarding misconduct via an 
independent and confidential whistle-blowing service.

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022  
 
Charitable and political donations
During the year, the Group made charitable donations of £64,000 (2021: £60,000). No political 
donations, expenditure or contributions have been made or incurred (2021: £nil).

Major interest in shares
As at 12 September 2022 the following shareholders have notified the Company of their 
interest in 3% or more of the Company’s issued share capital:

Annual general meeting (AGM)
At the last AGM on 26 November 2021 resolution 2 (the Directors’ remuneration report 
(excluding the Directors’ Remuneration Policy)) was passed. However, just over 20% of the 
votes cast were against the resolution. George Adams, the Chair of the Remuneration 
Committee at that time, met with the shareholder accounting for the majority of the votes 
against the resolution to understand the reason for the vote and to further explain the 
Committee’s rationale for the actions detailed in the 2021 Annual Report. 

M&G Investment Management

Huntington Management

Artemis Investment Management

Stadium Capital Management

Premier Miton Investors 

Mr David Knight

Fidelity International

Tellworth Investments

Number of  
shares held

% of issued  
share capital

4,589,139

4,196,904

3,937,043

1,816,063

1,719,766

1,528,615

1,450,860

1,340,851

12.64

11.56

10.85

5.00

4.74

4.21

4.00

3.69

The Committee reviewed the LTIP targets for awards to vest in 2025 and consideration was 
given to both the lower and upper limit targets, aimed at ensuring that both the window is wide 
enough to act as a retention mechanism, whilst the upper target rewards stretching 
performance. An ESG element has also been incorporated into the executive remuneration 
packages. As noted in the 2021 Annual Report, the Remuneration Committee intends that any 
future increases in salary for the Executive Directors will be aligned with the wider workforce. 

A notice convening the Company’s upcoming AGM on 25 November 2022 will be issued to 
shareholders separately. 

Independent auditors
The Group’s independent auditors, PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC), have indicated their 
willingness to continue in office and the Audit Committee has recommended that PwC remain 
in office. A resolution to re-appoint PwC as auditors will be put to the members at the AGM. 

Disclosure of information to the auditors
So far as the Directors are aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the auditors 
are unaware. The Directors have taken all steps that they ought to have taken as Directors to 
make themselves aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that the auditors are 
aware of that information.

By order of the Board

Richard Butts
Company Secretary
10 October 2022

101

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsStatement of Directors’ responsibilities in respect of the financial statements

Directors’ confirmations
Each of the Directors, whose names and functions are listed in the Board of Directors section 
confirm that, to the best of their knowledge:
• 

the Group financial statements, which have been prepared in accordance with UK-
adopted international accounting standards, give a true and fair view of the assets, 
liabilities, financial position and profit of the Group;
the Company financial statements, which have been prepared in accordance with United 
Kingdom Accounting Standards, comprising FRS 101, give a true and fair view of the 
assets, liabilities and financial position of the Company; and
the Directors’ report includes a fair review of the development and performance of the 
business and the position of the Group and Company, together with a description of the 
principal risks and uncertainties that it faces.

• 

• 

In the case of each Director in office at the date the Directors’ report is approved:
•  so far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the Group’s 

• 

and Company’s auditors are unaware; and
they have taken all the steps that they ought to have taken as a Director in order to make 
themselves aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that the Group’s and 
Company’s auditors are aware of that information.

By order of the Board

Richard Butts
Company Secretary
10 October 2022

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and the financial statements in 
accordance with applicable law and regulation.

Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial statements for each financial  
year. Under that law the directors have prepared the Group financial statements in  
accordance with UK-adopted international accounting standards and the company financial 
statements in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice 
(United Kingdom Accounting Standards, comprising FRS 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’, 
and applicable law).

Under company law, Directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are 
satisfied that they give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Group and Company 
and of the profit or loss of the Group for that period. In preparing the financial statements,  
the Directors are required to:
•  Select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently;
•  State whether applicable UK-adopted international accounting standards have been 

followed for the group financial statements and United Kingdom Accounting Standards, 
comprising FRS 101 have been followed for the company financial statements, subject to 
any material departures disclosed and explained in the financial statements;

•  Make judgements and accounting estimates that are reasonable and prudent; and
•  Prepare the financial statements on the going concern basis unless it is inappropriate to 

presume that the Group and Company will continue in business.

The Directors are responsible for safeguarding the assets of the Group and Company  
and hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and  
other irregularities.

The Directors are also responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient 
to show and explain the Group’s and Company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable 
accuracy at any time the financial position of the Group and Company and enable them to 
ensure that the financial statements and the Directors’ remuneration report comply with the 
Companies Act 2006.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the Company’s website. 
Legislation in the United Kingdom governing the preparation and dissemination of financial 
statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.

102

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Financial statements

Independent auditors’ report to the members of ScS Group plc

Report on the audit of the financial statements

Other than those disclosed in note 4 to the financial statements, we have provided no 
non-audit services to the company in the period under audit.

Opinion
In our opinion:
•  ScS Group plc’s group financial statements and company financial statements (the 
“financial statements”) give a true and fair view of the state of the group’s and of the 
company’s affairs as at 30 July 2022 and of the group’s profit and the group’s and 
company’s cash flows for the 52 week period then ended;
the group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with UK-
adopted international accounting standards;
the company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with 
United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice (United Kingdom Accounting 
Standards, comprising FRS 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework”, and applicable law); and
the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the 
Companies Act 2006.

• 

• 

• 

We have audited the financial statements, included within the Annual Report, which comprise: 
the Consolidated and Company statements of financial position as at 30 July 2022; the 
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income, the Consolidated and Company 
statements of changes in equity; and the Consolidated and Company statements of cash 
flows for the period then ended; and the notes to the consolidated and company financial 
statements, which include a description of the significant accounting policies.

Our opinion is consistent with our reporting to the Audit Committee.

Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) 
and applicable law. Our responsibilities under ISAs (UK) are further described in the Auditors’ 
responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements section of our report. We believe that the 
audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.

Independence
We remained independent of the group in accordance with the ethical requirements that are 
relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the UK, which includes the FRC’s Ethical 
Standard, as applicable to listed public interest entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical 
responsibilities in accordance with these requirements.

To the best of our knowledge and belief, we declare that non-audit services prohibited by the 
FRC’s Ethical Standard were not provided.

Our audit approach
Overview
Audit scope
•  We performed an audit of the complete financial information of the Group’s trading entity 

A Share & Sons Limited and the Company.

•  The timing of the audits for the statutory accounts for the Group, Company and the 

subsidiary company took place at the same point in time and, as such, as at the date of 
this opinion we have audited all material balances across the Group.

Key audit matters
• 
•  Carrying value of investment (parent)

Impairment of assets in relation to loss making stores (group)

Materiality
•  Overall group materiality: £3,250,000 (2021: £2,650,000) based on 1% of revenue capped 
at 20% of profit before tax (2021: 1% of revenue, capped at 20% of three year average 
profit/(loss) before tax).

•  Overall company materiality: £708,000 (2021: £705,000) based on 1% of total assets.
•  Performance materiality: £2,437,500 (2021: £1,987,500) (group) and £531,000 (2021: 

£529,000) (company).

The scope of our audit
As part of designing our audit, we determined materiality and assessed the risks of material 
misstatement in the financial statements.

Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in the auditors’ professional judgement, were of 
most significance in the audit of the financial statements of the current period and include the 
most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) 
identified by the auditors, including those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit 
strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement 
team. These matters, and any comments we make on the results of our procedures thereon, 
were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in 
forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.

103

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsFinancial statements continued

Independent auditors’ report to the members of ScS Group plc continued

Key audit matters continued
This is not a complete list of all risks identified by our audit.

Carrying value of investment is a new key audit matter this year. Impact of COVID-19, which 
was a key audit matter last year, is no longer included because COVID-19 has not had a 
significant impact on the Group in the current year. Otherwise, the key audit matters below are 
consistent with last year.

Key audit matter 

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Impairment of assets in relation to loss making stores (group) 

Refer to pages 81 (Audit Committee Report) 
and 118 (Critical accounting estimates and 
assumptions – Impairment of property, plant 
and equipment and right of use assets). ScS 
Group plc has 98 stores at year end (100 stores 
at the prior year end). The directors are 
required to consider if there has been any 
indicators of impairment on a store by store 
basis. Where there is an indicator of impairment 
in a store’s value management test the carrying 
value of assets by reference to the future 
discounted cash flows that the store is 
expected to generate. There are a number of 
judgements involved in the impairment of asset 
calculation, including forecasting of future 
results, length of leases, allocation of costs and 
use of an appropriate discount rate. As such, 
the judgements involved in the impairment  
of asset calculation were an area of focus for 
our audit.

We obtained the impairment workings from management and 
checked their arithmetical accuracy. We have agreed the 
inputs to the workings to board approved budgets. We agreed 
the allocation of fixed assets on a sample basis by vouching to 
invoice for any new additions and fixed asset register for 
owned assets. We assessed the store by store allocation of 
revenue and direct costs for reasonableness by comparing to 
previous year actual’s. We agreed that central costs had been 
allocated on a reasonable basis to the underlying stores, and all 
material costs had been allocated on a reasonable basis to the 
underlying stores, and all material costs have been allocated. 
We agreed that the rental charge was correctly excluded from 
the stores cash flows. There were no issues noted with the 
underlying data used in calculating the impairment provision. 
Management’s assessment of which stores were at risk of 
impairment were based on the forecasted future performance 
of individual stores in the group’s portfolio. We agreed the 
FY23 forecasted results used in the asset impairment 
calculation were consistent with board approved budgets. We 
assessed the reasonableness of the assumptions used in the 
calculation and performed sensitivities where appropriate. 
This included, but was not limited to, assessment of discount 
rate and store growth rates with reference to the macro-
economic and industry predictions. We concluded that the 
level of impairment of fixed assets and right of use assets in 
the store portfolio was materially correct. We have assessed 
the completeness and accuracy of the related disclosures 
within the financial statements. We are satisfied the 
assumptions made by management in determining the asset 
carrying value and the related disclosures in the financial 
statements are appropriate. 

104

Key audit matter 

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Carrying value of investment (parent)

Refer to pages 81 (Audit Committee Report) 
and 134 (Critical accounting estimates and 
assumptions – carrying value of investments). 
ScS Group plc (parent) has a £70.0m 
investment balance held on the Company’s 
balance sheet and as at the date of our testing 
the market capitalisation of the Group was 
below the carrying value of the investment. 
Management concluded that this was an 
impairment trigger and therefore have 
prepared an assessment of the recoverable 
amount of the investment. There are a number 
of judgements involved in the recoverable 
amount calculation, including forecasting of 
future results and use of an appropriate 
discount rate. As such, the judgements 
involved in the calculation were an area of focus 
for our audit.

We agreed with management’s assessment that there was 
an impairment trigger based on market capitalisation being 
significantly lower than the carrying value of investments. We 
obtained management’s impairment assessment which 
included a value in use model based on discounted cash 
flows. We tested the inputs to the model by assessing 
forecast cash flows through comparing these to board 
approved budgets. We also tested the integrity of the model 
and its mathematical accuracy. We assessed the 
reasonableness of the assumptions used in the calculation 
and performed sensitivities where appropriate. We have 
assessed the completeness and accuracy of the related 
disclosures within the financial statements. We are satisfied 
the assumptions made by management in determining the 
asset impairment and the related disclosures in the financial 
statements are appropriate.

How we tailored the audit scope
We tailored the scope of our audit to ensure that we performed enough work to be able to give an 
opinion on the financial statements as a whole, taking into account the structure of the group and 
the company, the accounting processes and controls, and the industry in which they operate.

As part of designing our audit, we determined materiality and assessed the risks of material 
misstatement in the financial statements. In particular, we looked at where the directors made 
subjective judgements, for example in respect of significant accounting estimates that 
involved making assumptions and considering future events that are inherently uncertain. As 
in all of our audits we also addressed the risk of management override of internal controls, 
including evaluating whether there was evidence of bias by the directors that represented a risk 
of material misstatement due to fraud.

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Materiality
The scope of our audit was influenced by our application of materiality. We set certain 
quantitative thresholds for materiality. These, together with qualitative considerations, helped 
us to determine the scope of our audit and the nature, timing and extent of our audit 
procedures on the individual financial statement line items and disclosures and in evaluating 
the effect of misstatements, both individually and in aggregate on the financial statements as 
a whole.

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements 
as a whole as follows:

Overall  
materiality

How we 
determined it

Rationale for 
benchmark  
applied

Financial statements – group

Financial statements – company

£3,250,000 (2021: £2,650,000).

£708,000 (2021: £705,000).

1% of revenue capped at 20% of profit  
before tax

1% of total assets

Based on our professional judgement and our 
knowledge of the client our materiality was 
based on 1.0% (2021: 1.0%) of total assets. We 
used this as the benchmark for our materiality 
calculations due to the entity being a holding 
company with limited activity and our 
judgement around what would affect the 
decisions of the members.

Based on our professional judgement and  
our knowledge of the client, materiality was 
based on 1% of revenue which is a standard 
materiality benchmark particularly in low  
margin businesses such as ScS Group Plc. 
However it is important that we are mindful of 
our materiality level in the context of the 
business’s profitability. Consequently we 
capped the materiality level applied at 20% of 
the profit before tax. This is a change to the 
benchmark used in the prior year. Previously, we 
calculated materiality as 1% of revenue which 
was then capped to the materiality level applied 
at 20% of the three year average profit/(loss) 
before tax. We used an average in previous 
years due to the volatility of results caused by 
COVID-19 which no longer applies in the  
current year.

For each component in the scope of our group audit, we allocated a materiality that is less than 
our overall group materiality. The range of materiality allocated across components was 
£2,900,000 to £708,000. Certain components were audited to a local statutory audit 
materiality that was also less than our overall group materiality.

We use performance materiality to reduce to an appropriately low level the probability that the 
aggregate of uncorrected and undetected misstatements exceeds overall materiality. 
Specifically, we use performance materiality in determining the scope of our audit and the 

nature and extent of our testing of account balances, classes of transactions and disclosures, 
for example in determining sample sizes. Our performance materiality was 75% (2021: 75%) of 
overall materiality, amounting to £2,437,500 (2021: £1,987,500) for the group financial 
statements and £531,000 (2021: £529,000) for the company financial statements.

In determining the performance materiality, we considered a number of factors – the history of 
misstatements, risk assessment and aggregation risk and the effectiveness of controls – and 
concluded that an amount at the upper end of our normal range was appropriate.

We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to them misstatements identified 
during our audit above £162,500 (group audit) (2021: £132,500) and £35,000 (company audit) 
(2021: £35,000) as well as misstatements below those amounts that, in our view, warranted 
reporting for qualitative reasons.

Conclusions relating to going concern
Our evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the group’s and the company’s ability to 
continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting included:
•  Obtaining management forecasts for the period to July 2024 and evaluating 

management’s downside scenario, being a severe but plausible scenario, and challenging 
their appropriateness and underlying assumptions.
•  Testing the mathematical accuracy of the models.
•  Evaluating the level of forecast liquidity and forecast compliance with the bank  

facility covenants.

•  Reviewing the disclosures relating to going concern in the Annual Report.

Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties 
relating to events or conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on 
the group’s and the company’s ability to continue as a going concern for a period of at least 
twelve months from when the financial statements are authorised for issue.

In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the directors’ use of the going 
concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the financial statements is appropriate.

However, because not all future events or conditions can be predicted, this conclusion is not a 
guarantee as to the group’s and the company’s ability to continue as a going concern.

In relation to the directors’ reporting on how they have applied the UK Corporate Governance 
Code, we have nothing material to add or draw attention to in relation to the directors’ 
statement in the financial statements about whether the directors considered it appropriate 
to adopt the going concern basis of accounting.

105

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsFinancial statements continued

Independent auditors’ report to the members of ScS Group plc continued

Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern are 
described in the relevant sections of this report.

Directors’ Remuneration
In our opinion, the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been properly 
prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

Reporting on other information
The other information comprises all of the information in the Annual Report other than the 
financial statements and our auditors’ report thereon. The directors are responsible for the 
other information, which includes reporting based on the Task Force on Climate-related 
Financial Disclosures (TCFD) recommendations. Our opinion on the financial statements does 
not cover the other information and, accordingly, we do not express an audit opinion or, except 
to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in this report, any form of assurance thereon.

In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other 
information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent 
with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the audit, or otherwise appears to 
be materially misstated. If we identify an apparent material inconsistency or material 
misstatement, we are required to perform procedures to conclude whether there is a material 
misstatement of the financial statements or a material misstatement of the other information. 
If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of 
this other information, we are required to report that fact. We have nothing to report based on 
these responsibilities.

With respect to the Strategic report and Directors’ report, we also considered whether the 
disclosures required by the UK Companies Act 2006 have been included.

Based on our work undertaken in the course of the audit, the Companies Act 2006 requires us 
also to report certain opinions and matters as described below.

Strategic report and Directors’ report
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit, the information  
given in the Strategic report and Directors’ report for the period ended 30 July 2022 is 
consistent with the financial statements and has been prepared in accordance with  
applicable legal requirements.

In light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and company and their environment 
obtained in the course of the audit, we did not identify any material misstatements in the 
Strategic report and Directors’ report.

Corporate governance statement
The Listing Rules require us to review the directors’ statements in relation to going concern, 
longer-term viability and that part of the corporate governance statement relating to the 
company’s compliance with the provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code specified 
for our review. Our additional responsibilities with respect to the corporate governance 
statement as other information are described in the Reporting on other information section of 
this report.

Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the 
following elements of the corporate governance statement is materially consistent with the 
financial statements and our knowledge obtained during the audit, and we have nothing 
material to add or draw attention to in relation to:
•  The directors’ confirmation that they have carried out a robust assessment of the 

emerging and principal risks;

•  The disclosures in the Annual Report that describe those principal risks, what procedures 
are in place to identify emerging risks and an explanation of how these are being managed 
or mitigated;

•  The directors’ statement in the financial statements about whether they considered it 

appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing them, and their 
identification of any material uncertainties to the group’s and company’s ability to 
continue to do so over a period of at least twelve months from the date of approval of the 
financial statements;

•  The directors’ explanation as to their assessment of the group’s and company’s 

prospects, the period this assessment covers and why the period is appropriate; and
•  The directors’ statement as to whether they have a reasonable expectation that the 

company will be able to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over 
the period of its assessment, including any related disclosures drawing attention to any 
necessary qualifications or assumptions.

Our review of the directors’ statement regarding the longer-term viability of the group was 
substantially less in scope than an audit and only consisted of making inquiries and considering 
the directors’ process supporting their statement; checking that the statement is in alignment 
with the relevant provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code; and considering whether the 
statement is consistent with the financial statements and our knowledge and understanding of 
the group and company and their environment obtained in the course of the audit.

106

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Corporate governance statement continued
In addition, based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of 
the following elements of the corporate governance statement is materially consistent with 
the financial statements and our knowledge obtained during the audit:

•  The directors’ statement that they consider the Annual Report, taken as a whole, is fair, 

balanced and understandable, and provides the information necessary for the members to 
assess the group’s and company’s position, performance, business model and strategy;

•  The section of the Annual Report that describes the review of effectiveness of risk 

management and internal control systems; and

•  The section of the Annual Report describing the work of the Audit Committee.

We have nothing to report in respect of our responsibility to report when the directors’ 
statement relating to the company’s compliance with the Code does not properly disclose a 
departure from a relevant provision of the Code specified under the Listing Rules for review by 
the auditors.

Responsibilities for the financial statements and the audit

Responsibilities of the directors for the financial statements
As explained more fully in the Statement of Directors’ responsibilities in respect of the financial 
statements, the directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial statements in 
accordance with the applicable framework and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view. The directors are also responsible for such internal control as they determine is 
necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the group’s 
and the company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters 
related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the directors 
either intend to liquidate the group or the company or to cease operations, or have no realistic 
alternative but to do so.

Auditors’ responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as 
a whole are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an 
auditors’ report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, 
but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a 
material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are 
considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to 

influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements.

Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We 
design procedures in line with our responsibilities, outlined above, to detect material 
misstatements in respect of irregularities, including fraud. The extent to which our procedures 
are capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud, is detailed below.

Based on our understanding of the group and industry, we identified that the principal risks of 
non-compliance with laws and regulations related to the Companies Act 2006, the Listing 
Rules and UK tax legislation, and we considered the extent to which non-compliance might 
have a material effect on the financial statements. We evaluated management’s incentives 
and opportunities for fraudulent manipulation of the financial statements (including the risk of 
override of controls), and determined that the principal risks were related to posting 
inappropriate journal entries to overstate revenue or the company’s EBITDA and management 
bias through judgements and assumptions in significant accounting estimates. Audit 
procedures performed by the engagement team included:
•  Discussion with management, including consideration of known or suspected instances 

of non-compliance with laws and regulations and fraud;

•  Review of board minutes;
•  Review of legal expenditure in the year to identify potential non-compliance with laws  

and regulation;

•  Evaluation of management’s controls designed to prevent and detect irregularities;
• 

Identifying and testing journal entries, in particular any journal entries posted with unusual 
account combinations which enhance EBITDA; and

•  Challenging assumptions and judgements made by management in their accounting 

estimates, in particular stock provisions and impairment of assets.

There are inherent limitations in the audit procedures described above. We are less likely to 
become aware of instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations that are not closely 
related to events and transactions reflected in the financial statements. Also, the risk of not 
detecting a material misstatement due to fraud is higher than the risk of not detecting one 
resulting from error, as fraud may involve deliberate concealment by, for example, forgery or 
intentional misrepresentations, or through collusion.

Our audit testing might include testing complete populations of certain transactions and 
balances, possibly using data auditing techniques. However, it typically involves selecting a 
limited number of items for testing, rather than testing complete populations. We will often 
seek to target particular items for testing based on their size or risk characteristics. In other 
cases, we will use audit sampling to enable us to draw a conclusion about the population from 
which the sample is selected.

107

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsFinancial statements continued

Independent auditors’ report to the members of ScS Group plc continued

Other matter
In due course, as required by the Financial Conduct Authority Disclosure Guidance and 
Transparency Rule 4.1.14R, these financial statements will form part of the ESEF-prepared 
annual financial report filed on the National Storage Mechanism of the Financial Conduct 
Authority in accordance with the ESEF Regulatory Technical Standard (‘ESEF RTS’). This 
auditors’ report provides no assurance over whether the annual financial report will be 
prepared using the single electronic format specified in the ESEF RTS.

Andy Ward (Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors
Newcastle upon Tyne
10 October 2022

Auditors’ responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements continued
A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located 
on the FRC’s website at: www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of 
our auditors’ report.

Use of this report
This report, including the opinions, has been prepared for and only for the company’s 
members as a body in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006 and 
for no other purpose. We do not, in giving these opinions, accept or assume responsibility for 
any other purpose or to any other person to whom this report is shown or into whose hands it 
may come save where expressly agreed by our prior consent in writing.

Other required reporting

Companies Act 2006 exception reporting
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:

•  we have not obtained all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or
•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the company, or returns adequate 

for our audit have not been received from branches not visited by us; or

•  certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or
• 

the company financial statements and the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to 
be audited are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns.

We have no exceptions to report arising from this responsibility.

Appointment
Following the recommendation of the Audit Committee, we were appointed by the directors 
on 3 November 2009 to audit the financial statements for the year ended 31 July 2009  
and subsequent financial periods. The period of total uninterrupted engagement is  
14 years, covering the years ended 31 July 2009 to 30 July 2022. The audit went out to 
competitive tender for the year end 27 July 2019 and we were reappointed as auditors  
on 21 November 2018.

108

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Consolidated statement of comprehensive income 
For the year ended 30 July 2022

Gross sales

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit
Distribution costs
Administrative expenses 

Operating profit

Analysed as:
Underlying operating profit
Operating exceptional items included within administrative expenses

Operating profit

Finance costs
Finance income

Net finance costs

Profit before taxation
Income tax charge

Profit for the year 

Attributable to:
Owners of the parent
Profit and total comprehensive income for the year 

Earnings per share (expressed in pence per share):
Basic earnings per share (pence)

Diluted earnings per share (pence)

There are no other sources of comprehensive income/(expense).

52 weeks ended 
30 July 2022 
£’000

Note

53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021 
(restated*) 
£’000

3

3

4

5

7
8

9

344,710

331,569
(175,305)

156,264
(21,304)
(114,761)

20,199

20,199
–

20,199

(3,856)
15

(3,841)

16,358
(2,774)

13,584

319,184

305,231
(158,244)

146,987
(18,680)
(101,534)

26,773

22,531
4,242

26,773

(4,180)
81

(4,099)

22,674
(3,610)

19,064

13,584

19,064

10

10

36.2p

35.0p

50.4p

48.6p

*  The prior year gross sales, revenue and cost of sales figures have been restated to account for warranty sales as an agent rather than principal under IFRS 15 (note 29). There are no changes to 

gross profit, or any subsequent financial statement line items.

109

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsFinancial statements continued

Consolidated statement of financial position 
As at 30 July 2022

Non-current assets
Intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment
Right-of-use assets
Deferred tax asset 

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities
Current income tax liabilities
Trade and other payables
Provisions
Lease liabilities 

Total current liabilities

Non-current liabilities
Provisions
Lease liabilities

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Capital and reserves attributable to the owners of the parent
Share capital
Share premium
Capital redemption reserve
Treasury reserve
Merger reserve
Retained earnings

Equity attributable to the owners of the parent

Total equity

Total equity and liabilities

110

The notes on pages 113 to 130 are an 
integral part of these consolidated  
financial statements.

The financial statements on pages 109 to 
130 were approved by the Board and 
authorised for issue on 10 October 2022 
and signed on its behalf by:

Steve Carson
Chief Executive Officer
ScS Group plc: Registered number 
03263435

As at 
30 July 2022 
£’000

As at 
31 July 2021 
£’000

Note

11
12
13
17

14
15

16
18
13

18
13

19
19
19
27

2,494
18,076
96,996
1,845

119,411

19,791
6,011
70,819

96,621

216,032

309
57,328
303
19,721

77,661

1,192
87,012

88,204

2,243
18,381
102,630
2,024

125,278

17,328
4,947
87,650

109,925

235,203

1,171
71,818
488
22,693

96,170

1,155
93,368

94,523

165,865

190,693

37
16
16
(681)
25,511
25,268

50,167

50,167

38
16
15
(549)
25,511
19,479

44,510

44,510

216,032

235,203

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Consolidated statement of changes in equity 
For the year ended 30 July 2022

At 26 July 2020
Profit and total comprehensive income
Share-based payment charge (note 21)
Purchase of treasury shares (note 27)
Sale of treasury shares (note 27)
Dividend paid (note 20)

At 31 July 2021

At 1 August 2021
Profit and total comprehensive income
Share-based payment charge (note 21)
Repurchase of own shares (note 19)
Cancellation of repurchased shares (note 19)
Purchase of treasury shares (note 27)
Issue of treasury shares to employees (note 27)
Dividend paid (note 20)

At 30 July 2022

Share 
capital 
£’000

Share 
premium 
£’000

Capital 
redemption 
reserve 
£’000

38
–
–
–
–
–

38

38
–
–
–
(1)
–
–
–

37

16
–
–
–
–
–

16

16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

16

15
–
–
–
–
–

15

15
–
–
–
1
–
–
–

16

Merger 
reserve 
£’000

25,511
–
–
–
–
–

25,511

25,511
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

25,511

Treasury 
reserve 
£’000

(182)
–
–
(410)
43
–

(549)

(549)
–
–
–
–
(1,476)
1,344
–

(681)

Retained 
earnings 
£’000

106
19,064
1,450
–
(8)
(1,133)

19,479

19,479
13,584
153
(2,201)
–
–
(1,304)
(4,443)

25,268

Total 
equity 
£’000

25,504
19,064
1,450
(410)
35
(1,133)

44,510

44,510
13,584
153
(2,201)
–
(1,476)
40
(4,443)

50,167

111

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsFinancial statements continued

Consolidated statement of cash flows 
For the year ended 30 July 2022

Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before taxation
Adjustments for:
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
Amortisation of intangible assets
Impairment reversal on non-current assets
Share-based payment charge
Finance costs
Finance income

Changes in working capital:
(Increase)/decrease in inventories
Increase in trade and other receivables
Decrease in trade and other payables

Cash generated from operating activities
Income taxes paid

Net cash flow generated from operating activities

Cash flows used in investing activities
Purchase of property, plant and equipment
Payments to acquire intangible assets
Interest received

Net cash flow used in investing activities

Cash flows used in financing activities
Dividends paid 
Purchase of own shares 
Sale of treasury shares
Interest paid
Interest paid on lease liabilities 
Payment of capital element of leases

Net cash flow used in financing activities

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

112

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

52 weeks ended 
30 July 2022 
£’000

Note

53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021
(restated*) 
£’000

16,358

22,674

12
13
11
5
21
7
8

14
15

8

20
19, 27
19, 27
7

4,162
21,523
882
–
153
3,856
(15)

46,919

(2,463)
(1,064)
(14,908)

28,484
(3,457)

25,027

(3,741)
(1,004)
15

(4,730)

(4,443)
(3,677)
40
(418)
(3,438)
(25,192)

(37,128)

(16,831)
87,650

70,819

3,980
21,149
865
(4,242)
1,450
4,180
(81)

49,975

879
(143)
(9,141)

41,570
(3,381)

38,189

(3,654)
(855)
81

(4,428)

(1,133)
(410)
35
(439)
(3,741)
(22,705)

(28,393)

5,368
82,282

87,650

*   The prior year cash flow has been restated to reclassify 
interest paid from operating activities to financing 
activities (note 29).

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Notes to the consolidated financial statements

1.  General information 
ScS Group plc (the ‘Company’) is a public limited company, limited by shares, which is listed on 
the London Stock Exchange, incorporated and domiciled in England, within the UK (Company 
registration number 03263435). The address of the registered office is 45-49 Villiers Street, 
Sunderland, SR1 1HA. 

The Company’s principal activity is to act as a holding company for its subsidiaries. The 
Company and its subsidiaries’ (the ‘Group’s’) principal activity is the provision of furniture and 
flooring, trading under the name ScS.

2.  Accounting policies 
Basis of preparation
The financial statements are prepared in accordance with UK-adopted International 
Accounting Standards and with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 as applicable to 
companies reporting under those standards. The Group’s financial statements are presented 
in sterling and all values are rounded to the nearest thousand pounds (£’000) except when 
otherwise indicated. They are prepared on the historical cost basis, except for share-based 
payments that have been measured at fair value. The financial statements for the year have 
been prepared for the 52 weeks ended 30 July 2022 (2021: 53 weeks ended 30 July 2021). The 
accounting policies which follow have been applied in preparing the financial statements for 
the year ended 31 July 2021. These policies have been consistently applied to all of the years 
presented, unless otherwise stated.

Change in accounting policy
Gross sales and revenue 
The Group has reconsidered the judgement it previously applied in respect of the accounting 
policy in relation to the sale of warranties. The Group now considers that it is acting as an agent 
in the sale of warranties as opposed to the principal. Further details can be found in our ‘Gross 
sales and revenue’ accounting policy below. 

As detailed in note 29, the change in policy requires restatement of gross sales, revenue and 
cost of sales in the year ending 31 July 2021 but has no impact on reported profit, cash flows or 
the consolidated statement of financial position.

Consolidated statement of cash flows
In the prior year the consolidated statement of cash flows presented interest paid within 
operating activities. This has been reclassified to within financing activities consistent with the 
classification of interest paid on lease liabilities.

Going concern
At the time of approving the financial statements, the Board is required to formally assess that 
the business has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable 
future and as such can continue to adopt the ‘going concern’ basis of accounting. 

Liquidity
The most significant factor in considering whether current resources are adequate is to 
consider the Group’s liquidity. At 30 July 2022, the Group’s cash balance totalled £70.8m and 
£18.4m was owed as trade payables for goods delivered. The Group has no drawn down debt, 
and further liquidity is available through the £12.0m revolving credit facility (RCF) granted on 
6 October 2022. This facility is committed for a term of 36 months and would be renegotiated 
well in advance of this maturity date. The RCF is subject to certain covenants in respect of fixed 
charge cover, liquidity and leverage.

Cash flows
As part of the Group’s ongoing review of going concern, the Directors have reviewed the 
results for the 12 months to 30 July 2022 and have modelled cash flow forecasts under the 
following scenarios:
•  A ‘base case’ scenario to July 2025 which reflects the challenging economic  

environment whilst also recognising the impact of our strategic progress on the  
Group’s results. We assume no further lockdown periods or direct impact on our  
store and distribution operation. 

•  A minor sensitivity which sees a reduction in revenue due to a downturn in consumer 

confidence whilst being able to maintain our assumed gross margin as per the  
‘base case’ scenario.

•  A moderate sensitivity which sees a reduction in gross margin versus ‘base case’ with a 
compounding annual increase in fuel and utility costs representing an increasingly 
challenging economic environment.

•  A ‘severe but plausible’ downside sensitivity which models much more significant 

reductions in sales and margin, together with the assumption that our suppliers have  
the credit insurance they use to support their payment terms with the Group  
withdrawn, seeing our suppliers request earlier payment dates to alleviate their  
working capital challenges. 

Under each sensitivity, the Group has modelled associated reductions in marketing and 
distribution costs, bonus costs and sales-related commission payments in response to the 
downturn in the Group’s performance brought on by the challenging economic environment, 
and the Group maintains suitable liquidity headroom. Under the ‘severe but plausible downside’ 
scenario more severe cash preservation methods are implemented, such as reducing capital 
expenditure, suspending shareholder returns and reducing headcount.

113

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements continued

2.  Accounting policies continued
Going concern continued
Throughout the ‘severe but plausible downside’ scenario, the Group would have significant 
cash headroom. Including the withdrawal of supplier credit insurance, the cash low point at the 
end of July 2023 remains substantial at £34.5m. Forecasts show there is no requirement for 
any additional sources of financing throughout the extended viability period.

For the reasons set out in detail above, the Board believe it remains appropriate to prepare the 
Group financial statements on a going concern basis.

New standards, amendments and interpretations 
At the date of authorisation of these financial statements, new standards, amendments and 
interpretations which had been issued but were not yet mandatory are not expected to have a 
material impact on the consolidated financial statements.

Basis of consolidation 
The Group financial statements consolidate the financial statements of ScS Group plc and the 
entities it controls (its subsidiaries) drawn up to within seven days of 31 July each year.

The financial year represents the 52 weeks ended 30 July 2022 (prior financial year 53 weeks 
ended 31 July 2021).

Subsidiaries 
Subsidiaries are all entities (including structured entities) over which the group has control. The 
group controls an entity where the group is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from 
its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power to 
direct the activities of the entity. Subsidiaries are fully consolidated from the date on which 
control is transferred to the group. They are deconsolidated from the date that control ceases.

Transactions eliminated on consolidation 
Intra-Group balances, and any gains and losses or income and expenses arising from intra-
Group transactions, are eliminated in preparing the consolidated financial information. Gains 
arising from transactions with jointly controlled entities are eliminated to the extent of the 
Group’s interest in the entity. Losses are eliminated in the same way as gains, but only to the 
extent that there is no evidence of impairment. 

Exceptional items 
Exceptional items are defined as items of income and expenditure which are material and 
unusual in nature and which are considered to be of such significance that they require 
separate disclosure on the face of the income statement. Any future movements on items 
previously classified as exceptional will also be classified as exceptional.

114

Gross sales and revenue
For the purposes of managing its business the Group focuses on gross sales, which is defined 
as the total amount payable by customers excluding discounts, returns, value added taxes and 
amounts payable to third parties relating to warranty products for which the Group acts as an 
agent. Gross sales is also stated prior to any accounting adjustments for interest-free credit 
fees. The Board believe gross sales is a more transparent measure of the activity levels and 
performance of its showrooms and online channels as it is not affected by customer 
preferences on payment options. Accordingly, gross sales is presented in this Annual Report, in 
addition to statutory revenue, as an alternative performance measure, with a reconciliation 
between the two measures provided in note 3.

Revenue is measured as the total amount payable by the customer net of discounts, returns 
and value added taxes. Revenue is measured net of the charges associated with interest-free 
credit sales and amounts payable to third parties relating to warranty products for which the 
Group acts as an agent.

Both gross sales and revenue are recognised at a point in time when the Group has satisfied its 
performance obligations by transferring control of the goods or service to the customer. This 
is deemed to be when the goods have been delivered to the customer before which payment 
is received. Warranty services, once sold, are subsequently provided by third parties. The 
Group does not control warranty products before they are transferred to the customer and 
therefore acts as an agent in these transactions. Amounts recognised in gross sales and 
revenue where the Group acts as an agent represent the net income receivable by the Group.

The Group operates a negative working capital model whereby customers pay a deposit at the 
point of order and, unless the order is to be financed using consumer credit, settle outstanding 
balances before delivery. Payment of part of the consideration is often, therefore, taken before 
the Group has fulfilled its performance obligation. These deposits taken from customers are 
referred to as contract liabilities under IFRS 15, and are presented as payments received on 
account within current liabilities, until the goods or services are delivered. A very small number 
of deposits are refunded without delivery of product, and therefore, materially, the value of 
customer deposits will be realised within 12 months. Where the outstanding balance is settled 
subsequent to the delivery of goods via consumer credit, the full financed balance is received 
within two working days of delivery from our third-party finance providers, who are then 
responsible for collecting subsequent payments from the customer. There has been no 
significant changes to the methodology in recognising contract liabilities in the current year.

ScS Group plc Annual Report 20222.  Accounting policies continued
Gross sales and revenue continued
The Group holds a sales return provision in the consolidated statement of financial position to 
provide for expected levels of returns on sales made before the year end but returned after the 
year end. The Group recognises the expected value of revenue relating to returns within sales 
provisions and the expected value of cost of sales relating to the returned items is included 
within inventories.

Segmental reporting
As noted in the gross sales and revenue note above, segments are reported in a manner 
consistent with the internal reporting to the Board (see note 3 – Segment information  
on page 118).

Intangible assets
Intangible assets purchased separately are capitalised at cost and amortised on a straight-line 
basis over their useful economic life. The useful economic lives used are as follows:

Computer software 

20-33% straight-line per annum

The carrying value of intangible assets is reviewed for impairment when events or changes in 
circumstances indicate the carrying value may not be recoverable.

Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment are stated at historic purchase cost less accumulated 
depreciation and accumulated impairment losses. Cost includes the original purchase price of 
the asset and the costs attributable to bringing the asset to its working condition for its 
intended use. Depreciation is provided on all tangible fixed assets, at rates calculated to write 
off the cost, less estimated residual value, of the tangible fixed assets over their anticipated 
useful lives at the rates shown below:

Fixtures and fittings 
Computer equipment 
Leasehold improvements  The shorter of the term of the lease or 2% straight-line per annum
Freehold buildings   

10-20% straight-line per annum
20-33% straight-line per annum

2% straight-line per annum

The carrying values of property, plant and equipment are reviewed for impairment when 
events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying value may not be recoverable.

Leases
The Group assesses whether a contract is, or contains, a lease at inception of the contract. 
Typically, lease contracts relate to properties such as showrooms and distribution centres, and 
vehicles leases. For leases in which the Group is a lessee, the Group recognises a right-of-use 
asset and a lease liability at commencement of the lease.

Lease liabilities 
The lease liability is measured at the present value of the lease payments, discounted at the 
lessee’s incremental borrowing rate specific to the term and start date of the lease, unless the 
interest rate implicit in the lease can be readily determined. Lease payments include:
•  Fixed payments (including in-substance fixed payments), less any lease  

incentives receivable;

•  Variable lease payments that are based on an index or a rate, initially measured using the 

index or rate as at the commencement date;

•  Amounts expected to be payable by the Group under residual value guarantees;
•  The exercise price of a purchase option if the Group is reasonably certain to exercise that 

option; and

•  Payments of penalties for terminating the lease, if the lease term reflects the Group 

exercising that option.

The lease liability is subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate 
method. It is remeasured, with a corresponding adjustment to the right-of-use asset, if there is 
a modification, a change in the lease term or a change in the fixed lease payments. Interest 
charges are included in finance costs in the consolidated income statement.

Right-of-use assets
The right-of-use asset is initially measured at cost, comprising:
•  The amount of the initial measurement of lease liability;
•  Any lease payments made at or before the commencement date less any lease  

incentives received;

•  Any initial direct costs; and
•  Restoration costs.

The right-of-use asset is subsequently depreciated using the straight-line method over the 
shorter of the asset’s useful life or the lease term. Depreciation on right-of-use assets is 
included in administrative and distribution costs in the consolidated income statement. The 
right-of-use asset is tested for impairment if there are any indicators of impairment. 

Leases of low value assets and short-term leases of 12 months or less are expensed to the 
Group income statement.

115

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements continued

2.  Accounting policies continued
Inventories
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value and consist of finished 
goods held for resale. Where necessary, provision is made for obsolete, slow-moving and 
defective stocks. Cost comprises the purchase price of goods and other directly attributable 
costs incurred in bringing the product to its present location and condition. Net realisable value 
is the estimated selling price less any further costs to be incurred to disposal.

Trade receivables
Trade receivables are amounts due from customers for goods sold or services performed in 
the ordinary course of business. If collection is expected in one year or less (or in the normal 
operating cycle of the business if longer), they are classified as current assets. If not, they are 
presented as non-current assets.

Trade receivables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised 
cost using the effective interest method, less provision for impairment. As a requirement of 
applying IFRS 9, the Group has applied an expected credit loss (ECL) model when calculating 
impairment losses on its trade and other receivables. The majority of the trade receivables are 
due from finance houses with which there is a very low likelihood, and no previous history, of 
default, and therefore, there has been no material impact of the ECL model.

Trade payables
Trade payables are obligations to pay for goods or services that have been acquired in the 
ordinary course of business from suppliers. Accounts payable are classified as current liabilities 
if payment is due within one year or less. If not, they are presented as non-current liabilities.

Trade payables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised 
cost using the effective interest method.

Borrowings
Borrowings are recognised initially at fair value, net of transaction costs incurred. Borrowings 
are subsequently carried at amortised cost; any difference between the proceeds (net of 
transaction costs) and the redemption value is recognised in the income statement over the 
period of the borrowings using the effective interest method.

Cash and cash equivalents
For the purpose of presentation in the consolidated statement of cash flows, cash and cash 
equivalents includes cash on hand.

Treasury shares
The Employee Benefit Trust (EBT) provides for the issue of shares to Group employees, 
principally under share option schemes. Shares in the Company held by the EBT are included in 

116

the balance sheet as treasury shares at cost, including any directly attributable incremental 
costs. Subsequent consideration received for the sale of such shares is also recognised in 
equity, with any difference between the sale proceeds and the original cost being taken to 
retained earnings. No gain or loss is recognised in the financial statements on transactions in 
treasury shares. 

The number of such shares is also deducted from the number of shares in issue when 
calculating the earnings per share. 

Share capital
Ordinary shares are classified as equity.

Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new ordinary shares or options are 
shown in equity as a deduction, net of tax, from the proceeds.

Pre-opening and launch costs
Pre-opening and launch costs are charged to the income statement in the year they are 
incurred.

Advertising expenditure
All routine and general advertising costs are expensed as incurred. Advertising costs paid to 
media companies are recognised as a prepayment until the advertising is placed in the media 
and communicated to the public, at which point the expenditure is expensed to the income 
statement.

Supplier contributions
Contributions received from suppliers towards the cost of displaying and promoting their 
product are recognised as a reduction in the advertising and marketing costs to which  
they relate.

Supplier rebates
Rebates receivable from suppliers are based upon the volume of business with each supplier 
and are recognised in the income statement in cost of sales or credited to stock as appropriate 
on an earned basis, by reference to the supplier revenue.

Pension costs
Contributions to the defined contribution scheme are charged to the income statement in the 
year in which they become payable. The assets of the scheme are held separately from those 
of the Group in an independently administered fund.

ScS Group plc Annual Report 20222.  Accounting policies continued
Taxation
Tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax. Tax is recognised in 
the income statement except to the extent that it relates to a business combination, or items 
recognised directly in equity or other comprehensive income. 

Current tax is the expected tax payable or receivable on the taxable income or loss for the year, 
using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date, and any 
adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years.

Deferred tax is recognised using the liability method, on temporary differences at the balance 
sheet date between the tax base of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts for 
financial reporting purposes, to the extent that the Directors consider that it is more likely than 
not that there will be suitable taxable profits from which the future reversal of the underlying 
timing differences can be deducted.

Deferred tax is measured on an undiscounted basis at the average tax rates that are expected 
to apply in the periods in which timing differences reverse, based on tax rates and laws enacted 
or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to set off
current tax assets against current tax liabilities and when they relate to income taxes levied by 
the same taxation authority and the Group intends to settle its current tax assets and liabilities 
on a net basis.

Foreign currency
Transactions in foreign currencies are translated at the rate ruling at the date of the 
transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated at 
the rate of exchange ruling at the balance sheet date. All exchange differences are taken to the 
income statement in the period in which they arise.

Share-based payments
The Company operates an equity-settled, share-based payment plan for Directors of the 
trading subsidiary undertaking, A. Share & Sons Limited, which includes the Executive 
Directors of the Group. The fair value of the Directors’ services received by the Group in 
exchange for the issue of shares in the Company is recognised as an expense in the financial 
statements of the subsidiary company to which services have been supplied. The total amount 
to be expensed over the vesting period is determined by reference to the fair value of the 
shares issued, excluding the impact of any non-market vesting conditions (for example, 
profitability and sales growth targets). Non-market vesting conditions are included in 
assumptions about the number of shares that are expected to vest. At each balance sheet 
date, the Group revises its estimates of the number of shares that are expected to vest. It 

recognises the impact of the revision to original estimates, if any, in the income statement, 
with a corresponding adjustment to equity.

Dividends
Interim dividends are recognised when they are paid to the Group’s shareholders.  
Final dividends are recognised when they are approved by the Group’s shareholders.

Provisions
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation as a result of a past event,  
it is probable that a transfer of economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation, and a 
reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation.

Critical accounting judgements and estimates
The preparation of the Group’s financial statements requires management to make 
judgements, estimates and assumptions in applying the Group’s accounting policies to 
determine the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. The estimates 
and associated assumptions are based on historical experience and various other factors that 
are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. Actual results may differ from these 
estimates. The estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis, with 
revisions to accounting estimates applied prospectively.

Critical accounting estimates and assumptions
Management consider that accounting estimates and assumptions made in relation to the 
following items have a significant risk of resulting in a material adjustment to the carrying 
amounts of assets and liabilities.

Stock provisions
The Group holds £19.8m of inventory at the year end, and the majority of this stock is held for 
display in our showrooms. Due to the nature of this stock, it will often be subject to the wear 
and tear associated with use in a showroom environment, and some items may have also been 
in our showroom for an extended period of time. As such, this stock is often unable to achieve 
the same margin as the ‘special order’ stock purchased and delivered directly to our 
customers, and may occasionally be sold at a level lower than cost following a business 
decision to refresh the range or better utilise the space. The Group’s policy in relation to stock 
provisioning is, therefore, to provide for obsolete, slow-moving and defective stock, and 
therefore, ensure that stock is held at the most appropriate estimate of net realisable value. 

117

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements continued

2.  Accounting policies continued
Critical accounting estimates and assumptions continued 
In determining an estimate of this value, management has made judgements in respect of the 
quality of the Group’s products and saleability, and applied a provision based on historic sales 
levels. Whilst management considers that the methodologies and assumptions adopted in the 
valuation are supportable, reasonable and robust, because of the inherent uncertainty of the 
sale price of stock currently held, those estimated values may differ from the final sale and the 
total differences could potentially be significant.

Impairment of property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets
Management considers each store to be a cash-generating unit (CGU). At each balance sheet 
date, the Group reviews the carrying amounts of its property, plant and equipment, right-of-
use assets and intangible assets to determine whether there is any indication of impairment at 
a store following poor performance. If any such indication exists, the recoverable amount of 
the asset is estimated in order to determine the extent of the impairment loss, if any. 

Recoverable amounts for CGUs are the higher of fair value less costs of disposal, and value in 
use. Value in use is calculated from discounted cash flow projections based on the Group’s 
internal budgets extrapolated over the remaining showroom lease length, and management’s 
expectations of estimated growth rates. 

The key estimates for the value in use calculations are those regarding the discount rate used 
and expected changes to future cash flows. Management consider the potential impact of 
changes in these key estimates in performing sensitivity analysis. Management sets the 
budgets based on past experiences and expectations of future changes in the market and 
estimates discount rate using pre-tax rates that reflect the current market assessment of the 
time value of money and the risks specific to the CGUs, deriving from the Group’s post-tax 
weighted average cost of capital. If the recoverable amount of an asset or CGU is estimated to 
be less than its carrying amount, the carrying amount of the asset or CGU is reduced to its 
recoverable amount. An impairment loss is recognised as an expense immediately. Where an 
impairment loss subsequently reverses, the carrying amount of the asset or CGU is increased 
to the revised estimate of its recoverable amount, but so that the increased carrying amount 
does not exceed the carrying amount that would have been determined had no impairment 
loss been recognised for the asset or CGU in prior years. A reversal of an impairment loss is 
recognised as income immediately.

3.  Segment analysis
The Board have determined the operating segments based on the operating reports reviewed 
by the Executive Board (the Executive Directors and the other Directors of the trading 
subsidiary, A. Share & Sons Limited) that are used to assess both performance and strategic 
decisions. The Board have identified that the Executive Board are the chief operating decision 
makers in accordance with the requirements of IFRS 8 ‘Operating segments’.

The Board consider that the Group operates one type of business generating gross sales and 
revenue from the retail of furniture and flooring. All gross sales and revenue profit before 
taxation, assets and liabilities are attributable to the principal activity of the Group and other 
related services. All gross sales and revenues are generated in the United Kingdom. 

An analysis of gross sales and revenue is as follows:

Sale of goods
Associated sale of warranties

Gross sales
Less: costs of interest-free credit

Revenue

Of which:

In-store furniture
In-store flooring 
Online

Revenue

52 weeks ended 
30 July 2022 
£’000

53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021 
(restated) 
£’000

340,580
4,130

344,710
(13,141)

299,200
19,984

319,184
(13,953)

331,569

305,231

52 weeks ended 
30 July 2022 
£’000

53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021 
(restated) 
£’000

269,781
31,704
30,084

331,569

233,865
27,883
43,483

305,231

118

ScS Group plc Annual Report 20224.  Operating profit
Operating profit is stated after charging/(crediting):

52 weeks ended 
30 July 2022 
£’000

53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021 
£’000

Fees payable to the Company auditors for the audit of Company and 

consolidated financial statements

Fees payable to the Company’s auditors and their associates for other 

services to the Group

•  audit of the Company’s subsidiaries pursuant to legislation
•  other services (see Audit Committee report on page 82 for  

further information)

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment – owned
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
Amortisation of intangible assets 
Impairment reversal of property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets 

30

171

25
4,162
21,523
882
–

30

177

20
3,980
21,149
865
(4,242)

During the year, the Group received retail business rates relief from the UK government of 
£2,570,000 (2021: £10,236,000) in response to the COVID-19 outbreak. 

In the prior year the Group also received £2,964,000 under the UK government’s Coronavirus
Job Retention Scheme (CJRS) which was received in respect of employees on furlough and
recognised as grant income. However, the Group took the decision to repay the £2,964,000
CJRS payment in full.

5.  Operating exceptional items included within administrative expenses
In order to provide a clearer understanding of underlying profitability, underlying operating 
profit excludes exceptional items, which relate to costs that, either by their size or nature, 
require separate disclosure in order to give a fuller understanding of the Group’s financial 
performance. Exceptional items, booked to operating costs, comprised the following:

52 weeks ended 
30 July 2022 
£’000

53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021 
£’000

Impairment reversal 
If the discount rate of 9.8% applied in management’s calculations at 30 July 2022 were to 
increase or decrease by 1%, this would not have led to the recognition of an impairment charge 
or reversal in these financial statements. At 31 July 2021, an equivalent increase/decrease 
would have resulted in a £320,000 increase/£322,000 decrease to the impairment reversal 
that was recognised in the prior year. 

6.  Employees and Directors
6.1  Staff costs
The aggregate remuneration of all employees including Directors comprises:

Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Other pension costs
Share-based payment charge (note 21)

52 weeks ended 
30 July 2022 
£’000

53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021 
£’000

58,062
5,901
1,304
153

65,420

57,150
5,696
1,306
1,450

65,602

The Group received £nil (2021: £2,964,000) under the UK government’s Coronavirus Job 
Retention Scheme to offset against the gross wages and salaries costs disclosed above. The 
amounts received in relation to the prior year were subsequently repaid in full in the prior year. 

The average monthly number of employees (including Executive Directors) during the year 
was as follows:

Sales
Office and managerial
Services and warehousing
Cleaning

52 weeks ended 
30 July 2022

53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021

722
500
546
34

750
572
499
34

1,802

1,855

Impairment reversal

–

4,242

Total

Impairment reversal
In the prior year exceptional items include a credit of £4,242,000 which relates to the reversal of 
previous impairment to the Group’s stores. This was split between the right-of-use asset 
(£2,932,000) and tangible assets (£1,310,000), apportioned based on net book value. 

Details of Directors’ remuneration, share options, long-term incentive schemes and pension 
entitlements are disclosed in the Directors’ remuneration report on pages 84 to 97.

119

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements continued

6.  Employees and Directors continued
6.2  Key management compensation
Key management comprises the Directors of the trading subsidiary, A. Share & Sons Limited 
and the Group Directors and excludes the Non-Executive Directors.

9.  Income tax charge
(a) Analysis of tax charge in the year

The key management compensation is as follows:

Short-term employee benefits
Defined contribution pension cost
Share-based payment charge

52 weeks ended 
30 July 2022 
£’000

53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021 
£’000

2,648
112
153

3,465
200
1,450

Further detail on the above can be found in the Directors’ remuneration report along with 
details of shares exercised by the highest paid Director. 

The share-based payment charge of £153,000 (2021: £1,450,000) relates to the Group’s 
trading performance against the EPS targets under the Group’s Long-Term Incentive Plan as 
set out in note 21.

7.  Finance costs

Bank facility renewal fees
Bank facility non-utilisation fees
Other finance costs
Interest on lease liability

8.  Finance income

Bank interest received

120

52 weeks ended 
30 July 2022 
£’000

53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021 
£’000

–
413
5
3,438

3,856

19 
396
24
3,741

4,180

52 weeks ended 
30 July 2022 
£’000

53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021 
£’000

15

81

Current tax:
UK corporation tax on profits for the year
Adjustments in respect of prior years

Total current tax charge

Deferred tax:
Origination and reversal of temporary differences 
Adjustments in respect of prior years

Total deferred tax charge/(credit) (note 17)

Income tax charge in the consolidated statement  

of comprehensive income

52 weeks ended 
30 July 2022 
£’000

53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021 
£’000

2,571
24

2,595

243
(64)

179

4,385
527

4,912

(608)
(694)

(1,302)

2,774

3,610

(b) Factors affecting tax charge for the year
The tax charge (2021: charge) assessed on the profit (2021: profit) for the year is lower  
(2021: lower) than the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK of 19.00% (2021: 19.00%).  
The differences are explained below:

Profit before taxation

Profit before tax at 19.00% (2021: 19.00%)
Effects of:
Other expenses deductible 
Amounts deductible in relation to depreciation and impairment
Amounts not deductible/(deductible) in relation to share options
Adjustments in respect of prior years
Impact of changes in tax rates

Income tax charge in the consolidated statement of  

comprehensive income

52 weeks ended 
30 July 2022 
£’000

53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021 
£’000

16,358

3,108

39
(232)
56
(40)
(157)

22,674

4,308

281
(167)
(373)
(167)
(272)

2,774

3,610

(c) Factors that may affect future tax charges
The Finance Act 2021 maintained the main rate of UK corporation tax at 19% until 31 March 
2023, before increasing it to 25% from 1 April 2023. These changes were substantively 
enacted at the balance sheet date, 30 July 2022, and hence have been reflected in the 
measurement of deferred tax balances, resulting in deferred tax being calculated using an 
effective rate of 25% as at 30 July 2022.

ScS Group plc Annual Report 20229.  Income tax charge continued
(c) Factors that may affect future tax charges continued
On 23 September 2022 it was announced that the corporation tax rate change from 19% to 
25%, with effect from 1 April 2023, was to be cancelled. This was not substantively enacted at 
the balance sheet date and therefore the impact of this change is not reflected in the 
measurement of deferred tax. If the rate change had been substantively enacted prior to 
30 July 2022, the impact would have been to reduce the deferred tax asset by £442,000, with a 
corresponding debit to the income statement.

10.  Earnings per share

a) Basic earnings per share attributable to the ordinary equity

holders of the Company

Basic earnings per share from underlying operations
From exceptional items

Total basic earnings per share

b) Diluted earnings per share attributable to the ordinary equity

holders of the Company

Diluted earnings per share from underlying operations
From exceptional items

Total diluted earnings per share

c) Reconciliations of earnings used in calculating earnings  

per share

Profit from operations
Deduct exceptional items net of tax

Total profits from underlying operations

d) Weighted average number of shares used as the denominator
Weighted average number of shares in issue for the purposes of basic 

earnings per share

Effect of dilutive potential ordinary shares:
Share options (note 21)

52 weeks ended 
30 July 2022
pence

53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021
pence

36.2p
–

36.2p

35.0p
–

35.0p

41.3p
9.1p

50.4p

39.8p
8.8p

48.6p

52 weeks ended 
30 July 2022 
£’000

53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021 
£’000

13,584
–

13,584

19,064
(3,436)

15,628

52 weeks ended 
30 July 2022 
number

53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021 
number

37,498,925

37,828,902

1,354,896

1,435,066

Weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purposes of diluted 

earnings per share

38,853,821

39,263,968

11. Intangible assets

Cost 
At 1 August 2021
Additions
Disposals

At 30 July 2022

Accumulated amortisation
At 1 August 2021
Charge for the year
Depreciation on disposals

At 30 July 2022

Net book amount
At 30 July 2022

At 31 July 2021

Cost 
At 26 July 2020
Additions
Disposals

At 31 July 2021

Accumulated amortisation
At 26 July 2020
Charge for the year
Depreciation on disposals

At 31 July 2021

Net book amount
At 31 July 2021

At 25 July 2020

Amortisation is charged through the administration expenses line.

Computer 
software
£’000

8,645
1,133
(961)

8,817

6,402
882
(961)

6,323

2,494

2,243

8,256
750
(361)

8,645

5,898
865
(361)

6,402

2,243

2,358

121

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements continued

12.  Property, plant and equipment

Cost 
At 1 August 2021
Additions
Disposals

At 30 July 2022

Accumulated depreciation and impairment
At 1 August 2021
Charge for the year
Depreciation on disposals

At 30 July 2022

Net book amount
At 30 July 2022

At 31 July 2021

Cost 
At 26 July 2020
Additions
Disposals

At 31 July 2021

Accumulated depreciation and impairment
At 26 July 2020
Charge for the year
Depreciation on disposals
Impairment reversal

At 31 July 2021

Net book amount
At 31 July 2021

At 25 July 2020

122

Freehold land 
and buildings 
£’000

Leasehold 
improvements 
£’000

Computer 
equipment 
£’000

Fixtures and 
fittings
£’000

159
–
–

159

100
3
–

103

56

59

159
–
–

159

99
3
–
(2)

100

59

60

55,172
1,323
(1,902)

54,593

43,546
2,217
(1,902)

43,861

10,732

11,626

54,073
1,170
(71)

55,172

41,871
2,505
(71)
(759)

43,546

11,626

12,202

5,003
395
(1,747)

3,651

4,295
521
(1,747)

3,069

582

708

4,664
495
(156)

5,003

3,975
547
(156)
(71)

4,295

708

689

34,675
2,139
(1,998)

34,816

28,687
1,421
(1,998)

28,110

6,706

5,988

32,637
2,177
(139)

34,675

28,379
925
(139)
(478)

28,687

5,988

4,258

Total 
£’000

95,009
3,857
(5,647)

93,219

76,628
4,162
(5,647)

75,143

18,076

18,381

91,533
3,842
(366)

95,009

74,324
3,980
(366)
(1,310)

76,628

18,381

17,209

ScS Group plc Annual Report 202212.  Property, plant and equipment continued
The net book value of leasehold improvements is as follows:

Short leaseholds (up to 25 years)
Long leaseholds (greater than 25 years)

As at 
30 July 2022 
£’000

10,681
51

10,732

As at 
31 July 2021 
£’000

11,571
55

11,626

13.  Leases
This note provides information for leases where the Group is a lessee. The Group leases retail, 
distribution and office properties and motor vehicles. The leases have varying terms which are 
negotiated on an individual basis and contain a range of different terms and conditions. 

Consolidated statement of financial position
The consolidated statement of financial position as at 30 July 2022 shows the following 
amounts relating to leases. 

Impairment of property, plant and equipment
In the prior year the impairment review which compared the value in use of each CGU based on 
the Group’s budget and forecast cash flows to the carrying values as at 31 July 2021 resulted in 
a reversal of £1,310,000 against property, plant and equipment and was recognised as an 
exceptional item (see note 5).

As disclosed in the accounting policies (note 2), the cash flows used within the impairment 
model are based on assumptions which are sources of estimation uncertainty and small 
movements in these assumptions could lead to a further impairment charge or reversal. 

Right-of-use assets

Cost 
At 1 August 2021
Additions1
Disposals

At 30 July 2022

Accumulated depreciation
At 1 August 2021
Charge for the year
Depreciation on disposals

At 30 July 2022

Net book amount
At 30 July 2022

At 31 July 2021

Cost 
At 26 July 2020
Additions1
Disposals

At 31 July 2021

Accumulated depreciation
At 26 July 2020
Charge for the year
Depreciation on disposals
Impairment reversal (note 5)

At 31 July 2021
Net book amount
At 31 July 2021

At 25 July 2020

Leasehold 
property 
£’000

138,802
15,179
(1,514)

152,467

39,766
19,677
(1,514)

57,929

94,538

99,036

137,675
1,127
–

138,802

23,478
19,220
–
(2,932)

39,766

99,036

114,197

Motor 
vehicles 
£’000

6,602
710
(529)

6,783

3,008
1,846
(529)

4,325

2,458

3,594

5,808
1,221
(427)

6,602

1,506
1,929
(427)
–

3,008

3,594

4,302

Total 
£’000

145,404
15,889
(2,043)

159,250

42,774
21,523
(2,043)

62,254

96,996

102,630

143,483
2,348
(427)

145,404

24,984
21,149
(427)
(2,932)

42,774

102,630

118,499

1. 

 Right-of-use asset additions include new leases, lease renewals and increases in term and/or scope for existing leases.

123

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements continued

13.  Leases continued
Impairment of right-of-use assets
In the prior year the impairment review which compared the value in use of each CGU based on 
the Group’s latest budget and forecast cash flows to the carrying values as at 31 July 2021 
resulted in a reversal of £2,932,000 against right-of-use assets and was recognised as an 
exceptional item (see note 5).

14.  Inventories

Finished goods

As at 
30 July 2022 
£’000

19,791

As at 
31 July 2021 
£’000

17,328

As disclosed in the accounting policies (note 2), the cash flows used within the impairment 
model are based on assumptions which are sources of estimation uncertainty and small 
movements in these assumptions could lead to a further impairment. 

Lease liabilities 
The following tables show the discounted lease liabilities included in the Group consolidated 
statement of financial position and a maturity analysis of the contractual undiscounted  
lease payments:

The cost of inventories before cash discounts and volume rebates, as an expense and  
included in cost of sales relating to continued operations amounted to £180,827,000  
(2021: £164,795,000).

Inventories include a provision of £2,945,000 (2021: £3,213,000). Write-downs of inventories to 
net realisable value amounted to £931,000 (2021: £874,000). These were recognised as an 
expense during the period and were included in cost of sales in the consolidated statement of 
comprehensive income.

Current 
Non-current

Maturity analysis – contractual undiscounted lease payments:

Group
Within one year
Within two to five years
After five years

Total undiscounted lease payments

As at 
30 July 2022 
£’000

19,721
87,012

106,733

As at 
31 July 2021 
£’000

22,693
93,368

116,061

As at 
30 July 2022 
£’000

As at 
31 July 2021 
£’000

22,971
68,414
27,922

119,307

25,784
72,591
29,101

127,476

The Group presents lease liabilities separately in the consolidated balance sheet.

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
The Group has recognised depreciation and interest costs in respect of leases, rather than 
rental charges of £24,403,000 (2021: £25,609,000). During the year, the Group recognised 
£21,523,000 (2021: £21,149,000) of depreciation charges and £3,438,000 (2021: £3,741,000) 
of interest costs in respect of these leases. Leases of low value assets and short-term leases 
of 12 months or less are expensed to the Group income statement.

124

15.  Trade and other receivables

Trade receivables
Other receivables
Prepayments

As at 
30 July 2022 
£’000

As at 
31 July 2021 
£’000

314
3,092
2,605

6,011

808
1,859
2,280

4,947

The fair value of trade and other receivables is approximate to their carrying value. Trade and 
other receivables are considered due once they have passed the contracted due date. 

The carrying amounts of trade and other receivables are all denominated in Sterling.

The majority of the trade receivables are due from third-party finance providers with which 
there is a very low likelihood, and no previous history, of default, and therefore, there has been 
no material impact of the Group’s expected credit loss model.

The bad debt provision is not considered material for disclosure.

ScS Group plc Annual Report 202216.  Trade and other payables – current

Trade payables
Payments received on account
Other taxation and social security payable
Accruals 

As at 
30 July 2022 
£’000

As at
31 July 2021 
£’000

18,374
25,540
2,236
11,178

57,328

15,369
36,955
6,175
13,319

71,818

The deferred tax assets include an amount of £1,464,000 which relates to carried-forward tax 
losses. The Group has concluded that the deferred assets will be recoverable using the 
estimated future taxable income based on the approved business plans and budgets. The 
Group expects to continue generating taxable income. The losses can be carried forward 
indefinitely and have no expiry date. There is £99,000 of historic unused losses in the Group’s 
none trading subsidiaries which have not been recognised due to uncertainty that there will be 
eligible taxable income to offset the losses against. Deferred tax assets are expected to be 
utilised in more than 12 months from 30 July 2022.

18.  Provisions

At 1 August 2021
Provisions made during the year
Provisions used during the year
Unwinding of discount

At 30 July 2022

Property 
obligations 
£’000

1,643
83
(236)
5

1,495

Total 
£’000

1,643
83
(236)
5

1,495

Property provisions relate to an estimate of dilapidation and decommissioning costs based on 
anticipated lease expiries and renewals. These provisions are expected to be utilised at the end 
of each specific lease.

Current 
Non-current

As at 
30 July 2022 
£’000

As at 
31 July 2021 
£’000

303
1,192

1,495

488
1,155

1,643

The fair value of financial liabilities approximates their carrying value due to short maturities. 
Financial liabilities are denominated in Sterling.

Payments received on account represent deposits taken from customers at the point of order 
and in advance of the Group fulfilling its performance obligations to provide goods and 
services for customer orders. They will be realised in the next 12 months. The brought forward 
balance of payments received on account was recognised as revenue during the year.

17.  Deferred tax asset
The Group’s movements in deferred taxation during the current financial year and previous 
year are as follows:

Opening deferred tax asset
Adjustments in respect of prior years
Adjustment to profit and loss account arising from the origination  

and reversal of temporary differences 

Closing deferred tax asset 

Deferred taxation has been fully recognised in respect of:

Accelerated capital allowances
Losses
Other timing differences
Capital gains held over
Adjustment on initial application of IFRS 16

Closing deferred tax asset

As at 
30 July 2022 
£’000

As at 
31 July 2021
£’000

2,024
64

(243)

1,845

722
694

608

2,024

As at 
30 July 2022 
£’000

As at 
31 July 2021 
£’000

(675)
1,463
167
(30)
920

1,845

(407)
1,145
477
(157)
966

2,024

125

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements continued

19.  Share capital and share premium

As at 1 August 2021
Cancellation of repurchased shares

At 30 July 2022

Number of 
shares

38,012,655
(1,242,208)

36,770,447

Ordinary 
shares 
£’000

38
(1)

37

Share 
premium 
£’000

16
–

16

Capital 
redemption 
reserve
£000

15
1

16

Authorised, allotted and fully paid share capital is 36,770,447 of £0.001 each (2021: 38,012,655 
of £0.001 each).

During the year the Group acquired 1,242,208 ordinary shares at an average share price of 
174.4p per ordinary share for a total consideration including associated fees of £2,201,000. 
Following this purchase, the ordinary shares purchased by the Group were cancelled, and the
Group’s issued share capital subsequently consists of 36,770,447 ordinary shares, each with 
one voting right.

20.  Dividends
A final dividend for the year ended 31 July 2021 of 7.0p resulted in a payment of £2,659,000 which 
was made on 10 December 2021. It has been recognised in shareholders’ equity in the year to 
30 July 2022.

An interim dividend of 4.5p (2021: 3.0p) per ordinary share was declared by the Board on 22 March 
2022 and resulted in a payment of £1,684,000 which was made on 12 May 2022. It has been 
recognised in shareholders’ equity in the year to 30 July 2022.

During the year dividend equivalents were paid on the vesting of the 2020 LTIP  
totalling £100,000.

21.  Share-based payments
The Group operates equity-settled share schemes for certain employees that are intended to 
act as a long-term incentive to help retain key employees and Directors who are considered 
important to the success of the business.

Post-admission incentive arrangements
The ScS Group plc Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) was adopted on 21 January 2015. The LTIP 
allows for various types of awards and the following grants over shares in ScS Group plc have 
been made:
(i)  Market value options under an HMRC approved Company Share Option Plan (CSOP) 

conditional on the IPO taking place (approved on 21 January 2015).

(ii)  Unapproved market value options conditional on the IPO taking place (approved on 

21 January 2015).

(iii)  Performance-based £nil cost options granted on 17 October 2016. The performance 

condition was based on EPS as set out in the consolidated audited financial statements of 
the Group for the financial year ended 27 July 2019. As the EPS for the Group was higher 
than the minimum performance condition set, a proportion of these options were awarded 
as at 25 July 2020.

(iv)  Performance-based £nil cost options granted on 16 October 2017. The performance 

condition was based on EPS as set out in the consolidated audited financial statements of 
the Group for the financial year ended 25 July 2020. As the EPS for the Group was lower 
than the minimum performance condition set, these options lapsed as at 31 July 2021.
(v)  Performance-based £nil cost options granted on 15 October 2018. The performance 

condition was based on EPS as set out in the consolidated audited financial statements of 
the Group for the financial year ended 31 July 2021. As the EPS for the Group was higher 
than the minimum performance condition set, a proportion of these options were 
exercised as at 31 July 2021.

(vi)  Performance-based £nil cost options granted on 14 October 2019. The performance 

condition is based on EPS as set out in the consolidated audited financial statements of the 
Group for the financial year ended 30 July 2022.

Given the strength of the Group’s balance sheet coupled with the strong result for the year a final 
dividend of 9.0p has been proposed and, if approved, will be recorded within the financial 
statements for the year ended 29 July 2023.

(vii) Performance-based £nil cost options granted on 12 October 2020. The performance 

condition is based on EPS as set out in the consolidated audited financial statements of the 
Group for the financial year ended 29 July 2023.

(viii) Performance-based £nil cost options granted on 18 October 2021. The performance 

condition is based on EPS as set out in the consolidated audited financial statements of the 
Group for the financial year ended 27 July 2024.

126

ScS Group plc Annual Report 202221.  Share-based payments continued
Fair value of awards
The awards granted have been valued using the Black-Scholes model. No performance conditions were included in the fair value calculations.

The expected life is the estimated time period to exercise. The expected volatility is calculated by reference to the historic volatility of the  
Group from the period between admission and the date of grant and historic volatilities of comparator companies measured over a period 
commensurate with the expected life. The dividend yield is based on the target dividend yield set at IPO (with the exception of awards that  
give an entitlement to receive dividend equivalents). The risk-free interest rate is the yield on UK government bonds of a term consistent with  
the expected life. The level of vesting is estimated at the balance sheet date and will be trued up until the vesting date. 

Outstanding as at 26 July 2020
Granted
Lapsed
Forfeited
Exercised

Outstanding as at 31 July 2021
Granted
Lapsed
Forfeited
Exercised

Outstanding as at 30 July 2022

Exercisable at 30 July 2022

Exercisable at 31 July 2021

Weighted average remaining contractual life (months)

Weighted average share price at exercise

LTIP  
(CSOP market value options)

2020, 2021 and 2022 LTIP  
(Directors’ awards)

LTIP  
(all awards)

Share  
awards

47,513 
–
–
–
(19,861)

27,652 
–
–
–
(22,772)

4,880 

4,880 

27,652 

–

–

Average  
exercise price

Share  
awards

Average  
exercise price 

Share  
awards

Average  
exercise price

£1.75
–
–
–
£1.75

£1.75
–
–
–
£1.75

£1.75

£1.75

£1.75

–

£1.75

1,551,302 
627,163
(452,004)
(319,047)
–

1,407,414 
584,670
(59,998)
(81,342)
(500,728)

£0.000001
£0.000001
£0.000001
£0.000001
£0.000001

£0.000001
£0.000001
£0.000001
£0.000001
£0.000001

1,598,815
627,163
(452,004)
(319,047)
(19,861)

1,435,066
584,670
(59,998)
(81,342)
(523,500)

£0.05
£0.000001
£0.000001
£0.000001
£1.75

£0.033
£0.000001
£0.000001
£0.000001
£0.08

1,350,016 

£0.000001

1,354,896

£0.006

–

–

16

–

–

–

–

–

4,880 

27,652 

16

–

£1.75

£1.75

–

£1.75

As at 30 July 2022, 430,567 of the outstanding LTIP share options relate to the 2020 LTIP, which vested as at the year end date. Due to the 
Group’s EPS being higher than the minimum target set, a proportion of these options will be awarded. Further information on the LTIP is available 
in the Directors’ remuneration report on pages 86 to 87.

127

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements continued

21.  Share-based payments continued
Fair value of awards continued
The fair value of share options issued and the assumptions used in the calculation are  
as follows:

2015

2017

2018

2019

2020

2021

2022

24.  Financial instruments – risk management
Financial risk management policy
The Group’s principal financial instruments comprise cash and cash equivalents. The main 
purpose of these financial instruments is to provide funds for the Group’s operations. The 
Group has other financial instruments being trade receivables, trade payables and lease 
liabilities that arise directly from its operations.

Grant date

Share price at grant date
Exercise price
Number of employees
Shares granted
Expected volatility
Expected life (years)
Risk-free interest rate
Expected dividend yield
Fair value per share
Actual/estimated vesting

21 Jan 
2015
£1.75
£1.75
6
68,659
36.2%
5
1.06%
8%
£0.24
100%

17 Oct 
2016
£1.83
£nil
6
474,125
–1
3
–1
–1
£1.83
56%

16 Oct 
2017
£1.75
£nil
8
554,141
–1
3
–1
–1
£1.75
0%

15 Oct 
2018
£2.23
£nil
8
672,848
–1
3
–1
–1
£2.23
89%

14 Oct 
2019
£2.36
£nil
7
562,340
–1
3
–1
–1
£2.36
48%

12 Oct 
2020
£2.00
£nil
6

18 Oct 
2021
£2.63
£nil
6
627,163 584,670
–1
3
–1
–1
£2.63
0%

–1
3
–1
–1
£2.00
0%

1.  LTIP participants are entitled to receive dividend equivalents on unvested awards, and therefore, dividend yield does not 

impact the fair value calculation. Furthermore, volatility and risk-free rates do not impact the fair value calculation for awards 
with no exercise price or market-based performance conditions.

The total charge for the year relating to employee share-based payment plans was £153,000 
(2021: £1,450,000) which is in relation to equity-settled share-based payment transactions. 
There are no liabilities arising from share-based payment transactions.

22.  Capital commitments
Capital commitments contracted for but not provided amounted to £643,000 (2021: £nil).

23.  Pension commitments
The Group operates several defined contribution pension schemes for the benefit of its staff. 
The assets of the schemes are held separately from those of the Group in independently 
administered funds. The pension charges represent contributions payable by the Group to 
these funds and are shown in note 6. Amounts outstanding at the year end were £353,000 
(2021: £211,000) and are held in accruals.

128

It is the Group’s policy that no trading in financial instruments shall be undertaken. The Group 
has not entered into derivative transactions during the years under review. The Group does 
not undertake any speculative transactions and continues to pursue prudent treasury policies 
by investing surplus funds only with reputable UK financial institutions. 

Credit risk
The finance for all the Group’s credit sales is provided from external financing companies who 
bear the whole risk of customer defaults on repayment. The Group’s financial assets which are 
past due and not impaired are deemed not material for disclosure. The remaining balance is 
deemed fully recoverable due to the use of finance houses to mitigate the risk of recoverability. 
There have been no gains/losses on financial liabilities. 

Cash and deposits are invested with Lloyds Bank plc. 

Liquidity risk
The Group’s exposure to liquidity risk is low as historically working capital requirements have 
been funded entirely by self-generated cash flow. 

At 30 July 2022, the Group’s cash balance totalled £70.8m, and £18.4m was owed as trade 
payables for goods delivered. The Group has no drawn down debt, and further liquidity is 
available through the £12.0m RCF granted on 6 October 2022. This facility is committed  
for a term of 36 months and would be renegotiated well in advance of this maturity date. The 
RCF is subject to certain covenants in respect of fixed charge cover, liquidity, leverage and 
capital spending.

ScS Group plc Annual Report 202224.  Financial instruments – risk management continued
Financial instruments by category
Financial assets and liabilities are classified in accordance with IFRS 9. No financial instruments 
have been reclassified or derecognised in the year. There are no financial assets which are 
pledged or held as collateral. The Group does not hold any financial assets or liabilities held as 
fair value through the income statement, defined as being in a hedging relationship or any 
available for sale financial assets. 

The Group’s main financial assets comprise cash and cash equivalents and trade receivables 
(note 15) arising from the Group’s activities. These financial assets all meet the conditions to 
be recognised at amortised cost under IFRS 9.

Other than trade and other payables (note 16) and lease liabilities (note 13), the Group had no 
financial liabilities within the scope of IFRS 9 as at 30 July 2022 (2021: £nil). Balances within 
trade and other payables will mature within one year and lease liabilities are measured at 
amortised cost.

The fair value of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities is not materially different from their 
carrying values. Financial assets and liabilities comprise principally of trade receivables and 
trade payables and the only interest-bearing balances are the bank deposits and borrowings 
which attract interest at variable rates.

Capital management
The Group’s objectives when managing capital are to safeguard its ability to continue as a 
going concern and retain financial flexibility to provide returns for shareholders and benefits for 
other stakeholders. The Group considers capital to be equity and cash. Equity and cash are 
disclosed in the consolidated statement of financial position.

The Group manages its capital through continued focus on free cash flow generation and 
setting the level of capital expenditure and dividend in the context of the current period and 
forecast free cash flow. 

25.  Related parties
Holdings in subsidiaries and any relevant related party transactions are disclosed in the 
Company financial statements in note 5. Only ScS Furnishings Limited and the ScS Group plc 
Employee Benefit Trust are not included in the consolidation on the grounds of materiality.

26.  Contingent liabilities
The subsidiary undertakings of the Group are party to a debenture with Lloyds Bank plc which 
grants fixed and floating charges over the assets of each subsidiary undertaking.

27.  Treasury reserve

As at 26 July 2020
Purchase of own shares
Sale of treasury shares

As at 31 July 2021
Purchase of own shares
Sale of treasury shares
Issue of shares to employees

As at 30 July 2022

£’000

182
410
(43)

549
1,476
(51)
(1,293)

681

During the year, the Group’s Employee Benefit Trust purchased a further 624,453 ordinary 
shares of 0.1 pence each in the Group at an average price of 236.4 pence per ordinary share, 
and 554,204 ordinary shares were used to satisfy management incentive awards.

As at 30 July 2022 the Group holds 327,663 of its own ordinary shares of 0.1 pence each in the 
Group at an average purchase price of 207.7 pence.

During the prior year, the Group’s Employee Benefit Trust purchased 200,000 ordinary shares 
of 0.1 pence each in the Group at an average price of 204.4 pence per ordinary share, and 
19,861 of these shares were used to satisfy management incentive awards. As at 31 July 2021 
the Group held 257,414 of its own ordinary shares of 0.1 pence each in the Group at an average 
purchase price of 213.4 pence.

28.  Net debt

Cash and cash equivalents
Lease liabilities 

Net debt

As at 
30 July 2022 
£’000

70,819
(106,733)

(35,914)

As at 
31 July 2021 
£’000

87,650
(116,061)

(28,411)

As a result of IFRS 16, the Group is in a net debt position due to the recognition of a  
lease liability.

The change in lease liabilities from £116,061,000 to £106,733,000 was a result of £3,438,000 
(2021: £3,741,000) interest charged, £28,630,000 (2021: £26,448,000) principal and interest 
repayments and lease modifications of £15,864,000 (2021: £2,348,000).

129

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsNotes to the consolidated financial statements continued

29. Prior year restatement
Accounting for the sale of warranty products
The Group adopted IFRS 15 in the year ending 27 July 2019 and at that time applied a 
judgement that the Group acted as the principal in transactions involving the sale of 
warranties. A key judgement was that ScS controls the warranty before it is provided to the 
customer given that ScS takes responsibly for the majority of the customers’ purchasing 
process, including marketing the product and administering refunds, and has discretion to 
establish prices.

Following communication with the FRC (refer to the Audit Committee Report on page 80), the 
Directors have concluded that as the Group has no inventory risk associated with the warranty, 
and that the right to the warranty is created only when the warranty product is obtained by the 
customer (i.e. upon delivery of the furniture to which the warranty relates), it is appropriate for 
the Group to revise its judgement and conclude that it is acting as an agent in the sale of 
warranties. This change in accounting policy choice will allow for more relevant comparability 
with others in our industry.

The change in accounting policy has resulted in a prior year restatement, with gross sales, 
revenue and costs of sales being reduced by £5,335,000 in the consolidated statement of 
comprehensive income for the year ended 31 July 2021. This change results in revenue 
representing the net income receivable by the Group on the sale of warranties product.  
The restatement did not result in any change to reported profit, earnings per share, cash flows 
or in the consolidated statement of financial position.

Classification of interest paid
In the prior year the Consolidated statement of cash flows presented interest paid of £439,000 
within operating activities. This has been reclassified to within financing activities, consistent 
with the classification of interest paid on lease liabilities.

130

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Company financial statements

Company statement of financial position
As at 30 July 2022

Non-current assets
Investments

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Trade and other receivables
Deferred tax asset
Cash at bank and in hand

Total current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities
Trade and other payables

Total current liabilities

Total liabilities

Capital and reserves
Called-up share capital
Share premium account
Capital redemption reserve
Treasury share reserve
Retained earnings

Total shareholders’ funds

Total equity

Total equity and liabilities

As at 
30 July 2022 
£’000

As at 
31 July 2021 
£’000

Note

The notes on pages 134 to 136 form an 
integral part of these financial statements.

The total comprehensive income for the 
year included within the financial 
statements of the Company is £3,451,000 
(2021: £176,000).

The financial statements on pages 131  
to 136 were approved by the Board and 
authorised for issue on 10 October 2022 
and signed on its behalf by:

Steve Carson
Chief Executive Officer

5

6
7

8

9
9
9
12

70,000

70,000

70,000

70,000

32
813
–

845

35
442
–

477

70,845

70,477

19,193

19,193

19,193

37
16
16
(681)
52,264

51,652

51,652

70,845

14,196

14,196

14,196

38
16
15
(549)
56,761

56,281

56,281

70,477

131

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsCompany financial statements continued

Company statement of changes in equity
For the year ended 30 July 2022

At 26 July 2020
Profit and total comprehensive income
Purchase of treasury shares (note 12)
Sale of treasury shares (note 12)
Dividend paid (note 10)

At 31 July 2021

At 1 August 2021
Profit and total comprehensive income
Repurchase of own shares (note 9)
Cancellation of repurchased shares (note 9)
Purchase of treasury shares (note 12)
Issue of treasury shares to employees (note 12)
Dividend paid (note 10)

At 30 July 2022

Called-up 
share 
capital 
£’000

Share 
premium 
account 
£’000

Capital 
redemption 
reserve 
£’000

38
–
–
–
–

38

38
–
–
(1)
–
–
–

37

16
–
–
–
–

16

16
–
–
–
–
–
–

16

15
–
–
–
–

15

15
–
–
1
–
–
–

16

Treasury 
reserve 
£’000

(182)
–
(410)
43
–

(549)

(549)
–
–
–
(1,476)
1,344
–

(681)

Retained 
earnings 
£’000

57,726
176
–
(8)
(1,133)

56,761

56,761
3,451
(2,201)
–
–
(1,304)
(4,443)

52,264

Total 
equity 
£’000 

57,613
176
(410)
35
(1,133)

56,281

56,281
3,451
(2,201)
–
(1,476)
40
(4,443)

51,652

132

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Company statement of cash flows
For the year ended 30 July 2022

Cash flows from operating activities
Profit/(loss) before taxation

Changes in working capital:
Decrease/(increase) in trade and other receivables
Increase in trade and other payables

Cash generated from operations
Net cash flow generated from operating activities

Net cash flow used in investing activities

Cash flows used in financing activities
Dividends paid 
Purchase of own shares
Sales of own shares

Net cash flow used in financing activities

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

52 weeks ended 
30 July 2022 
£’000

53 weeks ended 
31 July 2021 
£’000

Note

6
8

10

3,080

(117)

3
4,997

8,080
8,080

(8)
1,633

1,508
1,508

–

–

(4,443)
(3,677)
40

(8,080)

–

–

–

(1,133)
(410)
35

(1,508)

–

–

–

133

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsNotes to the company financial statements  For the year ended 30 July 2022

1.  General information 
ScS Group plc (the ‘Company’) is a company limited by shares incorporated and domiciled in 
England, within the UK (Company registration number 03263435). The address of the 
registered office is 45-49 Villiers Street, Sunderland, SR1 1HA. The Company’s principal 
activity is to act as a holding company for its subsidiaries, and its shares are listed on the 
London Stock Exchange (LSE).

Critical accounting estimates and judgements
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with FRS 101 requires the use of certain 
critical accounting estimates. It also requires management to exercise its judgement in the 
process of applying the Company’s accounting policies. However, due to the nature of the 
Company, we do not consider there to be any critical accounting estimates or judgements 
made in the preparation of these financial statements.

2.  Accounting policies
The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of these financial statement are set 
out below. These policies have been consistently applied to all the years presented, unless 
otherwise stated.

Statement of compliance with FRS 101
These financial statements were prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 
101, ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’ (FRS 101). The Company meets the definition of a 
qualifying entity under FRS 100, ‘Application of Financial Reporting Requirements’ as issued by 
the Financial Reporting Council.

Carrying value of the investment
Management have considered the carrying value of the investment and calculated a value in 
use from cash flow projections based on the Group’s internal budgets, which are then 
extrapolated into perpetuity and discounted using the Group’s cost of capital. The key 
estimates for the value in use calculations are those regarding the discount rate used and 
expected future cash flows. Management utilised the budget and discount rate consistent with 
those use in the Group’s assessment of asset impairment. Management’s value in use 
calculation provided significant headroom over the carrying investment value and if the 
discount rate increased or decreased by 1%, this would not have led to the recognition of an 
impairment charge or reversal in these financial statements. 

Basis of preparation
The financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention and in 
accordance with the Companies Act 2006 as applicable to companies using FRS 101.

Capital management 
The Company follows the same capital management as the Group – see page 129 in the Group 
financial statements.

As permitted by FRS 101, the Company has taken advantage of the disclosure exemptions 
available under that standard in relation to business combinations, financial instruments, 
capital management, presentation of comparative information in respect of certain assets, 
standards not yet effective, impairment of assets and related party transactions. Where 
required, equivalent disclosures are given in the consolidated financial statements of ScS 
Group plc.

Going concern 
The Company is the ultimate holding company to a group which is highly cash generative, and 
which holds sufficient medium and long-term facilities in place to enable it to meet its 
obligations as they fall due. The Directors are, therefore, satisfied that the Company has 
adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future.

Further information on the Group’s going concern and ongoing viability is provided in note 2 of 
the Group financial statements.

New standards, amendments and interpretations
For the latest amendments and interpretations, please refer to page 114 in the Group  
financial statements.

Fixed asset investments
Fixed asset investments in subsidiary undertakings are recorded at cost plus incidental 
expenses less any provision for impairment.

Trade receivables
Trade receivables for the Company refer to prepayments made for services performed in the 
ordinary course of business. Trade receivables are recognised initially at fair value and 
subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, less provision 
for impairment.

Trade payables
Trade payables are obligations to pay for goods or services that have been acquired in the 
ordinary course of business from suppliers. Trade payables are recognised initially at fair value 
and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method.

134

ScS Group plc Annual Report 20222.  Accounting policies continued
Treasury shares
The Employee Benefit Trust (EBT) provides for the issue of shares to Group employees, 
principally under share option schemes. Shares in the Company held by the EBT are included in 
the balance sheet as treasury shares at cost, including any directly attributable incremental 
costs. Subsequent consideration received for the sale of such shares is also recognised in 
equity, with any difference between the sale proceeds and the original cost being taken to 
retained earnings. No gain or loss is recognised in the financial statements on transactions in 
treasury shares. 

Taxation
The tax charge for the financial period is based on the profit for the financial period.

Related parties
In these financial statements, the Company has taken advantage of the following disclosure 
exemptions available under FRS 101:
•  The requirement of paragraph 17 of IAS 24 ‘Related Party Transactions’; and
•  The requirements in IAS 24 ‘Related Party Disclosures’ to disclose related party 

transactions entered into between two or more members of a group, provided that any 
subsidiary which is party to the transaction is a wholly-owned by such a member.

3.  Income statement exemption
The Company has elected to take the exemption under section 408 of the Companies Act 
2006 from presenting the Income Statement or a Statement of Comprehensive Income for 
the Company. Total comprehensive income for the Company for the year was £3,451,000 
(2021: £176,000).

5.  Investments

Cost and net book value
At 31 July 2021 and 30 July 2022

Subsidiary 
undertaking 
£’000

70,000

The subsidiaries, which were owned and incorporated in the United Kingdom are as follows:

Name

Principal activity

Parlour Product Topco Limited

Holding company

Class of 
shares held

Ordinary

Held by subsidiary undertakings
Parlour Product Holding Limited
A. Share & Sons Limited
ScS Furnishings Limited

Holding company
Ordinary
Specialist retailer of upholstered furniture Ordinary
Ordinary
Dormant company

% of 
holdings

100%

100%
100%
100%

The registered office address for all of the subsidiaries is 45-49 Villiers Street,  
Sunderland, SR1 1HA.

All shares carry equal voting rights and are deemed to be controlled by ScS Group plc.

The Directors believe that the carrying value of the investments is supported by 
management’s value in use model (see note 2).

ScS Furnishings Limited is exempt from audit as it is dormant. Its aggregate amount of capital 
and reserves is £1.

4.  Directors’ emoluments
No Executive Directors received any remuneration for their services to the Company (2021: 
£nil). All Executive Directors’ remuneration was borne by another Group company, A. Share & 
Sons Limited. These costs have been consolidated into the Group’s financial statements and 
are disclosed, along with the Non-Executive Directors’ fees, within the Directors’ remuneration 
report on pages 84 to 97.

6.  Trade and other receivables

Prepayments

The Company does not employ any staff other than the Non-Executive Directors  
noted above.

As at 
30 July 2022 
£’000

32

As at 
31 July 2021 
£’000

35

135

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsNotes to the company financial statements continued

7.  Deferred tax asset
The Company’s movements in deferred taxation during the current financial year and previous 
year are as follows: 

As at 
30 July 2022 
£’000

As at 
31 July 2021 
£’000

During the year the Group acquired 1,242,208 ordinary shares at an average share price of 
174.4p per ordinary share for a total consideration including associated fees of £2,201,000. 
Following this purchase, the ordinary shares purchased by the Group were cancelled, and the
Group’s issued share capital subsequently consists of 36,770,447 ordinary shares, each with 
one voting right.

Opening deferred tax asset
Credited to profit and loss account arising from the origination and 

reversal of temporary differences 

Closing deferred tax asset

442

371

813

149

293

442

10.  Dividends
A final dividend for the year ended 31 July 2021 of 7.0p resulted in a payment of £2,659,000 which 
was made on 10 December 2021. It has been recognised in shareholders’ equity in the year to 
30 July 2022.

An interim dividend of 4.5p (2021: 3.0p) per ordinary share was declared by the Board on 22 March 
2022 and resulted in a payment of £1,684,000 which was made on 12 May 2022. It has been 
recognised in shareholders’ equity in the year to 30 July 2022.

During the year dividend equivalents were paid on the vesting of the 2020 LTIP totalling 
£100,000.

Given the strength of the Group’s balance sheet coupled with the strong result for the year a final 
dividend of 9.0p has been proposed and, if approved, will be recorded within the financial 
statements for the year ended 29 July 2023.

11.  Financial instruments
The Company has financial instruments, being trade receivables and trade payables that arise 
directly from its operations. The financial instruments – risk management policy has been 
included in note 24 of the Group financial statements.

12.  Treasury share reserve
Details of the Company’s share capital and share buybacks are given in note 27 of the Group 
financial statements.

Deferred taxation has been fully recognised in respect of:

Losses

Closing deferred tax asset

8.  Trade and other payables

Amounts owed to Group undertakings
Accruals and deferred income

As at 
30 July 2022 
£’000

As at 
31 July 2021 
£’000

813

813

442

442

As at 
30 July 2022 
£’000

18,785
408

19,193

As at 
31 July 2021 
£’000

13,906
290

14,196

Amounts owed to Group undertakings are unsecured, interest-free and repayable on demand.

9.  Share capital and share premium

As at 1 August 2021
Cancellation of repurchased shares

At 30 July 2022

Number of 
shares

38,012,655
(1,242,208)

36,770,447

Ordinary 
shares 
£’000

38
(1)

37

Share 
premium 
£’000

Capital redemption 
reserve 
£’000

16
–

16

15
1

16

Authorised, allotted and fully paid share capital is 36,770,447 of £0.001 each (2021: 38,012,655 
of £0.001 each).

136

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Company information

Registered office
ScS Group plc
45-49 Villiers Street
Sunderland
SR1 1HA
Tyne and Wear

Tel: 0191 731 3000
www.scsplc.co.uk

Company number
Registered in England: 03263435

Listing
Ordinary shares of ScS Group plc are listed with a premium  
listing on the London Stock Exchange.

Share registrar
Equiniti
Aspect House
Spencer Road
Lancing
West Sussex
BN99 6DA

Tel: 0371 384 2468
www.equiniti.com

Independent auditor
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
5th & 6th Floor
Central Square South
Orchard Street
Newcastle Upon Tyne
NE1 3AZ

Tel: 0191 232 8493
www.pwc.co.uk

Brokers
Shore Capital Group Ltd
Cassini House
57 St James’s Street
London
SW1A 1LD

Tel: 020 7408 4050
www.shorecap.co.uk

Principal bankers
Lloyds Banking Group PLC
10 Gresham Street
London
EC2V 7AE

Tel: 020 7616 1500
www.lloydsbankinggroup.com

Financial PR
Buchanan
107 Cheapside
London
EC2V 6DN

Tel: 020 7466 5000
scs@buchanan.uk.com 

137

Strategic report    |    Corporate governance    |    Financial statementsNotes

138

ScS Group plc Annual Report 2022Printed on paper made of material from well-managed,  
FSC®-certified forests and other controlled sources. 

This publication was printed by an FSC®-recognised printer that 
holds an ISO 14001 certification and has been manufactured  
using 100% renewable energy. 

100% of the inks used are HP Indigo ElectroInk which complies  
with RoHS legislation and meets the chemical requirements of the 
Nordic Ecolabel (Nordic Swan) for printing companies, 95% of press 
chemicals are recycled for further use and, on average 99% of any 
waste associated with this production will be recycled and the 
remaining 1% used to generate energy. 

In partnership with the paper supplier, the carbon emissions are 
calculated & captured by the planting of trees in new native 
woodland here in the UK, through the Woodland Trust’s 
Government backed Woodland Carbon Scheme.

The outer cover of this report has been laminated with a 
biodegradable film. Around 20 months after composting,  
an additive within the film will initiate the process of oxidation.

40109 SCS Annual Report 2022 CC22 Cover AW JG.indd   3
40109 SCS Annual Report 2022 CC22 Cover AW JG.indd   3

13/10/2022   10:01
13/10/2022   10:01